The

New World Order

Facts & Fiction

Mark Dice

The Resistance

San Diego, CA

The New World Order: Facts & Fiction

© 2010 by Mark Dice and The Resistance

All Rights Reserved

Published by The Resistance

San Diego, CA

No part of the text within this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form and by any means, graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or by any information storage retrieval system, without the written permission of the publisher and the author.

Printed in the United States of America

First edition printed in February 2010

Visit www.MarkDice.com

Table of Contents

About the Author
Introduction
Calls for a New World Order
World Governed by the Elite Through Occult Secret Societies
Mainstream Media Controlled
High Level Officials and Institutions within the NWO are Above the Law
Immorality and Destructive Behavior is Encouraged
Banking, Money, and Taxes
One World Currency
Population Reduction
One World Religion
A Global Dictator Claiming to be God
Global Police and Military Force
A Nation of Spies
Elimination of the Right to Bear Arms
Elimination of National Sovereignty
Monitoring the Population with Big Brother.
A Medicated and Sedated Population
Science and Technology
Global Warming / Climate Change
Fringe Topics
Conclusion
Footnotes

About the Author

Mark Dice has loved to read nonfiction books since just after he graduated High School in 1996 as he tried to figure out the world and find his place in it. Some things didn’t quite make sense to him until he learned about the powerful elite private organizations and secret societies that hold the true power in politics, banking, and the media.

After countless hours of research Mark has written several books on the subjects of secret societies, Big Brother, and the New World Order. His passion and dedication of educating others has been covered by numerous mainstream media outlets, many of which have simply attacked Mark for his beliefs that a global criminal mafia called the Illuminati operates under the cover of various organizations and manipulate political and financial arenas, slowly eroding the Constitution and America’s sovereignty and leading us into a New World Order.

Mark Dice believes that the Illuminati are fulfilling Bible Prophecy by creating a global government called the New World Order, that will one day be the infrastructure that the Antichrist will use to become a global dictator. He also believes that the New World Order promotes immorality, selfishness, materialism, and purposefully aims to keep the population entertained with television and issues of little significance in order to separate them from the political process, thus allowing the Illuminati to operate without much opposition.

Whatever religion you are, or if you consider yourself agnostic or atheist, you will find the information Mark brings forth in his writings to be extremely thought provoking and enlightening.

Through his books, radio interviews, and YouTube videos, Mark hopes people will become enlightened to the hidden realities of the New World Order, and can more effectively manage their lives after becoming aware of the agendas and mechanisms used to keep people mentally enslaved.

Mark is a nondenominational Christians and has respect for a wide variety of faiths and belief systems. He has a bachelor’s degree in communication and lives in San Diego, California.

Introduction

The world is changing at a faster pace every day. New technologies, new social trends, new threats and fears, new governmental regulations and laws, and new media content and entertainment to keep us amused for hours on end. While it is easy to notice the fun and new benefits that this rapidly advancing world has to offer us, we are often too caught up in the moment to notice the things that are falling by the wayside and getting lost to history. “The good old days,” as some call it.

With every step that civilization seems to take forward, it also seems to leave behind qualities that are universally accepted as better, but were unable to remain because “times are changing.” One thing that hasn’t changed is basic human nature. If we look back at history, thousands of years ago people were having the same basic struggles that they are having today. Struggles with health, money, and relationships; the three major categories to which nearly every human problem can be traced. Humanity’s needs have not changed, despite the dramatically different landscape and culture we find ourselves living in today. People have always struggled against oppressive and tyrannical leaders who use their power to take advantage of others. People have worked to provide themselves and their family with enough food and shelter so that they can avoid the harsh conditions that life without such things entails. And people have tried to remain healthy and hoped to avoid or cure sickness and disease.

History has noted several major life-changing revolutions in mechanics and technology that altered the landscape of societies forever. The agricultural revolution allowed people to grow and store food on a massive scale and sell it to others who, as a result, did not have to grow their own food, leading to labor diversification and specialization. The industrial revolution introduced mechanical devices allowing people to build and use machines that could do the work of hundreds of people and have strength and power beyond what a human workforce could produce, forever altering agriculture, mining, manufacturing, and transportation. The digital revolution, or the information age of computers and mass communication allowed instant access to information of nearly any kind from around the world with the push of a button.

We have also seen humanity grow from tribes to villages, and to cities, states, and countries. Proponents of what is called the New World Order believe that a global government is the next evolutionary step in civilization. While international agreements and cooperation between countries around the world is needed to ensure peace and facilitate economic activities, what is disturbing is that the proponents of the New World Order have been planning and implementing their agreements in secret—often denying such plans were in the works—until agreements were finalized and no public scrutiny was given. The elite groups and individuals involved in this planning see themselves as the rightful masters of the universe and are shaping the world to fulfill their own selfish and twisted desires.

Leadership circles throughout history have known how to control large populations of people through various means, many of which are underhanded and ruthless. Fear, threats, propaganda, appeals for blind patriotism and allegiance to the leadership or the country, are all strategies that continue to be used to keep the population as a whole in line and allow the current power structure to continue to operate unopposed.

In today’s society, particularly in America, most people simply don’t care about politics or what is happening in Washington DC. There are, however, measurable numbers of those dedicating themselves to watchdog and activist groups who work as a check and balance system to the power structure and sometimes have measurable effects in regards to preventing certain legislation from being passed or fighting to repeal certain laws or practices that have been enacted which are unconstitutional or unfair. While many of these groups and their members mean well, they are often only aware of the tip of the iceberg of what shapes the political landscape.

For those who truly seek to understand the power structure of the political world, if they look hard enough, or are lucky enough, they inevitably find the proverbial rabbit hole that leads them to discover the reality that secret societies and elite private organizations largely pull the strings and contain networks of power whose members and policies are directly responsible for corrupt and unfair legislation, nearly every major war, economic collapses, and other world altering events.

Some of these organizations, such as the Council on Foreign Relations, appear on the surface to be some sort of government entity, but in reality are private organizations which yield tremendous influence over the White House and Congress. Other organizations, such as the Bilderberg group and the Skull and Bones society are more secretive, yet when we look at the membership of such organizations and the activities these members have been involved in, it becomes clear that these groups provide the financial, personal, and logistical support to get their agendas to become realities. These agendas are frequently anti-American, unconstitutional, unfair, and completely counter to the interests of the vast majority of the population.

The members of these groups put on a face of public servants and fighting for the little people, yet their allegiance is to their wealthy friends and business associates. These organizations are not merely social clubs, but are highly organized, well-funded and motivated policy makers, essentially, who operate without any oversight or checks and balance systems. The activities of such groups should take place in the halls of Congress and be open to public scrutiny, yet they have lurked behind the scenes for decades with little awareness or opposition.

After even a minimal amount of investigating and research into the secret societies and private organizations such as Skull and Bones, the Bilderberg group, and the Bohemian Grove, it becomes obvious that the mainstream media is working in collaboration with such organizations in order to do everything in their power to prevent even the mere mentioning of such groups from making it on the airwaves or in print. Surely after over fifty years of Bilderberg group meetings, major television stations and newspapers would at least attempt to cover such an event, but year after year, there is usually not a single mention of it by the establishment press. Speculation and conspiracy theories aside, surely it is at least interesting that such an event occurs with such powerful politicians, business leaders, media moguls, and royalty, and should warrant some kind of coverage.

Every time the G-20 meets or a similar economic forum consisting of the leaders of the world’s most powerful countries, it’s the top story around the world, yet practically the only coverage of the Bilderberg meetings comes from smaller freelance journalists and websites, or perhaps an occasional European newspaper article. Only a fool could claim that such repeated blackouts are because the event is not news worthy. And only a fool can say that there is not a secret agreement between the American mainstream media owners and the Bilderberg group itself, where the two entities have agreed that editors will act as gate-keepers and kill any story by any reporter who even attempts to cover the event.

This is largely how the New World Order was able to be created without much opposition. It is only now after the foundation has been built and its construction is near completion that word of such a thing is mentioned publicly, as its secret creators promise it will bring a new era of world peace and prosperity. The New World Order is basically the plan to create a socialist global government headed up by one world leader and a wealthy ruling class of elite politicians and businessmen, and render the rest of the world’s population powerless peasants who are endlessly stuck in the daily grind. Everyone living in the New World Order will use a single global electronic currency, have little to no political power, and have an advanced high-tech surveillance system watching over everyone to keep them in line.

Historian Webster Griffin Tarpley explains, “The New World Order is a more palatable name for the Anglo-American world empire. It’s the planetary domination of London, New York, and Washington over the rest of the world. It’s hard to get people to join that or think they have a part in it if you call it the Anglo-American world empire. If you call it the New World Order, then people in India or someplace like that, or the European Union, might think, well, there’s something in there for us too.”[i]

There are other reasons most people haven’t heard of the New World Order until recently, as well. The culture implants ideas of inferiority in us, leading many to believe that they need a new car every five years, and that they need the newest cell phone with the latest features or else they themselves are old fashioned and out of touch with the times. But what shapes the culture and creates these kinds of invisible social pressures on us? It’s largely the mainstream media: The television, films, music and magazines that continuously bombard us with their materialistic and antisocial self-destructive content. Their carefully crafted messages are absorbed subconsciously by the audience which has no idea that they are essentially Pavlovian dogs being trained how to feel and how to act. The lyrics to a popular song by the 1970s rock band Rush, eloquently illustrates this by saying:

We’ve taken care of everything

The words you hear, the songs you sing

The pictures that give pleasure to your eyes

It’s one for all, all for one

We work together, common sons

Never need to wonder how or why

This song, titled The Temple of Syrinx, is sung from the perspective of the rulers of a fictional world where the elite leadership enjoy all the pleasures of life, while the masses of people live in servitude.

This book is by no means a complete analysis of the New World Order and the people, institutions, secret societies, and ideologies involved in its creation and control. My book The Resistance Manifesto (2005, 2008) provides a thorough analysis of these issues, and lays a solid foundation of understanding that this book builds upon. This book contains additional material and focuses on more modern issues and activities involving the New World Order. If one has not read The Resistance Manifesto, I strongly advise you to do so as soon as possible, because that book will take you further down the rabbit hole than you can imagine. The Illuminati, the Bohemian Grove, Satanism, the spiritual beliefs, histories, and goals of the secret societies and elite organizations involved in creating and maintaining the New World Order are covered in detail.

If you have not yet read the manifesto, do not worry, because your desire to learn the truth about this world will find nourishment with the book that is in your hands. Some of your suspicions will be confirmed with the information you find within these pages, and some things you will discover will be hard to believe. Once you have fallen down the proverbial “rabbit hole” nothing is as it seems, and it can be difficult at first to determine what is real and what is not. My book The Illuminati: Facts & Fiction has over four hundred pages of information separating some of the wild speculation and fraudulent information from the facts regarding the Illuminati secret society, if you wish to continue on the path of discovery you are now on.

In The New World Order, we will look at modern political policies that are being pushed or implemented in regards to the New World Order, as well as various social and cultural issues such as the population reduction agendas of the elite and the destruction of family values and morality that the mainstream media is helping to perpetuate. Other issues involving science and technology such as weather weapons, vaccines, and pharmaceuticals will be addressed as well.

Let’s face it, there is plenty to be worried about concerning the New World Order. With the countless examples of declassified government operations and experiments involving chemical and biological agents, advanced technology, false flag terror attacks, COINTELPRO, sabotage, elite politicians involved in occult secret societies and participating in bizarre rituals at the Skull and Bones headquarters in Connecticut or in the forest at the Bohemian Grove, people can get very distraught over this information, and even paranoid.

Some of the paranoia is completely understandable. With all of the proven cases of evil and corruption, when someone first hears of yet another instance that is along the same lines, it doesn’t surprise them that such a thing would be happening, and so sometimes they just simply believe it and start passing the information on to their friends and families thinking that it is true. Some of this false information is posted on the Internet by people who really do mean well, and just jump to conclusions about certain news events or rumors they hear, and get all worked up over them, when if they took a calmer approach and spent a little bit of time fact checking they could realize that their initial assumption was incorrect.

A small number of people who are interested in learning about the New World Order are mentally ill people, or are prone to mental illness, and the information they discover in books, videos, and on the Internet, is so overwhelming that they can’t adequately deal with it and it serves as a catalyst sparking their illness. The establishment loves to highlight these rare individuals or others with wildly bizarre views concerning the New World Order, so that they may serve as a straw man as they are presented to a mainstream audience to show that “all” people who talk about the New World Order or secret societies pulling the strings in major world events are “crazy” and should be ignored or ridiculed.

To illustrate how people involved in researching this kind of material may jump to conclusions, I will explain two instances involving emails to me or posts on my Facebook page (Facebook.com/MarkDice). One email I received read, “The ATM machine that I use, at the local Quik-Chek convenience store here in northern New Jersey, has read: ‘Temporarily Out of Service’ for the past six days. Is anyone else seeing similar outages?”

Clearly this individual is paranoid, thinking that because one ATM is out of service that there must be a national outage as some plot to prevent people from getting cash. Now, in his defense, it certainly is likely that someday large numbers of ATMs in multiple cities, or perhaps the entire country will be out of commission due to a cyber attack, so his fear is not completely unwarranted. The fact that he posted such a question for other Facebook users to give their feedback on to either confirm or deny that such a thing was happening in other cities shows the level of fear and suspicion this person has in his mind. An ordinary person or someone who isn’t so paranoid would have just assumed the machine hadn’t been fixed yet because the high school dropout working at the store making minimum wage couldn’t care less about calling the company to tell them their machine was broken.

Another example also comes from my personal Facebook page where a woman posted a comment and also emailed me asking me about a friend request she had gotten from “Nathan Rothschild.” The Rothschild family, for those who don’t know, have long been involved with the elite Illuminati secret society, so when this woman got a friend request from someone with that name, she got a little worried. As it turns out, just as I immediately suspected as soon as I read her email, someone had created a page as a satire pretending to be Mr. Rothschild and listed references to wanting to take over the world and enslave humanity on the “interests and activities” section. Such a practice is actually fairly common. When this woman was told this by another Facebook friend, she emailed me back telling me not to worry about it and that, “The Rothschild page was just a parody...Jason Bermas told me. Sorry I was freaking out. I didn’t sleep well last night. Maybe tonight will be better. My mind can rest again.”

Many people often fear that one day soon they are going to get rounded up by police or military and taken to a FEMA concentration camp because they know too much, or they listen to Alex Jones’ radio show and they’ve been tracked by the government using Carnivore or Echelon, and they’re on a government watch list, or they’ve ordered several books from Amazon.com about the Illuminati or the New World Order, and so now the establishment sees them as a threat. Again, some of their suspicions and fears are justified, yet fears like this tend to be overblown and fanciful.

A measurable amount of suspicion and even perhaps worry is healthy, but so is balancing it with skepticism and fact checking. People who find the proverbial rabbit hole often say that they can never look at the world in the same way, or live the same way ever again, but I strongly urge you not to turn your back on other important aspects of your life such as your family, friends, career, and fun hobbies. It is good to be aware of issues that are found within this book, but you must not let them cripple you with fear. By being aware and making others aware in a calm and rational manor, collectively we can help minimize or prevent major injustices from occurring simply due to massive grass roots resistance to such things, but you must guard your mind against becoming paranoid over such things or jumping to conclusions.

My goal with this book is to give you the reader tangible evidence of a corrupt and out of control government and what the secret establishment has done, and what they are hoping and planning on doing in the future and how it will affect you.

It is also my hope that with the information I bring forth in my books that you the reader can have a better understanding of the who, what, and why in our world, so that you and your family and friends can live more happy, healthy, and productive lives. It is not my intention to scare you, although some of the information is horrifying. “All I’m offering you is the truth,” as Morpheus told Neo in The Matrix. And what you see will be what was right in front of you the whole time, you just weren’t aware of it until now.

What most people think are examples of an out of control bureaucracy, are of little significance compared to the abuses of power and the freedom-destroying policies being implemented by politicians who are bought by the secret establishment. Paying too high of taxes or getting a ticket from a red light camera pale in comparison to the gross injustices that are occurring on a massive scale. Without large numbers of citizens resisting and voicing their disgust over proposed policies, we would be in a much worse situation with far fewer freedoms, but as we are coming to realize, often it doesn’t matter how loud the outcry is against a particular issue, the mainstream media is able to limit the exposure to the masses or attack those voicing the opposition to minimize their effectiveness.

We have also found that large numbers of politicians will vote whatever way their owners tell them to, no matter how much they betray the people in their state or districts. The secret establishment offers them more benefits than they could imagine in the form of cash, power, and privileges. Many are compromised and blackmailed into doing what the secret establishment wants. Their extramarital affairs, illegal activities, and personal perversions are often known and documented by the establishment, and when the time arises such things are held over their head and used to coerce them to act in ways that seem contrary to logic.

As the pieces of the puzzle are assembled one by one, a clear picture begins to emerge. The corrupt leadership that has weaseled their way to the pinnacles of power are doing their very best to create a New World Order where an untouchable elite is able to live lavish lifestyles and fulfill their every perverted desire, while the majority of the public is being kept occupied and out of the way by issues of celebrity drama or professional sports. The wealthy business titans have worked hand in hand with politicians to ensure that their wealth remains concentrated in the hands of their families for endless generations as they own and control the banks, vast real estate, and the infrastructure society depends on to function.

These men will stop at nothing to maintain their power and wealth, and certainly wouldn’t blink an eye when stealing the retirement savings of good hard working people, encouraging immoral and reckless behavior in society, particularly the youth, or even killing billions of people in a global genocide. This is the New World Order.

Calls for a New World Order

It’s interesting that the term, “New World Order,” is not just some idea coined by conspiracy theorists to describe changes in the organization and distribution of wealth and power in the world, but is instead a term used by elitist politicians to describe their own philosophy and plans. We don’t really need a “New World Order” to ease or eliminate world hunger, mass genocide, human trafficking, or political oppression. The elitists who are in power and whose organizations support their power are the ones responsible for such horrific conditions existing on the earth. No all-powerful global government is needed to stop these things.

When the term is used by politicians, what they really mean is that they want a larger bureaucracy, bigger government, more regulation, higher taxes, and they want the government to direct and control more aspects of people’s lives. They often include beautiful catchphrases of hope, peace, and change, in with their New World Order dreams, sounding like Miss America contestants wishing to end world hunger or bring about world peace. They are simply good sounding ideas with no real strategies or desire to strive for such changes and are used as a cover story to conceal their true motives.

But people like things that are new. New cars, new clothes, new technologies, traveling to new places, and having new experiences. Often something new is appealing simply for the novelty of it, and the experience of change. After all, there is always room for improvement in most people’s lives. Very few people are satisfied with the fact that they have to work until the age of 65, and only enjoy perhaps two weeks of vacation a year and by the time they reach their mid-sixties, may not even have accumulated enough assets or resources to quit working, so claims of prosperous changes and a new era of abundance and economic prosperity always sound good to the average Joe, who is simply a lifetime slave to the system.

For decades, a small minority of Americans and people around the world knew of the elite’s plans for a New World Order, and had frequently tried to warn others that such a plan was in the works. And, for decades, they were frequently ignored or faced with doubts and ridicule, but as time went on, in the late twentieth century and escalating into the twenty-first century, major global political figures had begun publicly mentioning their hopes and plans for a New World Order.

Even political pundit and former campaign manager for Bill Clinton, Dick Morris, admitted during an interview on the Fox News Channel that, “Those people who have been yelling the UN [United Nations] is going to take over…global government, they’ve been crazy…but now…they’re right.”[ii]

Barack Obama

44th President of the United States

Barack Obama traveled to Berlin, Germany when he was running for President in 2008, where he said, “Tonight, I speak to you not as a candidate for President, but as a citizen — a proud citizen of the United States, and a fellow citizen of the world.”

On an appearance on David Letterman’s show, Obama was talking about the problems with the War in Iraq, and said, “the way we’re going to win in the long term is not just militarily…we’ve got to give them a stake in creating the kind of world order that I think all of us would like to see.”

Nancy Pelosi

Speaker of the House at the opening of the 110th Congress on January 4th 2007.

“Our Founders envisioned a new America driven by optimism, opportunity, and courage. So confident were they in the new America they were advancing, they put on the great seal of the United States, ‘Novus ordo seclorum’—a new order for the ages…This vision has sustained us for more than 200 years, and it accounts for what is best in our great nation: liberty, opportunity, and justice. Now it is our responsibility to carry forth that vision of a new America.”

George H.W. Bush

41st President of the United States

“Out of these troubled times, our fifth objective – a New World Order – can emerge: a new era – freer from the threat of terror, stronger in the pursuit of justice, and more secure in the quest for peace. An era in which the nations of the world, East and West, North and South, can prosper and live in harmony. A hundred generations have searched for this elusive path to peace, while a thousand wars raged across the span of human endeavor. Today that new world is struggling to be born, a world quite different from the one we’ve known.”

Gary Hart

Former Senator (D) Colorado and Co-Chair of the CFR

Just three days after the 9/11 attacks, the co-chair of the Council on Foreign Relations stated, “There is a chance for the President of the United States to use the disaster…to carry out what his father – a phrase his father used I think only once, and it hasn’t been used since – and that is a New World Order.”

Henry Kissinger

Former Secretary of State

Henry Kissinger has been intimately involved with nearly every major organization or front group that is behind the push for a New World Order and was originally named the Chairman of the 9/11 Commission by President Bush which was set up to (pretend to) investigate the terrorist attacks on September 11th 2001. Kissinger resigned after widows of 9/11 victims discovered his business ties with the Bin Laden family.[iii]

In an interview on CNBC in February 2009, Kissinger was asked about the problems the new Obama administration was facing regarding the ongoing “War on Terror” and the economic meltdown, where he responded that Obama, “can give new impetus to American foreign policy partly because the reception of him is so extraordinary around the world. His task will be to develop an overall strategy for America in this period when, really, a New World Order can be created. It’s a great opportunity, it isn’t just a crisis.”

Bill Clinton

President of the United States from 1993-2001

At the Kennedy Center in Washington D.C., President Bill Clinton was giving a speech which was broadcast on C-Span where he said, “From 1945 and the end of the war through 1989 and the end of the cold war, we had a world view, Republican and Democratic presidents alike, from Harry Truman to George Bush…and after 1989 President Bush said, and it’s a phrase that I often use myself, and that is we need a New World Order.”

Richard Nixon

President of the United States from 1969-1974

In the October 1967 edition of Foreign Affairs; (which is the Council on Foreign Relations publication) then president Richard Nixon said that, “The developing coherence of Asian regional thinking is reflected in a disposition to consider problems and loyalties in regional terms, and to evolve regional approaches to development needs and to the evolution of a New World Order.”

Angela Merkel

Chancellor of Germany

When giving a speech to mark the 20th anniversary of the fall of the Berlin Wall, the German Chancellor Angela Merkel said, “The most important thing, when attempting to overcome barriers, is: Are the nation states ready and willing to give competencies over to multilateral organizations, no matter what it costs?…This world will not be a peaceful one if we do not work for more global order and more multilateral cooperation.”[iv]

Tony Blair

British Prime Minister from 1997-2007

Tony Blair has publicly stated his desire for a New World Order on multiple occasions, once even saying, “There is a New World Order like it or not.”[v] He used the term on November 12, 2001[vi] and in 2002[vii] and again on January 7, 2003,[viii] just to name a few.

Gordon Brown

Prime Minister of England

Gordon Brown at the 2009 G-20 meeting in London, England called for a New World Order to save the global economy from the recession sparked in 2008 by the housing collapse. He said, “I think the New World Order is emerging, and with it the foundations of a new and progressive era of international cooperation.”

Pope John Paul II

Head of the Catholic Church

On January 1, 2001 the pope declared at a service to mark the Roman Catholic Church’s World Day of Peace, that, “More than ever, we need a new international order that draws on the experience and results achieved in these years by the United Nations.” The headline in the London Guardian read, “Pope Calls for a New World Order.”[ix]

World Governed by the Elite Through Occult Secret Societies

For anyone who takes an in-depth and unbiased look at the political process and geopolitics, the role of secret societies and elite secretive private organizations masquerading as government entities or committees, truly hold the keys to power and function as a good old boy network consisting of a small number of elite politicians and businessmen who shape the political landscape and who either are the movers and shakers seen in the mainstream media, or are the brains and puppet masters behind those who we view publicly as the popular ones.

For a more complete list and analysis of these secret societies and elite organizations, you will find it in this author’s previous book titled, The Resistance Manifesto. You may already be familiar with many of these organizations, but even if this information is completely new to you, you will begin to develop a clear picture of just how the power structure of politics truly looks. Benjamin Disraeli, a British Prime Minister in the 19th century famously stated, “The world is governed by very different personages from what is imagined by those who are not behind the scenes.”

These powerful groups are numerous, such as the Bilderberg group, the Council on Foreign Relations, the Skull and Bones society, the Freemasons, the Bohemian Grove, and more.

The Bilderberg group meets once a year under tight security where powerful politicians, bankers, businessmen, media moguls and royalty meet to secretly discuss and disseminate their agenda for the coming months and years.

The Council on Foreign Relations, which sounds like a committee in Congress, is actually a private organization used to spread New World Order propaganda and push the Bilderberg’s wishes into law. The Skull and Bones society is a recruiting center at Yale University that operates as a fraternity which invites college juniors who the organization feels will later rise to positions of power and prestige in their career, and then grooms them and gives them access to the organization’s incredible post-graduate social network. The Bohemian Grove acts as a vacation spot where hundreds of these elite men meet in private in the rural setting of a resort built in a redwood forest grove, where they talk informally without the fear of being quoted in the press. This is also a place where they engage in bizarre rituals and sexual debauchery.

The inner circles of many of these organizations often overlap each other with people involved in multiple organizations at the same time. This inner circle of elite leaders is often referred to as the Illuminati, which is a term used to identify this group of organized criminals and means “enlightened ones.”

President John F. Kennedy once made a profound and chilling statement about secret societies when speaking to the American Newspaper Publishers Association. Kennedy clearly had intimate knowledge of the workings of the Illuminati and didn’t want to go along with them. Audio of this statement is widely available on the Internet. He said, “The very word ‘secrecy’ is repugnant in a free and open society; and we are as a people inherently and historically opposed to secret societies, to secret oaths and to secret proceedings.”

He continued, “We decided long ago that the dangers of excessive and unwarranted concealment of pertinent facts far outweighed the dangers which are cited to justify it…For we are opposed around the world by a monolithic and ruthless conspiracy that relies primarily on covered means for expanding its sphere of influence, on infiltration instead of invasion, on subversion instead of elections, on intimidation instead of free choice, on guerillas by night instead of armies by day.”

“It is a system which has conscripted vast human and material resources into the building of a tightly knit, highly efficient machine that combines military, diplomatic, intelligence, economic, scientific and political operations, its preparations concealed, not published, its mistakes are buried not headlined, its dissenters are silenced not praised, no expenditure is questioned, no rumor is printed, no secret is revealed.”

Several months prior to his assassination, John F. Kennedy had signed Executive Order No. 11110, which attempted to strip the Federal Reserve of their power to loan money to the United States government at interest. Many see this act as the major motive for the Illuminati orchestrating his assassination.

More recently, former Presidential candidate congressman Ron Paul stated, “I think there are 25,000 individuals that have used offices of powers, and they are in our Universities and they are in our Congress, and they believe in one world government. And if you believe in one world government, then you are talking about undermining national sovereignty and you are talking about setting up something that you could very well call a dictatorship – and those plans are there.”[x]

The idea of secretive organizations of powerful, wealthy, and intelligent men goes back thousands of years, and should come as no surprise to anyone. What is often surprising is the occult and spiritual nature of some of these modern groups, and the beliefs and rituals that members are involved in. In the ancient past when the human race was largely unaware of science and medicine, advances in these areas were extremely important and held the power of life and death. People were also largely ignorant to the spiritual principles in the world and formulated ideas about God or gods who they believed ruled over them and controlled the weather, seasons, the crops, disease, and other aspects of life. Those intelligent thinkers who pondered the workings of the spiritual world banded together and formed what were called the Mystery Schools, which were essentially secret societies that taught these principles to its members in the form of philosophies, symbols, allegories, and rituals.

The preface for The Secret Teaching of All Ages, which is one of the most popular and comprehensive books on the Mystery Schools and their teachings, reads, “It was inevitable that the initiates of the Mysteries should unite themselves against the forces seeking their extinction. Thus, while the secret doctrine with its body of disciples functioned more or less openly in ancient society, it later passed almost completely from public view. This circumstance should not be interpreted as a decline of plan or purpose. The esoteric schools remained as a powerful force for the regeneration of human institutions…The use of indirect communication was based entirely upon practical considerations. To remain unknown was the best way to prevent a repetition of the disaster which occurred to the Knights Templar.”[xi]

Manly P. Hall, the author of The Secret Teachings of All Ages was under the impression that Mystery Schools in ancient days taught men morals, fairness, and philosophies to make them better people, and were not evil, dangerous, or devious in any way. Hall and some other New Age authors are under the impression that the Mystery Schools had been hijacked and taken over by greedy and immoral men. Certainly it is understandable that the members of such schools who were on the cutting edge of advancing knowledge in science, mathematics, and medicine could develop a superiority complex and use their knowledge and social networks to take advantage of others who were uninformed.

Hall believes, “[T]he black magicians of Atlantis continued to exercise their superhuman powers until they had completely undermined and corrupted the morals of the primitive Mysteries. By establishing a sacerdotal [meaning priesthood] caste they usurped the position formerly occupied by the initiates, and seized the reins of spiritual government. Thus black magic dictated the state religion and paralyzed the intellectual and spiritual activities of the individual by demanding his complete and unhesitating acquiescence in the dogma formulated by the priest craft…These sorcerers then began the systematic destruction of all keys to the ancient wisdom, so that none might have access to the knowledge necessary to reach adeptship without first becoming one of their order.”[xii]

Alice Bailey, a famous New Age author in the twentieth century, wrote material openly explaining how occult secret societies held the true power in the world, not to expose their activities with hopes of informing the population, but rather her books were written for elite businessmen, politicians, and spiritual leaders. In her book The Externalization of the Hierarchy, she explains, “The Masonic Movement when it can be divorced from politics and social ends and from its present paralyzing condition of inertia, will meet the need of those who can, and should wield power. It is the custodian of the law; it is the home of the Mysteries and the seat of initiation. It holds its symbolism the ritual of Deity, and the way of salvation is pictorially preserved in its work. The methods of Deity are demonstrated in its temples, and under the All-seeing Eye the work can go forward. It is a far more occult organization than can be realized, and is intended to be the training school for the coming advanced occultists. In its ceremonials lies hid the wielding of the forces connected with the growth and life of the kingdoms of nature and the unfoldment of the divine aspects in man.”[xiii]

Bailey’s writings and other occultists such as Helena Blavatsky, who wrote The Secret Doctrine (1888) are held in the highest regard by the establishment, and explain the philosophies and plans of elite secret societies quite openly. The information is considered hidden in plain sight and is mostly only found by those who have a desire to join the establishment. Most people, if they even read books at all, are only concerned with the latest pop culture novels anyway, and don’t have the desire, nor the mental capacity to understand the esoteric philosophies and plans that are written openly in occult books, such as Alice Bailey’s or Helena Blavatsky’s.

Bailey openly admits, “The Hierarchy directs world events, as far as mankind will permit…the unfolding consciousness may express itself through developing and adequate social, political, religious and economic world forms. They give direction; They throw a light; They impress those who are in contact with Them, and through the inflow of ideas and through revelation They definitely influence the tide of human affairs.”[xiv]

She goes on to write, “The Hierarchy directs and controls, more than is realized, the unfolding cyclic cultures and their resultant civilizations. These can then provide adequate forms, temporarily useful for the emerging soul humanity. The format of cultures and civilizations receives special attention.”[xv]

This Hierarchy that she is talking about is the continuation of the ancient Mystery Schools, such as Freemasonry and the Illuminati.

In the most popular Masonic book ever written, Morals and Dogma, author Albert Pike brags, “The World will soon come to us for its Sovereigns [meaning government leaders] and Pontiffs [meaning religious leaders]. We shall constitute the equilibrium of the Universe, and be rulers over the Masters of the World.”[xvi] This book was published in 1872 and is considered the bible of Freemasonry.

Freemasonry is often included in discussions about the New World Order, a charge many Masons dispute. Many Freemasons deny any claims that their organization is involved in anything other than charity work, a social club, and a method to teach enlightenment philosophies, but these Masons are either trying to keep the inner circle of Freemasonry from being discussed openly, or are themselves ignorant that the secret society they are a member of has another secret society functioning within.

Manly P. Hall, who is considered one of Freemasonry’s greatest philosophers and a 33rd degree mason admits, “Freemasonry is a fraternity within a fraternity—an outer organization concealing an inner brotherhood of the elect…It is necessary to establish the existence of these two separate yet interdependent orders, the one visible and the other invisible. The visible society is a splendid camaraderie of ‘free and accepted’ men enjoined to devote themselves to ethical, educational, fraternal, patriotic, and humanitarian concerns. The invisible society is a secret and most august fraternity whose members are dedicated to the service of a mysterious arcanum arcandrum [meaning a secret or a mystery].[xvii]

In Morals and Dogma Albert Pike reveals that Masons who are “in the know” about the true beliefs and activities of Freemasonry, would never reveal them to anyone. “Masonry, like all the Religions, all the Mysteries, Hermeticism and Alchemy, conceals [emphasis in original] its secrets from all except the Adepts and Sages, or the Elect, and uses false explanations and misinterpretations of its symbols to mislead those who deserve only to be misled; to conceal the Truth, which it [the Mason] calls Light, from them, and to draw them away from it.”[xviii]

Again, those in the lower levels of Freemasonry will deny that the organization is anything more than a fraternity, but Pike and others openly admit that it is a religion. “Every Masonic Lodge is a temple of religion; and its teachings are instruction in religion.”[xix]

The original writings of Adam Weishaupt, the man credited with starting the original Illuminati in Germany in 1776 had his and others secret letters discovered and seized by authorities in 1786 and when they are read, it becomes clear that he formulated specific goals and strategies for his network to occupy positions of power and privilege and operate without the public’s knowledge. His attitude is the same as that reflected in the writings of Albert Pike, although more diabolical because Weishaupt never intended them to be seen by anyone other than Illuminati members.

Weishaupt wrote, “I shall therefore press the cultivation of science, especially such sciences as may have an influence on our reception in the world; and may serve to remove obstacles out of the way…Only those who are assuredly proper subjects shall be picked out from among the inferior classes for the higher mysteries…And in particular, every person shall be made a spy on another and on all around him.”

“Nothing can escape our sight; by these means we shall readily discover who are contented, and receive with relish the peculiar state-doctrines and religious opinions that are laid before them; and, at last, the trustworthy alone will be admitted to a participation of the whole maxims and political constitution of the Order.”

“In a council composed of such members we shall labor at the contrivance of means to drive by degrees the enemies of reason and of humanity out of the world, and to establish a peculiar morality and religion fitted for the great Society of mankind.”

Weishaupt never intended his correspondence or network to become public, but in the years that passed, the Illuminati’s philosophies and goals have obviously been carried on by men who share the same vision outlined and developed by Weishaupt in 1776.

In 1966 a professor and elite insider at Princeton University named Carroll Quigley published a book titled Tragedy and Hope, which openly admits that a network of secret societies hold the true power in politics and banking. The book was meant for other elitists as a way to teach them how the world really works.

Quigley wrote, “The chief problem of American political life for a long time has been how to make the two Congressional parties more national and international…(therefore the) argument that the two parties should represent opposed ideals and policies, one, perhaps, of the Right and the other of the Left, is a foolish idea acceptable only to doctrinaire and academic thinkers…Instead the two parties should be almost identical, so that the American people can ‘throw the rascals out’ at any election without leading to any profound or extensive shifts in policy.”[xx]

One might wonder why he would openly admit that it didn’t matter which political party, Republican or Democrat, was in power since the leadership of both will work in concert with the secret agenda to create the New World Order, but Quigley and other elite insiders know that the majority of the public would never even think of reading his book, and instead read novels about vampires (the Twilight Series) or young sorcerers (Harry Potter).

In October 2009 a YouTube video was posted of Obama’s White House communications director Anita Dunn speaking to a group of students where she told them that her favorite political philosopher is Mao Tse Tung, the Chinese Communist revolutionary responsible for the murders of millions of Chinese during his reign. Most of the students probably didn’t even know who Mao Tse Tung was, or the atrocities he committed, but Dunn’s admiration for the dictator shows the mindset of the New World Order’s leadership circle.

Another interesting video clip giving a glimpse into the minds of modern elite politicians comes from Ron Bloom, Obama’s manufacturing czar. At a forum for the Union League Club in New York City which took place on February 27th and 28th in 2008, Bloom told attendees, “Generally speaking, we get the joke. We know that the free market is nonsense. We know that the whole point is to game the system to beat the market, or at least find someone who will pay you a lot of money because they’re convinced that there is a free lunch. We know that this is largely about power. That this is an adults only, no limit game. We kind of agree with Mao that political power comes largely from the barrel of a gun. And we get it, that if you want a friend you should get a dog.” Some say he was saying such comments in jest, while others insist the comments reveal the actual beliefs of the secret establishment.

The modern organizations that are shaping the New World Order have carried on the tradition of the ancient Mystery Schools by elevating themselves and their members above the rest of society through their good old boy networks, control of the mainstream media, and their influence over politicians through bribes, coercion, and in some cases blackmail. They have done a great job of keeping the general public distracted with sports, pop culture, and issues of little significance, while they make and implement decisions that negatively affect us all.

Establishment insiders become arrogant, selfish, and corrupt and while politicians masquerade as “public servants,” they really only serve themselves and their partners in crime. They are very often Luciferians or Satanists which means that they identify Satan or Lucifer as being a hero for breaking the rules and doing what he wants. Whether their “worship” of Satan is literal or metaphorical is debatable, but what is not debatable is that they privately philosophically see Satan as a source of good, knowledge, and wisdom and systematically break the golden rule of life while thinking only of themselves and having no regard for the thoughts, feelings, or rights of others.

Helena Blavatsky wrote openly in The Secret Doctrine that, “Satan will now be shown, in the teaching of the Secret Doctrine, allegorized as Good, and Sacrifice, a God of Wisdom,”[xxi] and this is what these people believe.

If this concept is new to you, it is quite shocking, and perhaps unbelievable, but when you come to understand more of this philosophy, it becomes undeniable that most of the inner circle of the Illuminati establishment and their subsidiary networks are Luciferians or Satanists. They believe, as most occultists do, that Lucifer and Satan are symbolic of knowledge and intelligence, and that humans were nothing but ignorant animals until Satan came to the Garden of Eden and “set Man free” by convincing Adam and Eve to eat from the tree of knowledge of good and evil. This may just be an allegorical belief which the elite use to convince themselves and their collaborators that there is no afterlife, no Heaven or Hell, and thus they have decided to live the high life here and now and will take all they can get no matter how unfair or how many people get shortchanged, hurt, or killed as a result. Since in their mind there is no judgment by God for their sins after their death because they believe we are just advanced animals, they see nothing holding them back from doing whatever they want.

The fact that most elite politicians, businessmen, and bankers are members of organizations like the Skull and Bones society, and enjoy visiting the Bohemian Grove and participating in, or viewing what can only be described as human sacrifice reenactment rituals using effigies, shows that these individuals revel in the fact that they are considered the “evil rulers of the world.” Their satanic world view and philosophy is really no different than the Jewish Pharisees who held a monopoly on spiritual knowledge and used it for their own personal benefit at the expense of those less informed. One of the main themes taught by the story of Jesus in the New Testament is that He represents God in human form, who came to earth to allow everyone a direct line to, and knowledge of God and the Kingdom of Heaven.

Barrack Obama has quoted lines from Communist Saul Alinsky’s book Rules for Radicals during his speeches when he was running for president in 2008 and Hilary Clinton wrote her college thesis on Alinsky when she was at Wellesley College.[xxii] It’s interesting to note that in the Dedication page of his book, Alinsky pays tribute to the people he saw as past “radicals,” and lists them off, and then writes, “Lest we forget at least an over-the-shoulder acknowledgment to the very first radical: from all our legends, mythology, and history...the first radical known to man who rebelled against the establishment and did it so effectively that he at least won his own kingdom — Lucifer.”

Hollywood producer Aaron Russo became politically active later in his career and in 2006 did a sit down interview with Alex Jones from Infowars.com where he described his friendship with Nick Rockefeller and the insider information he revealed to him. The Rockefeller family, for those who don’t know, have been at the core of the New World Order for generations and have used their family’s enormous wealth and influence to move the agenda for the New World Order from the secret meetings of the Bilderberg group and other informal gatherings, into the minds of globalist politicians and businessmen. The Rockefeller family and their “non-profit” foundations have their fingerprints on nearly every aspect of the New World Order.

In this amazing interview that Aaron Russo gives, he explains that Nick Rockefeller had befriended him after seeing his film Mad as Hell and learning that Russo was running for governor of Nevada in 1998. Apparently Rockefeller thought that Russo may be of service to their agenda, even suggesting that he join the Council on Foreign Relations. Throughout the course of their meetings as their relationship progressed, Rockefeller revealed some startling insider information to him.

“He was the one who told me 11 months before 9/11 that there was going to be an event, never told me what the event was going to be, but there was going to be an event, and out of that event, we would invade Afghanistan to run pipelines from the Caspian Sea; We were going to invade Iraq to take over the oil fields and establish a base in the Middle East and make it all part of the New World Order; and we’d go after Chavez in Venezuela…and there’s going to be this War on Terror, of which there is no real enemy and the whole thing is a giant hoax, but it’s a way for the government to take over the American people,” Russo explained.

“9/11 was done by people in our own government and our own banking system to perpetuate the fear of the American people into subordinating themselves to anything the government wants them to do. That’s what it’s about; and to create this endless War on Terror. Look, this whole War on Terror is a fraud. It’s a farce. It’s very difficult to say it out loud because people are intimidated against saying it, cuz if you say it they want to make you out to be a nutcase.”

Russo goes on to say that Rockefeller conveyed to him that the endgame was to get the entire population chipped with RFID tags and that the global economy would be controlled by elite banksters and politicians. Russo recalls that Nick asked him what he thought woman’s liberation was about, and after he answered the conventional answer about women’s rights and equal pay, he says Nick laughed at him and called him an idiot and went on to inform him that the Rockefellers funded the women’s liberation movement for two major reasons. One was because only half of the population was being taxed, since primarily only the men worked, and the second reason was to break up the family so the state can have more time with children to indoctrinate them.

He also says that Rockefeller thought the world’s population should be reduced by half. Russo didn’t have the same world view as his friend, and did not become involved in the globalist organizations that have covertly established the New World Order system. In 2006 he produced America: Freedom to Fascism which discusses the Federal Reserve Banking system, the IRS income tax, VeriChip RFIDs, and other political issues. Russo died on August 24, 2007 from cancer at the age of 64.

Another, more powerful member of the Rockefeller family, David Rockefeller, wrote in his 2002 book, Memoirs on page 405, “For more than a century ideological extremists at either end of the political spectrum have seized upon well-publicized incidents such as my encounter with Castro to attack the Rockefeller family for the inordinate influence they claim we wield over American political and economic institutions. Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as “internationalists” and conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structure—one world, if you will. If that’s the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it.”

“The anti-Rockefeller focus of these otherwise incompatible political positions owes much to Populism. “Populists” believe in conspiracies, and one of the most enduring is that a secret group of international bankers and capitalists and their minions control the world’s economy.”

David Rockefeller is one of the grandchildren of John D. Rockefeller, the founder of Standard Oil, and at the time when he lived, John D was the richest man in the world. David Rockefeller has had his hands in nearly every major New World Order organization in existence in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. In fact, he is the founder of the Trilateral Commission and was once the Chairman of the Council on Foreign Relations. He also attends nearly every Bilderberg meeting. At the time of this writing, David Rockefeller (senior) is 94 years old.[xxiii] He has a son, David Rockefeller Jr., who sits on the boards of numerous Rockefeller foundations.

When looking into the wealthy secretive organizations behind the New World Order, besides the usual culprits of the Bilderberg group, the Council on Foreign Relations, Skull and Bones, and the Rockefellers, often Cecil Rhodes is mentioned.

Cecil Rhodes (1853-1902) was a British born businessman who moved to Africa and became a politician and founder of the state of Rhodesia in Africa, which is named after him. There are two interesting aspects to Cecil Rhodes concerning the New World Order, most importantly his will which called for creating a secret society to function with the purpose of extending and maintaining British rule around the world. Also interesting is the fact that Cecil Rhodes was the founder of the DeBeers diamond monopoly which at one time controlled 90% of the world’s diamonds.

Through a slick marketing campaign designed by Edward Bernays, the DeBeers diamond company has brainwashed most of the world’s women into feeling that they need a large diamond ring, earrings, and necklaces, or else their husband/boyfriend doesn’t love them. Men pay thousands of dollars to accommodate their woman’s desires for the stones, when in reality the value of diamonds are dramatically over-inflated simply because DeBeers won’t release most of their inventory to the public.

Concerning Rhode’s will, it reads, “To and for the establishment, promotion and development of a Secret Society, the true aim and object whereof shall be for the extension of British rule throughout the world, the perfecting of a system of emigration from the United Kingdom, and of colonization by British subjects of all lands where the means of livelihood are attainable by energy, labour and enterprise, and especially the occupation by British settlers of the entire Continent of Africa, the Holy Land, the Valley of the Euphrates, the Islands of Cyprus and Candia, the whole of South America, the Islands of the Pacific not heretofore possessed by Great Britain, the whole of the Malay Archipelago, the seaboard of China and Japan, the ultimate recovery of the United States of America as an integral part of the British Empire, the inauguration of a system of Colonial representation in the Imperial Parliament which may tend to weld together the disjointed members of the Empire and, finally, the foundation of so great a Power as to render wars impossible, and promote the best interests of humanity.”

Rhodes will also created Rhodes Scholarships which are given to students who the establishment view as likely participants in their New World Order plan. President Bill Clinton is perhaps the most well-known Rhodes Scholar.

Mainstream Media Controlled

by the Elite

Any educated person knows, to some extent, the power of the mainstream media and its ability to shape public opinions. Some are also aware of the often pointless information it presents to the masses as if it were something if importance, as well as the complete blackout and non-coverage of issues that should often be the top story. Adding to the confusion are prominent members of the mainstream media who claim daily to actually be fighting the mainstream media. These are the Sean Hannity’s and Rush Limbaugh’s, whose very shtick involves pretending to be an alternative to the mainstream media, when they themselves are the most powerful propagandists and gate-keepers for this very establishment.

Even though most radio and TV hosts will be seen as a left-wing person attacking the right-wing or vice a versa, mainstream hosts on either side of the political spectrum are very careful not to scratch beyond the surface of partisan politics and will never address the true power structure operating behind the scenes which controls both right and left-wing politicians. Instead, these hosts will only focus on partisan issues many of which are of little significance, while they will never address key issues such as the Bilderberg group, the Skull and Bones society, the Bohemian Grove, or the Illuminati.

Most national hosts are simply paid promoters of a political party who blame all of the country’s problems and misfortunes on the opposing political party, while never admitting the wrong doing or corruption of their own.

Adam Weishaupt on Media

Adam Weishaupt, the man credited with founding the Illuminati secret society back in 1776, knew the power in controlling information, and in one of his original letters, he wrote, “By establishing reading societies, and subscription libraries, and taking these under our direction, and supplying them through our labours, we may turn the public mind which way we will.”

“In like manner we must try to obtain an influence in the military academies (this may be of mighty consequence), the printing-houses, booksellers shops, chapters, and in short in all offices which have any effect, either in forming, or in managing, or even in directing the mind of man: painting and engraving are highly worth our care.”

He and his fellow Illuminists also understood how powerful controlling newspapers could be to smear their enemies. One correspondence reads, “We get all the literary journals. We take care, by well-timed pieces [articles], to make the citizens and the Princes a little more noticed for certain little slips.”

Their “certain little slips” refers to anything they say or do that will not be looked at favorably by the public, and the Illuminati’s “well timed pieces” will be sure to inform people of this if they didn’t like that person.

Professional Sports

Karl Marx, the secretary who was commissioned to type and publish the Communist Manifesto, is well known for a quote pertaining to religion where he called it the “opiate of the masses,” when in reality such a phrase accurately describes professional sports. Each weekend, as well as Monday nights during football season, millions upon millions of Americans eat, sleep, and dream about the NFL football games that are played.

It’s fascinating when one is enlightened and “unplugged from the Matrix” to see these millions of zombies focusing all of their time, energy, and emotions on something so meaningless. People yell and scream at the TV, and often their entire mood in the following days is dependent upon whether their favorite team won or lost. Somehow, a bunch of over-paid muscle heads chasing a ball on a field of grass has become one of the most important events in their lives. They can discuss at length the poor strategies that lead to their team losing the game, and they can rattle of statistic after statistic of the performance of their favorite players, yet most of these people have no clue about the New World Order, or even current events.

Super Bowl Sunday is basically a national holiday, and the stores and shopping malls look about as empty as they do on Christmas day. You can hear shouts and celebrations coming from neighbors homes from multiple directions as people jump up and down yelling and cursing at their television over the performance of their team. The next morning, the “Super Bowl Champions” are plastered on the entire front page of every major newspaper in the country, as if winning the game makes them heroes like they just saved a group of children from a burning building.

Who is the mayor of the city they live in, many couldn’t tell you, but they can tell you the score of the Super Bowl and who won and what their favorite commercial was. The character Tyler Durden from the film Fight Club mocks such priorities by sarcastically saying, “Murder, crime, poverty, these things don’t concern me. What concerns me are celebrity magazines, television with 500 channels, some guy’s name on my underwear.”

Jay Leno’s “Jay Walking”

A hilarious and popular segment created by comedian Jay Leno, titled “Jay Walking” shows just how out of touch many Americans are with issues that really matter, and are instead able to recall details about the personal lives of celebrities or how a certain football team is doing.

A popular question Jay asks people is simply, “Who is the Vice President of the United States?” It’s shocking how many people don’t know. Sometimes he even brings photos of prominent political figures or business leaders and asks people who they are. Many don’t know. He then pulls out photos of pop singers and actors, and everyone is able to instantly identify them. The segment shows in a sad yet hilarious way that pop culture and celebrities are what is important to most Americans, not reality, politics or personal finance.

This author has shot several YouTube videos with similar themes including one where I got people to sign a petition to increase inflation and cause hyper-inflation, and one where I tried to sell a one ounce solid gold coin worth over $1,150 at the time for only $50, but nobody had a clue how much gold was worth and nobody wanted it. With some people I dropped the price to just $5 but the people didn’t see the point in buying the gold coin.[xxiv]

The Fairness Doctrine

One of many Orwellian plans in the New World Order is the “Fairness Doctrine,” which is the idea that the government needs to control the mainstream media in order to (as they claim) attempt to present both sides of issues so that one opinion or belief does not dominate the media. There is surely nothing fair about it, and the name and the concept clearly promote unfairness and only attempts to eliminate the free market and the voices of opposition against government policies.

The original Fairness Doctrine was a policy of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) which regulates broadcast licenses, and was introduced in 1949 and required broadcasters to present controversial issues in a way the FCC viewed as balanced and honest. The doctrine was challenged in court and in 1969 the United States Supreme court upheld the FCC’s right to enforce it, although later, in 1987 the Fairness Doctrine was abolished.

Since then, a sizeable number of prominent (mostly Democrat) politicians have publicly stated their desire to have the Fairness Doctrine reinstated. The reason left-wing politicians favor such an idea is because liberals want larger government and want the government to be involved in people’s lives in every aspect. Another reason left-wingers tend to support the Fairness Doctrine is because talk radio has been dominated by conservatives, and so the liberals see the Fairness Doctrine as a way to silence or minimize the effect of right-wing radio.

In June 2007, Senator Richard Durbin (D-Illinois) said, “It’s time to reinstitute the Fairness Doctrine,”[xxv] and around this same time, Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi of San Francisco told reporters that her fellow Democratic Representatives did not want to forbid reintroduction of the Fairness Doctrine and later when asked point blank if she personally supported its revival, she answered, “Yes.”[xxvi]

Illuminati kingpin Bill Clinton threw his support behind reinstatement during a February 13, 2009 interview on the Mario Solis Marich radio show, where he said, “Well, you either ought to have the Fairness Doctrine or we ought to have more balance on the other side, because essentially there’s always been a lot of big money to support the right wing talk shows.”

Democratic Senator Jeff Bingaman of New Mexico,[xxvii] U.S. Representative Anna Eshoo (Democrat of California),[xxviii] Senator Debbie Stabenow (D-Michigan),[xxix] Senator Tom Harkin (D-Iowa),[xxx] and others have all publicly expressed their desire to have the program reinstated.

Operation Mockingbird

Intelligent people have varying degrees of suspicion that the US government is in bed with the American mainstream media, and anyone who monitors the news media with discerning eyes can quite easily identify specific stories and strategies that are being used to persuade and intimidate the population. For those who want “evidence” of such manipulation, one needs to look no further than the findings of a Senate Select Committee in 1975, which confirms and details this, has occurred for decades on a scale larger than most people could imagine.

Operation Mockingbird, as it was called, was exposed in 1975 during the Church Committee investigation, which then published its findings the following year. The full name of the committee which investigated and uncovered such activities was called, “The United States Senate Select Committee to Study Governmental Operations with Respect to Intelligence Activities” which was chaired by Senator Frank Church (D-ID).

Through this investigation it became clear that such a program was developed in the 1950s for the purpose of persuading American and foreign media, as well as to use the media as gate-keepers to prevent certain information from being published and reaching the masses.

In 1948 an espionage and counter-intelligence branch within the CIA was created for the purpose of “propaganda, economic warfare; preventive direct action, including sabotage, anti-sabotage, demolition and evacuation measures; subversion against hostile states, including assistance to underground resistance groups, and support of indigenous anti-Communist elements in threatened countries of the free world.” Later that year Operation Mockingbird was established to influence the domestic and foreign media. Philip Graham, the owner of The Washington Post, was first recruited to run the project within the industry and develop a network of assets.

After 1953, the network had influence over twenty-five newspapers and wire agencies and was overseen by Allen Dulles, who was director of the CIA. The Mockingbird program also involved major television broadcasters, including William Paley, the CEO of CBS broadcasting.

Thomas Braden, who was the head of the International Organizations Division (IOD), which was a division of the CIA dealing with human intelligence services, played a substantial role in Operation Mockingbird and would later reveal, “If the director of CIA wanted to extend a present, say, to someone in Europe—a Labour leader—suppose he just thought, this man can use fifty thousand dollars, he’s working well and doing a good job—he could hand it to him and never have to account to anybody... There was simply no limit to the money it could spend and no limit to the people it could hire and no limit to the activities it could decide were necessary to conduct the war—the secret war....It was multinational.”

According to the Congressional report published in 1976, “The CIA currently maintains a network of several hundred individuals around the world who provide intelligence for the CIA and at times attempt to influence opinion through the use of covert propaganda. These individuals provide the CIA with direct access to a large number of newspapers and periodicals, scores of press services and news agencies, radio and television stations, commercial book publishers, and other foreign media outlets.”

The committee also concluded that the cost of the program was approximately $265 million a year, which when adjusted for inflation as of 2010 means that in today’s dollars the program costs an astounding one billion dollars a year.

A year after the Church Committee released its findings on Operation Mockingbird, Rolling Stone magazine published an article on the program and named various prominent journalists who they alleged to be involved with it. Some of these included Ben Bradlee, who wrote for Newsweek, Stewart Alsop, who wrote for the New York Herald Tribune, James Reston (New York Times), Charles Douglas Jackson (Time Magazine), Walter Pincus (Washington Post), William C. Baggs (The Miami News), and others.

In 2007 a large amount of documents known as the “Family Jewels” were declassified and released by the National Security Archive, which also revealed that the CIA had routinely wiretapped Washington-based news reporters. These individuals were most likely seen as a threat to the establishment and were not playing along with the propaganda and gate-keeping efforts within the media establishment.

As with nearly every other case of rampant institutional corruption in government agencies, the CIA claims to have ended the program—another claim that is laughable.

The Military Wanted to Hire Bloggers for Propaganda

Since the Internet has been a haven for independent journalists and countless “alternative” news sites, along with bloggers who have gained a large following of people who don’t rely only on mainstream corporate news to get their information, this posed a major problem for the establishment. The major broadcast TV and radio networks, as well as the cable channels, consist of tens of millions of dollars in equipment and expensive services such as satellite feeds and camera crews, but the Internet had opened the door for one individual with a website costing only a few dollars a month to have the potential to reach millions of people simply by posting their own articles or videos.

With people able to copy and paste a link from a blog and sent it out to their email list or post it on their Facebook, MySpace, or Twitter pages, a simple blog written by an ordinary person can spread like a virus around the web. Of course, the establishment saw the dangers that blogs and non-mainstream websites held for their monopoly of information, so they decided to use prominent bloggers as paid propagandists just like the talking heads in the mainstream media.

In 2006 a report from the Joint Special Operations University titled Blogs and Military Information Strategy, outlined this plan. “Hiring a block of bloggers to verbally attack a specific person or promote a specific message may be worth considering,” read the report. It was written by James Kinniburgh and Dororthy Denning.

The report also suggested the government hack the blogs of those seen as detrimental to the propaganda they want to spread. It reads, “[T]he enemy blog might be used covertly as a vehicle for friendly information operations. Hacking the site and subtly changing the messages and data—merely a few words or phrases—may be sufficient to begin destroying the blogger’s credibility with the audience. Better yet, if the blogger happens to be passing enemy communications and logistics data, the information content could be corrupted.”

High Level Officials and Institutions within the NWO are Above the Law

As many people are aware, certain politicians and businessmen seem to be untouchable regarding the corruption and criminal activities they are involved in. This occurs because of the power of the invisible empire and their use of coercion, threats, and blackmail. The Illuminati keep files on practically every congressman and woman, as well as media figures, business leaders, judges, military officials, and anyone of influence in the public sphere. If a politician cheats on his wife, the invisible empire most likely know about it and have documentation proving it. If a person cheats on his taxes, uses cocaine, has any bizarre hobbies or interests, they know. Frequently they will entrap people simply to gather such evidence.

Imagine that you’re a prominent politician who genuinely cares for America and wants to do the right thing in a particular segment of society such as lowering taxes. Also imagine that at one time, perhaps years or even decades ago, you made the terrible mistake of cheating on your wife, or even sleeping with a high class prostitute, perhaps provided and paid for by a colleague after a cocktail party. The odds are that the Illuminati has documentation of this. Echelon, the secret electronic snooping system, probably has a recording of a telephone conversation of you bragging about it with a friend. Perhaps the person you thought was your friend who provided the prostitute for you was doing so for the express purpose of entrapping you, and the guest bedroom in the mansion of the party, or the hotel you had sex with her at, was rigged with cameras and caught the whole thing on tape.

Now fast forward to the present time where you are a politician trying to save the American people from rising taxes, and imagine you get a phone call from someone not identifying themselves but telling you that they have evidence of what you did, and perhaps play the audio of your phone call when you spoke about it. The voice on the phone now tells you to stop pressing so hard for the tax reform, or even tells you to drop your support of it all together or they will show your wife photos of what you did. What do you do? This is just one of the methods used to get people in the pocket of the secret establishment.

The History Channel produced a show called, Presidential Secrets which included a segment about J. Edgar Hoover, the infamous former Director of the FBI, which quite clearly and openly explained that Hoover keep dirt on everyone he could, and used that dirt to influence people in whatever way he wanted.

For 48 years Hoover was the director of the FBI under eight different presidents. He died on May 2, 1972 at the age of 77 from a heart attack. It was only after his death that the depths of corruption Hoover sunk to were revealed. Despite 35 file cabinets of his personal files being destroyed after his death by his loyal aids, volumes of information are now public which show just how dark the soul was of Hoover, as well as how powerful people can be when they have the resources of the FBI behind them.

Hoover was able to use the FBI to influence both politicians, as well as Hollywood pictures. In 1971 he was told Jane Fonda would star in a film titled Klute about a prostitute helping a detective solve a mystery, and he created a file and determined to have the part removed. He hand wrote in the margin of one of the documents which was declassified, saying “Certainly, I don’t want any reference to the FBI in any picture which this tramp, Jane Fonda appears.”

He was able to have various films killed or the scripts changed to prevent the portrayal of the FBI in a negative light, including preventing John Wayne from starring in a TV show titled The FBI, which ran from 1965 to 1974, because Wayne was a member of the John Birch Society, which Hoover despised. The John Birch Society is known for its political activism particularly against globalism and in support of traditional conservatism.

Anti-war rock and roll musicians were also a target of J. Edgar Hoover. Janis Joplin, Jimmy Hendrix, and particularly John Lennon of the Beatles. In 1969 Lennon released an album containing protest songs which were enraging to Hoover and the establishment, so he tried to get him deported over a marijuana charge from England. Hoover also thought that John Lennon’s outspokenness threatened Richard Nixon’s reelection.

J. Edgar Hoovers files also reveal how ruthless and powerful President Roosevelt was. It was believed that his wife Eleanor was having an affair, and after this was investigated by the FBI and pretty much confirmed, FDR wanted all of the agents who worked on the case killed so they would not spread rumors about his wife’s infidelities. The files reveal that he personally ordered all men who worked on the case to be “immediately relieved of his duties and sent to the south pacific for action against the Japs until they were killed.”

Hoover himself was a homosexual and hired his long-time lover Clyde Tolson, who rapidly climbed the ranks of the FBI, ultimately becoming the Associate Director of the FBI, the second highest position in the organization.

The FBI and historians openly admit the rampant corruption led by J. Edgar Hoover, and of course claim to have made changes to prevent such abuses from continuing, which we know is a lie, but looking back at how much influence Hoover was able to have decades ago can send chills up one’s spine when thinking of what is possible with today’s technology.

Barney Frank

One of the most perverted cases of a politician who is above the law involves Barney Frank, who has been a House Representative from Massachusetts 4th congressional district since 1982. Barney Frank is considered by many to be one of the most powerful men in Congress and became the chairman of the House Financial Services Committee in 2007 and was a major force in Obama’s economic “stimulus” package in 2009. Frank is also openly gay and back in the 1980s met a gay prostitute from a personal ad in the newspaper who later became his roommate and ran a gay prostitution ring out of their apartment. There are also allegations that Frank has had sexual relations with underage boys as well.

The Washington Times reported in 1989 that, “Frank, one of two openly gay members of Congress, confirmed Friday that he paid [Stephen L.] Gobie for sex, hired him with personal funds as an aide and wrote letters on congressional stationery on his behalf to Virginia probation officials.”[xxxi]

The article continues, “Although Frank and Gobie differ in some details of their relationship, they agree on the story line. They met on April Fool’s Day 1985. The representative answered a classified ad in the Washington Blade, the local gay weekly. ‘Exceptionally good-looking, personable, muscular athlete is available. Hot bottom plus large endowment equals a good time.’”[xxxii]

The article goes on to explain that Barney Frank paid Gobie $80 for sex which marked the beginning of their relationship. Frank was in his third term then, and despite later admitting this activity, went on to become an extremely powerful man in Washington DC.

Barney Frank’s current live-in boyfriend, James Ready, was arrested in 2009 for growing marijuana in their backyard.[xxxiii] Frank claimed he had no knowledge of the plants just as he claimed to have no knowledge of Stephen L. Gobie’s gay prostitution ring he was running out of their apartment when they lived together in the 1980s. It is very interesting that Eliot Spitzer, the former governor of New York, was busted for using high class female prostitutes ending his political career and forcing him to resign, yet Barney Frank has had a sordid past with admissions of using prostitutes himself and a roommate who was a gay pimp, while Frank is hailed as a hero. Eliot Spitzer was causing trouble for AIG and other big Wall Street firms who would eventually go bankrupt and then be given billions of dollars for free by government bailouts. Some suspect that Spitzer getting busted was simply a way to get him out of the way and stop him from poking his nose around where the Illuminati didn’t want it.

Barney Frank’s admissions of paying gay prostitutes for sex, while being reprehensible by itself, pales in comparison to the allegations that he also had sexual relations with young boys who were underage and connected to the infamous Franklin Cover-up scandal in the late 1980s. Below is a transcript from a court appearance in 1999 of a man named Paul Bonacci, who claims that he engaged in sexual relations with Frank when he was underage.

IN THE UNITED STATES DISTRICT COURT

FOR THE DISTRICT OF NEBRASKA

PAUL A. BONACCI, ( 4:91CV3037)

Plaintiff, vs. TRANSCRIPT

LAWRENCE E. KING, Defendants.

Hearing held before the Honorable Warren K. Urbom, Senior United States District Judge, on February 5, 1999 in Lincoln, Nebraska.

APPEARANCES:

Mr. John DeCamp

Attorney at Law

414 South llth Street

Lincoln, Nebraska for Plaintiff

I -N-D-E-X

WITNESS Direct Cross Redirect Recross

Noreen Gosch 5

Russell Nelson 36

Paul Bonacci 101

Denise Bonacci 155

(At 9:01, the following proceedings were held.)

THE COURT: This is the case of Paul A. Bonacci versus Lawrence E. King, 4:91CV3037. I see the plaintiff, Mr. Paul Bonacci, here with his counsel Mr. DeCamp. I do not see anyone representing Lawrence E. King. Is there anyone here representing Mr. King? I take it not. A default judgment has been entered against him. And the purpose of this proceeding is to determine the amount of damages that are to be awarded. Mr. DeCamp, you may proceed. Want to make an opening statement or not is entirely up to you. You may do that or call your witnesses as you choose.

MR. DECAMP: May it please the Court, a very, very brief opening statement. What I want to establish here today, Your Honor, if at all possible, is the entire picture or scene in which Mr. Bonacci lived and prove to this Court’s satisfaction the stories he tells in his petition are in fact true and the trauma that results from those stories is in fact very real. And even, Your Honor, we would hope that the Court, after hearing some of the evidence and information today for the first time ever, would maybe even on its own initiative take some appropriate action to correct some other wrongs or launch some other investigations that may be needed, Your Honor.

THE COURT: That’s not within my authority. So I can’t do that. But I can award damages. And that’s why we’re here today.

The witness, Paul Bonacci, was then asked about instances involving him being sexually abused at adult parties when he was a young boy.

ANSWER: A lot of the parties when we went to, that we went to and stuff, the ones in the Twin Towers were basically for one reason. And that was for sex.

QUESTION: Sex between who?

ANSWER: There was sex between adult men and some other adult men but most of it had to do with young boys and young girls.

QUESTION: Young boys and young girls with each other or with older folks?

ANSWER: With the older folks. Also some of the parties, there was some parties above The French Cafe that they would bring people in and stuff that were from out of town. Those were specifically for sex with minors. Also in Washington, D. C. there were, there was also parties like Rusty had already talked about where there was parties after a party. Where they would have a party where they would have a legitimate party with like some politicians, businessmen. And a lot of them never knew about what happened at the after, you know, the party afterwards and stuff. Like in Washington, D. C. there was a lot of parties where they would be senators and congressmen who had nothing to do with the sexual stuff.

But there was some senators and congressmen who stayed for the parties afterwards. And one person that I’m not afraid to talk about because his, because Larry King always said him and this guy were on the opposite ends of the field because this guy was a Democrat and Larry King was a Republican. That’s a known fact and stuff. And this guy, every time I see him on TV and stuff, my wife knows my hatred for him. Because every time I see him and stuff it disgusts me because it’s—his name is Barney Frank.

QUESTION: Did you have relationships with him?

ANSWER: Yes.

QUESTION: Where?

ANSWER: In Washington, D. C. And also I was sent to a house, I believe it was in Massachusetts in Boston where I believe it was his house because there’s pictures on the wall that, with him and with different people and stuff. And that he had met I guess. But it was in his basement.

End of Transcript

White House Enemies List

Anyone with any sense knows that the President of the United States can order the CIA, FBI, or any agency or combination of, to illegally investigate anyone he sees as a threat to his administration’s goals, such as other politicians, reporters, or political activists. While it would be political suicide for any politician to mention this fact, one Republican Senator made a startling comment on the Senate floor about the Obama administration compiling an enemies list. Republican Conference Chairman Lamar Alexander (Tenn.), who served in the Nixon White House, said, “Based upon that experience and my 40 years since then in and out of public life, I want to make what I hope will be taken as a friendly suggestion to President Obama and his White House: Don’t create an enemies list.”[xxxiv]

Alexander went on to describe the corruption that occurred during the Nixon administration and said he sees “symptoms of this same kind of animus developing in the Obama administration.”

He also read off a list of examples he said support his views, such as a reported attempt by the Health and Human Services Department to put a gag order on the insurer Humana, and demonizing insurance companies during the government run health care debate. He also cited the administration’s hatred of the Fox News Channel, along with Obama’s alleged taking names of bondholders who resisted the General Motors and Chrysler bailouts.

Alexander also pointed out how he and Senator Bob Bennett (R-Utah) were “called out” on the White House’s blog after questioning the power of White House czars saying, “This behavior is typical of street brawls and political campaign consultants…If the president and his top aides treat people with different views as enemies instead of listening to what they have to say, they’re likely to end up with a narrow view and a feeling that the whole world is out to get them. And as those of us who served in the Nixon White House know, that can get you into a lot of trouble.”

While not exactly the most reputable tabloid, The Globe published an article in September 2009 headlined 25 Enemies Obama Wants to Silence and listed among them, Alex Jones from Infowars.com.

The Clinton Body Count

While mainly a thing of the past because Bill Clinton hasn’t been president since the year 2000, the Clinton Body Count still warrants mention in our discussion of the unlimited (and illegal) power and activities that a president has. The Clinton Body Count is the name given to the long list of people who have either been murdered, or died under suspicious circumstances who had personal or professional ties to Bill Clinton. The 1994 film The Clinton Chronicles documents some of the deaths found on the Clinton Body Count and is available to watch for free on the Internet.

2008 Economic Bailout

The words “stimulus” and “stimulus package” entered the public lexicon at the end of 2008 after the housing market collapsed in the United States, and caused a wave of economic destruction to sweep around the world. The Dow Jones Industrial Average was falling sometimes five and seven hundred points a day and people were getting understandably worried about the state of the economy. This is when the Bush administration proposed their staggering 700 billion dollar bailout which they said was needed to avert an economic disaster. Many were understandably against the bailout and wanted the free market to take its course and correct itself naturally when things stabilized, but the Bush administration (along with their Illuminati banking connections) wanted the stimulus package to be passed as soon as possible.

Some members of Congress were privately told that if the bailout didn’t pass a vote, the country would completely collapse into a depression and massive civil unrest and martial law would be imposed to prevent massive crime and violence. Congressman Brad Sherman blew the whistle on such threats and called them unjustified fear mongering.[xxxv]

California Senator Diane Feinstein publicly admitted that her office received 91,000 phone calls and emails about the bailout, and that 85,000 of them were opposed to it, but she voted for the bailout anyway because she said people were “confused” and “didn’t understand it” and she needed to do what was in the best interest of the country.

The economic bailouts and stimulus packages of 2008 and 2009 are lengthy subjects in and of themselves, so for the sake of keeping this book to a manageable length, they are only mentioned here briefly. There are several important points to be learned regarding these issues, one of which being that Diane Feinstein’s admission that 93% of the phone calls to her office opposed the bailout, yet she voted for it anyway, shows where the allegiance lies of elite politicians and how they couldn’t care less about actually representing their constituency, but rather bow to the private interests who supply them with power and wealth. The fear-mongering and threats of a total collapse and martial law also show the low levels those in power will sink to get their way. It’s also critical to remember that only several days after the first bailout was passed by Congress in 2008, the Federal Reserve and the Treasury Department completely changed their mind about where the $700 billion dollars would go and who would get the money.

Many of the firms that did get the money paid out huge year-end bonuses to their CEOs and top executives. Most people who have the potential to earn a bonus at their job will only qualify for it if they achieve certain goals such as a hitting certain sales figures, but numerous bankers on Wall Street got tens of millions of dollars each in bonuses as their companies collapsed in bankruptcy. Only if one is a member of the invisible empire can one get rewarded for a historic failure.

Electronic Voting Machines

Voter fraud has been something that has occurred in American elections for hundreds of years. Stuffing the ballot, vote buying, misrecording of votes, and other methods of fraud have been problems in elections around the world. Joseph Stalin is quoted as once saying, "He who votes decides nothing; he who counts the votes decides everything.”

While safeguards have been put in place to minimize voter fraud in elections, the increased use of electronic voting machines have complicated this process. The designs of electronic voting machines and their software are closely guarded secrets by industry insiders but some whistle blowers have been able to show that the machines can be programmed to report whatever vote counts their creators want them to show. A documentary produced by HBO titled Hacking Democracy shows how one hacker was able to alter the vote totals to whatever numbers he wanted just by hacking the memory card for such machines. He didn’t even need access to the machine itself, the software code, or anything. All he did is place a program on a standard removable memory card for a machine, which are widely available, and he was able to alter the tallies.

Many people suspect that operatives fixed the 2000 election in favor of George W. Bush using electronic voting machines. The 2004 presidential election is also suspected to have been fixed, particularly in the state of Ohio where exit polls showed John Kerry would win, but miraculously the vote counts showed different.

Walden O’Dell, the CEO of Diebold Election Systems, had written a Republican fundraising letter in 2003 where he said his company was “committed to helping Ohio deliver their electoral votes to the President next year.” He was obviously referring to President Bush who was facing John Kerry in the 2004 election. When asked about this, Mark Radke, Diebold’s marketing director answered, “that quotation that appeared in a letter is something that, uh…he regrets. It’s a situation where his personal preference has come over into his business practice and he has committed to keeping a much lower profile when it comes to those kinds of activities.”

So it is sad but probably true that your vote doesn’t matter in a presidential election. Whichever candidate will better serve the interests of the New World Order will be the one who secret operatives will make sure gets the most votes and becomes the next president. Such tampering actually takes place before the presidential election and is used in the primaries to ensure a particular candidate gets the nomination of his party. The final two candidates of the Republican and the Democratic parties are both most likely aware of the shady vote tampering and can only hope that the secret establishment chooses them to throw their weight behind to select as the next president of the United States.

The Original Blueprint of Domination

Knowing about the rampant corruption and the methods of blackmail and coercion that go on in politics, it is interesting to look back several hundred years at the original writings of Adam Weishaupt, the founder of the Illuminati. These writings were discovered by Bavarian officials in 1786 and published shortly after. English translations and excerpts were made available in books like John Robison’s Proofs of a Conspiracy (1798), Abbe Barruel’s Memoirs Illustrating the History of Jacobinism (1797), and Proof of the Illuminati by Seth Payson (1802). The writings give a clear view into the mind and mission of founder Adam Weishaupt.

He wrote, “There must (a la Jésuite) not a single purpose ever come in sight that is ambiguous, and that may betray our aims against religion and the state. One must speak sometimes one way and sometimes another, but so as never to contradict ourselves, and so that, with respect to our true way of thinking, we may be impenetrable.”

“This can be done in no other way but by secret associations, which will by degrees, and in silence, possess themselves of the government of the States, and make use of those means for this purpose…”

“…the Order will, for its own sake, and therefore certainly, place every man in that situation in which he can be most effective. The pupils are convinced that the Order will rule the world. Every member therefore becomes a ruler.”

Some people believe the mainstream history that says the Illuminati were dissolved after their discovery, but reading Weishaupt’s own words reveal that he had taken this possibility into consideration and made the appropriate steps to ensure the group would continue if this were to happen.

He wrote, “By this plan we shall direct all mankind. In this manner, and by the simplest means, we shall set all in motion and in flames. The occupations must be so allotted and contrived, that we may, in secret, influence all political transactions…I have considered everything, and so prepared it, that if the Order should this day go to ruin, I shall in a year re-establish it more brilliant than ever.”

Wars and False Flag Terrorism

No book on the New World Order would be complete without a discussion about the role wars and false flag terrorism play in the construction and expansion of the global government. This is an extremely detailed and unsettling subject and will only be briefly mentioned here. Entire books are available on specific aspects of this subject if you are interested in learning more. But it must be stated that major wars and terrorist attacks often cover sinister activities and goals the public is largely unaware of.

The reasons for going to war are almost always greatly exaggerated and in numerous instances completely fabricated so the public on a large scale, and the military soldiers who will be risking their lives for that war, will believe that they are fighting for a just cause, such as protecting the United States. In reality, members of the armed forces are often used as imperialistic pawns who unknowingly help construct and expand the New World Order.

For example, the Gulf of Tonkin Incident, as it is called, was the straw that broke the camel’s back and resulted in America getting fully involved in the Vietnam War. This incident refers to an event where North Vietnamese gunboats were reported to have attacked an American ship in international waters, prompting President Johnson to retaliate by entering the war. Years later private presidential tapes were released that show President Johnson and Robert McNamara, his secretary of defense, conspiring to lie and say the American ship was attacked, when in fact it was not.

As any informed American now knows, the War in Iraq was based on lies that Saddam Hussein had weapons of mass destruction and attempts to link him to the terrorist attacks of September 11th 2001 in New York City and Washington DC. The 9/11 attacks, as many know, were a false flag terrorist attack, meaning they were aided by elements of US and foreign intelligence agencies so this traumatic event could be used to justify invading the Middle East, as well as passing legislation domestically such as the Patriot Act which eliminated various rights outlined in the Constitution.

Such strategies are insidiously genius because they are so hard to oppose. After all, if there is an alleged threat, or an actual terrorist attack said to have been perpetrated by a specific country or group, it seems only appropriate to retaliate. False flag terrorism is essentially a terrorist act carried out by a government or intelligence agency, often against one’s own people or country, which is made to look like it was done by another country or group. It is basically framing others for the act which can then be used to justify military action in response. Since most ordinary citizens, as well as those in the military and government would never imagine that leaders in their own government could be behind such an attack against their own country, the idea of incidences being false flag attacks are rarely thought of.

These subjects are massive, and there is no room in this book to detail the piles of evidence for these statements, so if you are interested in learning more about the 9/11 attacks and false flag operations, you are advised to read The New Pearl Harbor by David Ray Griffin, 9/11 Synthetic Terror by Webster Tarpley, or The Terror Timeline by Paul Thompson. There are also various films that are often available to view for free on the Internet which detail the purposeful frauds that have been created by the U.S. government in order to start wars. Several of the best are: War Made Easy, Why We Fight, Terrorstorm, 9/11 Press for Truth, and Loose Change: Final Cut.

Also, an interesting historical note regarding wars involves Major General Smedley Butler, who at the time of his death in 1940 was the most decorated U.S. Marine in history. Butler published a small book titled War is a Racket which exposed the corrupt profit motives for going to war. Butler also testified before a congressional committee in 1934 where he explained how he was asked to participate in a plot to overthrow president Roosevelt and install a fascist dictatorship. Since Butler was a high ranking and influential man in the Marines, the conspirators hoped he could secretly gather 500,000 men to aid in this takeover. The men behind the attempted plot were wealthy businessmen with strong ties to the Illuminati.

The term “Military-industrial complex” was coined by President Dwight D. Eisenhower in his Farewell Address to the Nation on January 17, 1961. The phrase refers to the relationship between the government, particularly the armed forces, and the industries in the commercial sector that provide the weapons, development, and research for such programs and materials.

Eisenhower realized the tremendous money-making capacities of such industries and relationships, and firmly warned of the dangers such relationships could cause if abused.

His speech reads in part, “A vital element in keeping the peace is our military establishment. Our arms must be mighty, ready for instant action, so that no potential aggressor may be tempted to risk his own destruction…”

“This conjunction of an immense military establishment and a large arms industry is new in the American experience. The total influence — economic, political, even spiritual — is felt in every city, every statehouse, every office of the federal government. We recognize the imperative need for this development. Yet we must not fail to comprehend its grave implications. Our toil, resources and livelihood are all involved; so is the very structure of our society. In the councils of government, we must guard against the acquisition of unwarranted influence, whether sought or unsought, by the military-industrial complex. The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists and will persist. We must never let the weight of this combination endanger our liberties or democratic processes. We should take nothing for granted. Only an alert and knowledgeable citizenry can compel the proper meshing of the huge industrial and military machinery of defense with our peaceful methods and goals so that security and liberty may prosper together.”

Immorality and Destructive Behavior is Encouraged

In the 1950s Elvis Presley’s swinging hips and sexually suggestive dancing caused a tremendous stir around the world. Some TV stations were ordered only to shoot him from the chest up in an attempt to censor his on-stage antics from the home audience. Now contrast this with today’s pop culture icons who dress like sluts like Britney Spears and others such as Christina Aguilera, Beyonce Knowles, and Lady Gaga, just to name a few.

Self-destructive, sexually immoral, and materialistic idols are built up by the media and presented to the youth as role models, while Christianity and traditional healthy values are ridiculed as old fashioned and uncool. The family is under attack, and family values and the family unit itself have slowly but dramatically deteriorated over the last few decades, and is reflected in the divorce rates and high numbers of sexually transmitted diseases, abortions, and unwed mothers.

A wildly popular show amongst teenagers and young adults was MTV’s Jackass which aired from 2000 to 2002, and consisted of nothing more than amateur video footage of people performing various dangerous and childish stunts and pranks. Soon after the show began airing, a slew of reports detailed the injuries of various people imitating or attempting to recreate the idiocy they had seen on the show.

The types of “stunts” performed on the show often involved people getting kicked or hit in the testicles by various objects, as well as smashing shopping carts, and even one individual (Steve-O) having things stapled to his bare butt using a staple gun. It’s also interesting to note that this individual, Steve-O, has a tattoo on his arm of the “Jesus fish” with the word “Satan” written inside, and had gotten a tattoo of a man raping a baby on his arm, but after even his close friends found it appalling, he had an ostrich tattooed over the baby to cover it up. The tattoo now shows a man having sex with the ostrich.[xxxvi] In the MTV Cribs episode featuring cast members of Jackass, Steve-O picks up the kitten at his apartment and introduces it to the camera as ‘Lucifer.’

On March 9, 2008, Steve-O’s friends forced him to check into Thalians Mental Health Center due to ongoing drug abuse problems.[xxxvii] He was placed on a 72 hour psychiatric hold which was later lengthened to 14 days due to an alleged suicide attempt.[xxxviii]

In June 2008, Steve-O pleaded guilty to felony possession of cocaine and avoided jail by the successful completion of his treatment program.[xxxix] In a later MTV documentary covering his road to sobriety titled Steve-O: Demise and Rise, he admitted that he would hear voices and thought that, “I was possessed by demons, and I think that’s pretty evident in some of this footage.”

A spin-off from Jackass aired from 2003 to 2005, titled Viva La Bam, which consisted of a series of destructive and even cruel pranks done by Bam Margera and his friends on each other—especially on Bam’s family and was an MTV favorite for many viewers.

Several views from within Bam’s home reveal a large symbol resembling an upside down satanic pentagram within a circle, called a ‘heart o gram,’ which is supposed to represent both good and evil. This heart o gram is also used as a hood ornament on Bam’s Mercedes and is the symbol for Bam’s favorite band HIM which has songs such as “Your Sweet Six Six Six.”

The logo for the show Viva La Bam features the satanic hand sign ‘el Diablo’ of raising the index and pinky fingers, which has been drawn in as the letter “I” in the word “Viva,” complete with illuminating rays coming from behind it. When Jackass first aired, every teenager in the country knew who Johnny Knoxville and the other Jackasses were and the show inspired countless kids to videotape themselves and their friends trying to be “Jackasses” themselves.

Popular Music

Nearly everyone in the world is familiar with the meteoric rise and fall of pop star Britney Spears as we watched her go from a sweet and seemingly innocent teen idol, to a whacked-out, shaved-head, train wreck of a mother.

Her first album was release in 1999 and with each new album she sunk to new moral lows with her legions of preteen and teenage fans mimicking her every move. In 2009 Spears released an album titled Circus which contained a song named, “If You Seek Amy,” which on the surface seemed innocent enough until you heard the lyrics sung. The chorus goes, “Love me, hate me, but can’t you see what I see, all of the boys and all of the girls are begging to if you seek Amy.” It may not seem like anything unless you give it a second read, or hear the song for yourself.

The words “if you seek Amy,” blend together to sound like the letters F, U, C, K, and the word “me.” So what she is really saying is all of the boys and all of the girls want to fuck her.

It’s important to note that this is not simply a coincidence or that this author is reading too much into the lyrics. The song was specifically designed to sound like this. The official video for the song begins with a news broadcast with a banner on the bottom of the screen reading, “New Britney Spears lyrics spell out obscenity in disguise.”

Her album The Singles Collection, also released in 2009, includes a song titled “3” which contains lyrics about having a three-some and having sex with two guys at the same time. “Living in sin is the new thing,” she sings. Some other lyrics read:

1, 2, 3

not only you and me

Got one eighty degrees

And I'm caught in between

In the early morning hours of November 12, 2009, someone hacked Britney’s Twitter account and changed the background graphic from one promoting her new album to one featuring pyramids inscribed with the word “Illuminati” with an all-seeing eye at the top. They also “Tweeted” (Twitter terminology for posting a message), “I hope the New World Order will arrive as soon as possible” and that “I give myself to Lucifer every day for it to arrive as soon as possible. Glory to Satan!”[xl] Her Twitter account had 3.7 million followers at the time, and her staff scrambled to regain control of the account as soon as the hack was discovered. Obviously the hacker is fully aware that Spears is an Illuminati icon and is promoted to poison the minds of young girls.

A pop singer who goes by the name Katy Perry (Real name Katherine Hudson) was placed in the limelight in 2008 following the release of her single, “I Kissed a Girl,” which was a song about her sexually experimenting by making out with a girl. “I kissed a girl, and I liked it / the taste of her cherry ChapStick / I kissed a girl just to try it / hope my boyfriend don’t mind it,” she sings. What’s more disturbing is that Perry’s parents are Christian pastors and she released a self-titled gospel album in 2001 before turning to the dark side.

Another look at the 230 year old writings of Adam Weishaupt reveals that icons like Britney Spears and Katy Perry are playing right into the hands of the Illuminati without even knowing it. Weishaupt wrote, “There is no way of influencing men so powerfully as by means of the women. These should therefore be our chief study; we should insinuate ourselves into their good opinion, give them hints of emancipation from the tyranny of public opinion, and of standing up for themselves; it will be an immense relief to their enslaved minds to be freed from any one bond of restraint, and it will fire them the more, and cause them to work for us with zeal, without knowing that they do so; for they will only be indulging their own desire of personal admiration.”

Almost everyone in the world is familiar with rapper Eminem (Marshall Mathers) but many may not be aware of just how violent and disgusting his lyrics are. Many of his songs are about killing people, raping women, doing drugs, and other violent acts. It would be foolish to say that people who listen to such music aren’t encouraged and inspired to commit violent acts as a result. In 2005 a man in London was arrested for killing a woman for no reason after performing Eminem songs at a karaoke bar.[xli] The man was said to idolize Eminem and even had several tattoos similar to the rap star.

Eminem is also a member of a rap group called D-12, which produces music that is exclusively violent and vile, with some lyrics saying, “I will shit on you I don’t care who you are / I’ll shit on you / I don’t give a fuck about you or your car / Fuck your house / Fuck your jewelry / And fuck your watch / Fuck your wife / Fuck your kids / Fuck your family / I’ll shit on you.”

Most of the group’s songs are about killing people and doing drugs. D-12 has sold over 10 million albums worldwide. On April 11th 2006 one of the group’s members named DeShaun Dupree Holton (stage name Proof) was shot in the head and killed at a Detroit bar by a bouncer after the rapper had shot and killed another man after an altercation. He was Eminem’s best friend. Eminem also launched the career of 50 Cent who in 2008 was estimated to be worth $450 million dollars and one of the richest rappers. An example of 50 Cent’s lyrics which appear in the song I’ll Be the Shooter, are, “I-I’ll be the shooter / I-I’ll use the Colt, the Taurus, or the Ruger / I’ll pop some through ya / Dirty is what I’ll do ya / I-I’ll use the Sig, the pump, or the German Luger.”

The examples of pop music containing overtly violent and sexually explicit material could go on and on. What is important to note here is not that such music exists, but that the singers and rap stars who perform such songs are built up in the mainstream media as gods and role models that children often imitate. Songs about three-somes and violence create a culture where such behavior is seen as normal. At one point in time, not that distant in the past, such songs would have been completely shunned or created a national outrage, but today many young boys and girls continuously fill their minds with such garbage from their iPods and television sets and their parents don’t have a clue, or don’t even care.

Television Commercials

Everyone knows that sex sells, and using attractive women in commercials is an expected part of TV ads, but some commercials center around messages that have nothing to do with the product while still encouraging or finding humor in immoral behavior while the product may be completely innocent. One such commercial that was popular in 2009 was one for Minute Maid juice where a man is approached by a woman who is his child’s teacher saying, “I think you’re the father of one of my kids” and he mistakes her for some girl he had a drunken one night stand with on Spring Break years earlier. Teachers often refer to their students as “my kids” and apparently someone at the Minute Maid company thought it would be funny to make a commercial centered around a scumbag who slept with some slut on Spring Break when he was drunk and thought he knocked her up.

The online dating site, AshelyMadison.com advertises on TV showing a couple making out with each other and getting undressed in bed and then displays text on the screen reading, “This couple is married…but not to each other.” The company’s trademarked slogan is, “Life is short. Have an affair.” There was a time in the past when such a commercial would never be played, because no TV network would air such garbage, but in the New World Order nearly every last hint of morality has been tossed away, and hedonism, selfishness and immorality are the norm. AshleyMadison.com boasts of having 3.86 million users and is designed exclusively for married people who want to find someone else to have sex with, without their spouse knowing about it.

For years now, television commercials advertising Las Vegas end with the slogan, “What happens in Vegas, stays in Vegas,” which means that you and your friends are encouraged to go there and sleep with hookers, do illegal drugs, and gamble all you can, and that nobody must mention these activities to other friends, girlfriends, wives, or family members, because most decent people would be completely appalled by such behavior. This phrase is actually trademarked by the Las Vegas Convention and Visitors Bureau.

Las Vegas has been known as the “Sin City” for decades, but in 1999 this new “What happens in Vegas stays in Vegas” slogan was coined and was implemented in multiple television commercials encouraging people to visit the city and take part in all forms of debauchery it has to offer, but to keep it to themselves to avoid any social repercussions once they return home.

Video Games

Today, both kids and adults enjoy playing video games and the graphics and action are beyond what anyone could have imagined who grew up playing the Atari or Nintendo game systems in the 1980s. Game types range from role playing adventures, to sports games and shoot ’em ups. With the increased processing power and graphics capabilities of these systems, there is an increased realness to the games, and when an abnormal amount of time is spent playing violent shoot ’em up games, many psychologists fear that it desensitizes people to such violence. Such games place the user in the position where they “kill” dozens, perhaps hundreds of people, and in some games the targets aren’t “bad guys,” but instead are ordinary innocent people or police, and the point of some games is to just create havoc and kill as many people as you can, and enjoy doing it.

Where passively watching countless hours of television or films depicting such violence desensitizes people to it, the active involvement of these realistic videogames dramatically increase this desensitization and teach the users to find pleasure and rewards for the more people they kill.

One of the most notoriously violent videogames is the Grand Theft Auto series where players attempt to rise up the ranks of the criminal underworld through various objectives and are encouraged to commit mindless violent criminal acts. For example, in one mission the player gains points by killing people and causing destruction throughout the city and if they steal a police car and run people over with it, they receive double the number of points since they are killing with a police car, instead of if they had stolen an ordinary vehicle.

The game has generated a decent amount of controversy from parents who are outraged that a game exists with such sinister goals, and the game’s creators have had multiple lawsuits filed against them claiming the game has encouraged or inspired several people to steal cars and commit multiple murders.

William Buckner, who was 15 at the time, and his younger brother Josh (13) ended up killing two people after shooting them while they were driving on the freeway. They told police they went out to shoot at the side of trucks after playing Grand Theft Auto III.[xlii]

The victims’ families filed a $246 million dollar lawsuit against Rockstar Games, Take-Two Interactive Software, Wal-Mart, and Sony Computer Entertainment America who manufactures the Playstation 2 game counsel. Rockstar and its parent company, Take-Two, filed for dismissal of the lawsuit in 2003, stating in U.S. District Court that the “ideas and concepts as well as the ‘purported psychological effects’ on the Buckners are protected by the First Amendment’s free-speech clause.”

An attempt to move the lawsuit into a state court was unsuccessful under Tennessee’s consumer protection act and the plaintiffs dismissed the case.

Another lawsuit involving the game was started in 2005 after a 17 year old named Devin Moore shot and killed three police officers in Alabama after he was questioned regarding a stolen vehicle. When being questioned, Moore took a gun from one of the police officers and shot and killed him and two others and then fled in a police car. One of Moore’s attorneys, Jack Thompson, claimed it was Grand Theft Auto’s graphic nature—with his constant playing time—that caused Moore to commit the murders, and Moore’s family agrees.

At the time of this writing, the case has not been resolved and is ongoing. Lawyer Jack Thompson has said, “There’s no doubt in my mind that but for Devin Moore’s training on this cop killing simulator, he would not have been able to kill three cops in Fayette, Alabama who are now dead and in the ground. We are suing Take-Two, Sony, Wal-Mart, and GameStop for having trained Devin Moore to kill. He had no history of violence. No criminal record.”

Another teenager named Cody Posey who was said to obsessively play the game murdered his father, stepmother, and stepsister in New Mexico.

In 2009, a six-year-old boy took his mom’s car attempting to drive himself to school because he missed the bus, only to crash the car and luckily avoid serious injury. The child was able to drive the car over ten miles before crashing, and told the sheriff that he had trained how to drive on video games, specifically mentioning Grand Theft Auto.[xliii]

The Guinness World Records lists the game as the most controversial videogame series in history for glamorizing violence and its connections to actual crimes.[xliv]

Another videogame that wastes countless hours of people’s lives is the online role-playing game World of Warcraft. It’s sort of an advanced Dungeons and Dragons type of game, which has become synonymous with an antisocial outcast living in his parent’s basement. The game type is a massively multiplayer online role-playing game (MMORPG) which requires players to subscribe to a monthly service in order to play with other online gamers. The game made the Guinness Book of World Records for the most subscribed MMORPG, with more than 11.5 million monthly subscriptions.

Such a game takes the players into a completely fictional fantasy land where they often find themselves spending dozens of hours a week. Such a large chunk of time obviously takes away from social activities such as hanging out with friends or going to parties, as well as physical activities like playing sports. Instead, many World of Warcraft players find themselves sitting in front of their computer screen alone hour after hour, with their social skills and physical fitness deteriorating with every passing minute.

Gay Children’s Books

Everyone knows how impressionable children are. They believe in Santa Clause, the Easter Bunny, and the Tooth Fairy, after all. While parents cannot have complete control over the values and behaviors of their children, it is undeniable that the environment children are exposed to and the values and behaviors of the adults in their life largely influence them. For example, the children of Anton LaVey, the founder of the Church of Satan, all grew up and continued to carry on the legacy of their father and are avowed Satanists themselves.

While homosexuality is a complex and sensitive issue, it cannot be denied that heterosexual desires, behaviors, and couples are normal, and the small percentage of homosexuals represent an abnormal minority whose strange desires and behaviors are the result of some kind of neurological or hormonal disorder. This is not to say that they should be hated for what could be something they cannot fully control. But to teach young children that homosexuality is a normal and natural thing is an absolute abomination, yet in the 21st century the homosexual indoctrination of children took a disturbing turn when various children’s books began to find their way into schools which involved plots of gay characters and were being forced on the young students.

In 2006 at Estabrook Elementary School in Lexington, Massachusetts, a teacher had chosen the theme of “weddings” for reading time, and the book she chose to read to the children was a picture book titled King and King which tells the story of two men who fall in love and get married. The book begins with a Queen nagging her unmarried son, the prince, because he is not married, saying, “When I was your age, I’d been married twice already.”

The Queen brings in a bunch of princesses from neighboring kingdoms for him to choose from to be his wife, but he ended up being attracted to one of the princess’s brothers. “At last, the prince felt a stir in his heart. It was love at first sight,” the book reads.

The two princes get married after a whirlwind courtship and are then crowned “king and king,” instead of king and queen. The last page shows a drawing of the two “kings” kissing each other on the lips.

A similar book titled And Tango Makes Three, describes two male penguins who adopt a baby penguin and raise it together. The two penguins are clearly identified as being two men, and at one point in the story the zoo keeper says they must be in love.

One school superintendent, Jennifer Filyaw, said she considered the book “adorable” and appropriate for children ages 4 to 8.[xlv] Parents pressured the school to have the book removed from the school library, and were opposed by gay activists who claimed that would amount to “censorship.”

At the Alameda Unified School District in California in 2009 the school board voted to uphold a special LBGT (Lesbian, Bisexual, Gay and Transgender) curriculum, and forced 2nd graders to read And Tango Makes Three.[xlvi]

The interesting thing about those who push the homosexual agenda is that they claim everyone should not be judgmental and that all views and lifestyles should be accepted, yet at the same time, they attack conservatives or Christians who are opposed to such agendas. So while claiming people shouldn’t judge, many gays themselves judge others who have differing opinions and values regarding homosexual agendas, even when those opposed to such things are respectful in their differences.

The original writings of the Illuminati read, “We must win the common people in every corner. This will be obtained chiefly by means of the schools, and by open, hearty behavior, show, condescension, popularity, and toleration of their prejudices, which we shall at leisure root out and dispel.”

Obama’s Perverted “Safe Schools Czar”

Kevin Jennings, the person president Obama appointed to be his “safe schools czar” is a homosexual who acknowledged that when he was a schoolteacher he advised a 15 year old boy to use condoms when having sex with an older man he met at a bus station bathroom. Not only did Jennings fail to report this incident of statutory rape to authorities, but in the months following he befriended this young boy who would come by his office and tell him of his gay “adventures.”

Jennings writes about this in his 2007 autobiography, Mama’s Boy, Preacher’s Son: A Memoir. On page 162, Jennings writes: “Robertson soon told me the tale, about someone he’d met in Boston, how he thought he loved him, how heartbroken he was when his calls never got returned…” On page 169, he continues: “As the fall wore on, Robertson continued to drop by my office to chat, often updating me on his latest ‘adventures.’ Sometimes these startled me, and I began to underline the importance of safe sex to him.”

It wouldn’t be surprising if Jennings secretly had a crush on this young boy and found sexual gratification from hearing about all of his homosexual encounters. Jennings is also the author/editor of a book titled One Teacher in 10, which is, “A collection of more than 30 accounts by gay and lesbian teachers from schools and universities across the country. Each narrative recounts its author’s experiences either as an openly gay or lesbian teacher or during the period of coming out.”

Jennings has also written about his past drug use and his contempt for religion, and promotes homosexuality in schools. Department of Education spokesman Justin Hamilton declined to comment on Jennings’ statements about encouraging the young boy to have sex with the older man, but Arne Duncan who is Obama’s Secretary of Education, said he was “honored” to work with Jennings and described him as “uniquely qualified for his job.”[xlvii]

Some defenders say the Obama administration wasn’t aware of Jennings past, but it was written clearly in his autobiography and as Peter Sprigg of the Family Research Council said, “This controversy about the possible statutory rape was raised in 2004 when he received an award from the NEA. So it’s not like it’s been a secret. So I think it shows yet another failure of the Obama administration’s vetting process.”

As if these issues weren’t bad enough, the perversions of Kevin Jennings actually get much worse. In March 2000 the Gay, Lesbian, and Straight Education Network (GLSEN) of Massachusetts held a conference where workshop leaders taught children as young as 14 how to “fist” each other, which is the dangerous sexual practice of sticking an entire hand up the rectum of another individual. Kevin Jennings is the founder of GLSEN and was the keynote speaker at this conference. In 2007 he was paid over $250,000 as its executive director.

At the 2001 GLSEN conference, activists handed out over 400 “fisting kits” which included rubber gloves and lubrication to the children who attended. In 2005 this same organization handed out hundreds of copies of a booklet to kids titled The Little Black Book: Queer in the 21st Century which contained sections titled: Fucking; Licking Butt; Piss Play, and Fisting, each of which describes in very graphic language the practices of these different types of gay sex activities.

Slutty Halloween Costumes

It’s a well-known aspect of Halloween that young adults, particularly female college students, like to dress up in the skimpiest and sluttiest outfits possible that night, but a disturbing trend can be seen in the costumes for young children. Very skimpy and slutty costumes are now found on the shelves for very young children and some parents who are lost in the culture of the New World Order don’t think anything of it.

Fortunately there are still parents with morals and decent values. “If girls get used to dressing like this, they might want to become a whore after Halloween,” said Harlem mom Malinda Martinez, 33, who has a 6-year-old girl. “They’re far too grown up for kids.”[xlviii]

The marketing message for many children’s costumes are more blatantly sexual than ever before. “The Navy ships won’t want to leave the dock unless this cute sailor girl is on board,” reads one catalog entry for a teeny-weeny sailor costume in sizes that can fit a 4-year-old that was sold by a Party City store on West 14th Street in New York City.

“It is so wrong,” said Sharon Lamb, author of the book Packaging Girlhood: Rescuing Our Daughters From Marketers’ Schemes. “The message being put out there is that it’s right to be slutty on Halloween. That’s what Halloween is all about now. The one night when it’s OK to live your fantasies, marketers are telling children their fantasies should involve sex. It is very damaging.”[xlix]

An article in the New York Post explains that a reporter found an array of slutty Halloween costumes for children at a Party City on East Fourth Street in New York City, including:

A Goldilocks costume suitable for a Penthouse party with clingy gingham lace-up peasant dress with a white petticoat “that’s all grown up, and you can have your porridge and more.”

A pirate costume called the “High Seas Hottie” made in sizes to fit an 8-year-old.

A women-in-chains fantasy costume called “Convict Cutie” that features a spandex dress and lace-up bodice.

A “Devil Grrrl” costume for 10 to 14-year-olds that includes a flaming-red dress and tail, skanky fishnet hose and gloves and a tiny pitchfork. “This grrrl devil likes to get things heating up!” the packaging boasts.

One blogger wrote, “Every year, it gets harder and harder to find a costume for my oldest daughter that won’t get her picked up by the cops as a street walker…I’m still on my search to find a costume that doesn’t have a mini-skirt, lace-up corset or have the word ‘cutie’ in it for my 5-year-old. I may have to resort to making her a ghost by throwing a sheet over her.”[l]

Jack Black’s Prayer to Satan on MTV

At the 2009 Video Music Awards on MTV, a popular award show, actor Jack Black decided to offer up a prayer of thanks to Satan. “Since we’re giving a rock award tonight, who wants to pray to the Devil with me? Let me see those horns! (referring to the El Diablo hand sign of extending the index and pinky fingers.) Now take the hand of the person next to you. Dear dark lord Satan…just wanted to ask you to grant tonight’s winners continued success in the music industry.”

Much of the crowd cheered with encouragement and many held up their “Devil horns” in unison with Black. MTV continues to be a major sewer pipe pouring garbage of all kinds into the living rooms of millions.

Anti-God Advertisements in New York Sub-way Stations

A coalition of eight different atheist organizations purchased a month’s worth of advertising space in a dozen subway stations in Manhattan in order to promote atheism and attack belief in God. One poster reads “A million New Yorkers are good without God. Are you?” The groups behind the ads, which calls themselves the Big Apple Coalition of Reason, say they are, “part of a coordinated multi-organizational advertising campaign designed to raise awareness about people who don’t believe in a god.”[li]

The New York City subway system is used by more than 5 million people per day. The organizers bragged that the 2009 American Religious Identification Survey indicated that approximately 15% of those surveyed check “none” for religion, up from 8% in 1990 and said that this was just the beginning of a nationwide effort to post their materials in transit systems across the country.

Atheism is promoted by the Illuminati and the establishment because they know that most religions instill moral values in people and promote a code of conduct that enriches peoples’ lives and helps them to be happier, healthier, and create systems of accountability through friends to discourage and minimize destructive, immoral, and unhealthy behaviors. A population of hedonists whose lives are in shambles because of credit card debt, alcohol and drug abuse, and destructive broken relationships are going to be too wrapped up in their own lives and problems to care about looking into what their lawmakers and politicians are doing. Such people are not going to become organized or even speak up about any issues directly affecting them and will not get in the way of the New World Order.

Alcohol and Drug Abuse Encouraged

Since a population trapped in a downward spiral of drug and alcohol abuse will not care to learn about political issues or get involved, this behavior is also encouraged. Celebrities are worshiped by the mentally enslaved who mimic their behavior and habits, finding them cool and exciting. It’s interesting to learn that many musicians are complete phonies who portray a lifestyle in their music that is completely different from their personal lives. Others become nearly destroyed by the very attitudes and behaviors that shot them to stardom. Rap celebrity Dr. Dre released an album called The Chronic in 1992 which featured a large pot leaf printed on the CD face (chronic is a slang term for marijuana) and contained numerous references to smoking weed, doing drugs, and committing crimes. In August of 2008 Dr. Dre’s first son Andre Young Jr. died at the age of 20 from an overdose of heroin and morphine.[lii]

Rapper 50 Cent burst on the music scene in 2003 with his single In Da Club with lyrics saying, “You can find me in the club, bottle full of bub [alcohol] / Look mommy I got the X [Ecstasy] if you’re into taking drugs,” portraying the image of a club hopping party animal, but in interviews 50 Cent has repeatedly stated that he is a home body and doesn’t like to go out to clubs.

One particular radio station in San Diego, and I’m sure in multiple other cities as well, plays the sound of a water bong (a device used for smoking marijuana) every day at 4:20pm celebrating “420” which is a number used by pot smokers to signify smoking marijuana. This author observed a scene once in the TV show Nip/Tuck where a character pulled out a water bong and smoked weed with his grandmother. The show airs on the cable station FX. Showing a water bong being smoked on TV is something that never happened until the 21st century when society sunk to a new level as it continued to deteriorate.

This author is personally fairly libertarian when it comes to marijuana laws and sees the criminalization of possession and use largely a money making ploy for private prisons, but it’s not just marijuana that is being portrayed as cool and fun. Films like Blow (2001) starring Johnny Depp sensationalize cocaine use, and Trainspotting (1996) did the same thing for heroine.

Banking, Money, and Taxes

Perhaps you have noticed that frequently the largest and most extravagant buildings in most cities (and even small towns) are banks. It’s fascinating how banks make money off interest, which is one of the most lucrative businesses known to man. While most businesses build a product or provide some kind of service involving manual labor or specialized knowledge, banks make enormous profits through the seemingly magical practice of lending people money and collecting interest on the loans.

When one really looks into how money is created and used, and how interest is generated from loans, it becomes clear that the banking industry is one of the pillars of the New World Order and is at the core of the elite’s ability to control people, politicians, and even governments of large countries.

You’ll often hear people familiar with this issue say that the banks “create money out of nothing, and then loan it out at interest.” Such a statement is hard to grasp at first, but conveys just how big of a con the banking industry is involved in. Such a con game goes back thousands of years and is often blamed on the Jews due to their money lending practices in Biblical times.

In the 10th century the Knights Templar figured out this amazing strategy and became the first international bankers in Europe and the practice contributed greatly to their wealth. On October 13, 1307 (Friday the 13th) the leadership of the Knights Templar was arrested in France for allegedly practicing strange and satanic rituals, a charge most prominent occultists admit was true. Surviving Knights Templar went underground and are believed to have started Freemasonry which they used as a cover for their occult beliefs and practices. Freemasons then continued to operate (and still continue) as a Mystery School which the Illuminati was able to graft onto. Besides functioning as a place to learn occult theology and mysticism, other areas of life are also taught and nurtured in these Mystery Schools such as science, business, and banking.

Because the business of banking is extremely profitable, and the banks owners don’t have to build any products or really provide any services involving extensive manual labor, cunning businessmen saw the potential for virtually unlimited easy money and became involved in the industry. People like Paul Warburg, J.P. Morgan, and others monopolized the industry, thus securing their wealth for countless generations and giving them the ability to buy politicians and fund their personal plans for a global government.

The Federal Reserve

In understanding the role of money and banking in the New World Order, it is important to know about the true nature of the Federal Reserve (often simply called “the Fed”). Most people think the Federal Reserve is a government owned bank in the United States or a branch of the Department of the Treasury, but this couldn’t be further from the truth. “The Federal Reserve is no more federal than Federal Express” is the joke that people familiar with this issue often tell. And they’re right.

The Federal Reserve is a private group of banks that lends money to the United States government in the same way your local bank lends you money. This ingenious scheme was put in place in 1913 with the passing of the Federal Reserve Act which was drawn up in secret by a group of wealthy banksters when they met on Jekyll Island off the coast of Georgia three years earlier. Ever since the Federal Reserve Act was put into law, the United States has become a servant to the elite international bankers and the national debt has skyrocketed out of control.

Thomas Jefferson, the 3rd president of the United States once said, “I believe that banking institutions are more dangerous to our liberties than standing armies. If the American people ever allow private banks to control the issue of their currency, first by inflation, then by deflation, the banks and corporations that will grow up around [the banks] will deprive the people of all property until their children wake-up homeless on the continent their fathers conquered. The issuing power should be taken from the banks and restored to the people, to whom it properly belongs.”

Alan Greenspan, who worked as the Chairman of the Federal Reserve for over eighteen years, made an extremely candid statement once about how powerful the Federal Reserve is when being interviewed on PBS while he was promoting his book The Age of Turbulence (2007).

The interviewer, Jim Lahr, asked him what the proper relationship should be between the chairman of the Federal Reserve and a president of the United States, to which Greenspan answered, “Well, first of all, the Federal Reserve is an independent agency, and that means basically that there is no other agency of government which can overrule actions that we take…what the relationships are don’t frankly matter.”

To learn more about this fascinating and important issue, you are urged to watch the films, Money As Debt, The Money Masters, or Monopoly Men.

Gold and Silver

People against the New World Order will often be interested in investing in gold and silver—particularly physical gold and silver—meaning they purchase coins or bars that they themselves take physical possession of, rather than just buying gold or silver stocks or certificates. The reason for this is because gold and silver are seen as real money, as opposed to a fiat currency like the US dollar. A fiat currency is a currency that isn’t backed by gold or silver. Before 1971 the US dollar was backed by gold which meant that for every dollar in circulation, there was one dollar worth of gold in possession by the federal government or the Federal Reserve Bank. This was a way to keep inflation low since the gold supply only slowly increased, so then would inflation.

But in 1971 President Nixon took the US dollar off the gold standard, meaning the Federal Reserve could print money and put it in circulation that was not backed by gold, so the rate of inflation was no longer connected to the amount of gold in existence, but rather to the number of dollars the Federal Reserve wanted to print.

For decades, patriots and those in The Resistance had worried that the Federal Reserve Banking System, which is controlled by a group of private banks operating as if they were a government entity, would one day make the US dollar practically worthless because it would print so many of them it would create what is called hyper-inflation, thus destroying the value of the currency as was seen in the Weimar Republic in Germany in the 1930s, and recently in Zimbabwe, Africa where the inflation rate was so high that a bunch of bananas cost literally billions of Zimbabwe dollars.

Since the year 2000 gold has went from $300 an ounce to over $1100 an ounce in the beginning of 2010. Silver went from $5.25 an ounce to $18 an ounce in the same timeframe. Some market analysts predict that gold will hit $2000 an ounce sometime into the 2010 decade, and others are even predicting $5000 an ounce. Much of the increase in the price of gold and silver isn’t because the metals are getting rarer, but rather the price is a reflection of the weakening US dollar. Gold and silver have been seen as a hedge against inflation for decades and most financial advisers recommend that 10% of a person’s investments should be held in gold.

In a video that got several hundred thousand views on YouTube, this author offered to sell random strangers walking along a boardwalk on a beach a one ounce gold coin for $50, and in some cases, $20, and once tried to trade it for a cup of coffee, but nobody expressed any interest. Some didn’t want the coin because it was Canadian and didn’t think it had much value in America, not realizing that a one ounce gold coin stamped with a picture of Mickey Mouse is still an ounce of gold and can be sold at any coin shop for whatever the spot price of gold is going for that day.

Some of the comments on the video by the viewer’s said they thought the people I approached thought it was a fake coin and that was why they didn’t want to buy it for fifty bucks. These people missed the point of the video which was to show that very few people have any clue whatsoever about what the value of gold is, so I shot another video to clearly illustrate this.

In the follow up video I offered random passers-by the coin for free if they knew or could guess how much gold was trading for that day within 25%. You have to see the video to really grasp the impact of it, and if you watch it you will see that adults over the age of 30 guessed as low as thirty-eight cents and as high as $245. At the time the video was shot, gold was trading for $1150 per ounce. After the “contestants,” as I called them, gave me their answer, I told them how much the coin was actually worth and captured their reactions on the video.

People concerned with the New World Order are especially interested in owning physical gold and silver because they are aware of the elite’s ultimate goal of establishing one currency for the whole world, and in order to accomplish this it is likely that the United States dollar will have to be made practically worthless through hyper-inflation at which point the solution for this currency crisis will be the introduction of a new regional currency or an adoption of a global currency. (See One World Currency)

Another reason for physically holding a collection of silver coins (usually one ounce coins which is the standard weight) is the possibility that a community barter system or an underground economy may have to be used for a period of time during a hyper-inflation scenario. In the event of a hyper-inflationary depression and the US dollar becomes practically worthless, or loses 90% of its value in a short time frame, small mom and pop stores, as well as neighborhoods and perhaps entire communities may start using one ounce silver coins as money to exchange goods and services. A small local bakery may only sell loaves of bread for a one ounce silver coin, or someone with a large farm or garden may sell their produce to others in their community, but only for silver. If this sounds far-fetched you should be aware that during the hyper-inflation in Zimbabwe, street vendors stopped taking the country’s currency because of the massive daily inflation, and would only accept grams of gold for payment.[liii]

Since a one ounce gold coin has a fairly high value, it is advised that you purchase and hold onto at least a small amount of one ounce silver coins because their value can be matched with various products or services. In the event of this kind of a black market economy arising, very few transactions would need to be made in gold because one ounce of gold is worth approximately 50 times what an ounce of silver is worth. If a loaf of bread is selling for one ounce of silver, and all you have is one ounce gold coins (or even half ounce or quarter ounces) then you’re going to have to buy way more bread than you could possibly need at the moment. This would be like shopping at a Dollar Store with only $100 dollar bills and the store wouldn’t be able to give you any change.

Income Tax and the IRS

A faction of The Resistance is adamant about the federal income tax being illegal, and don’t believe the 16th Amendment was properly ratified, therefore they don’t believe the income tax should be paid. Some people who believe this actually stop paying their income taxes, and a handful of people who have done so and been taken to court over it and won, are used as examples by these people as evidence that they are correct. This is a dangerous fight to pick and is extremely difficult to win. Most people who believe the income tax is illegal, still pay their taxes because they know that when it comes to the government wanting its money, they will stop at nothing to get it. Thomas Jefferson said, “the power to tax is the power to destroy,” and he was correct.

Aaron Russo’s 2006 film America: Freedom to Fascism is perhaps one of the most popular films on the subject of the income tax being illegal. In the film he interviews former IRS agents, tax protesters, and others who all subscribe to the belief that the tax is illegal.

Ed and Elaine Brown are a married couple from New Hampshire who got national media attention in 2007 after they had a five month standoff with federal authorities after refusing to turn themselves in after having been convicted of tax crimes. Their home was designed to function “off the grid” and they had stockpiled food and supplies, but also had help from various visitors who were allowed on the property during the standoff. The Browns were known to be armed and police had feared another Ruby Ridge type of incident if they tried to forcefully arrest them. After the five month standoff they were eventually arrested by undercover officers posing as supporters who were invited into the house by the Browns on October 4, 2007 and were immediately arrested without incident.

Four individuals who assisted the Browns during the standoff were later convicted in connection with the matter. Their sentences ranged from two and a half years to thirty six years in prison for bringing the Browns food and supplies during the standoff.

Regarding tax protesters, it’s significant to note that Irwin Schiff, the father of economic guru and Senate candidate Peter Schiff, was sentenced to thirteen years in prison after being found guilty of tax evasion. The courts claimed Irwin owed over $2 million dollars in back taxes. Irwin was a prominent tax protester and conducted seminars teaching people why he thought paying income tax was illegal.

2009 Tea Party Protests

April 15,th as you probably know, is “Tax Day” in America, and is the deadline for filing your yearly income tax statement. While nobody likes paying taxes, and they continuously go up with little opposition from citizens, Tax Day in 2009 was different in the United States. The Tea Party protests, as they have become known as, were (and continue to be) a nationwide coordinated protest against big government, economic stimulus packages, government spending, and high taxes in general. Millions of Americans gathered in rallies across the country to show their displeasure with the out of control government. The name “Tea Party” is a reference to the Boston Tea Party from the American Revolution where colonists boarded British ships in 1773 and destroyed large quantities of tea by throwing it in the water as a symbolic protest against taxation without representation.

The liberal media collectively labeled the Tea Party protesters as “tea baggers” which is a slang term for sucking on testicles. Liberal commentators all knew this which was evident by their inability to contain their smirks and giggles every time they said it.

CNN’s Anderson Cooper (a homosexual) was interviewing David Gergen about opposition to the 2009 stimulus packages, when Gergen commented that the Republicans “still haven’t found their voice” referring to a consensus on how to deal with the ensuing recession, when Cooper jumped in and said, “it’s hard to talk when you’re tea bagging.” Cooper’s disgusting comment with clear sexual overtones caused his guests to all giggle like children. Despite a backlash by people upset with his vulgar joke, no disciplinary action was taken.[liv]

Rachel Maddow on MSNBC (another homosexual) covered the Tea Party protests with a perverted slant, emphasizing the words “tea bagging” throughout the segment, causing her off camera staff (a camera man or production assistant) to laugh out loud which was clearly audible. “They don’t want to tea bag alone, if that’s even possible,”[lv] she joked, again referring to the sexual connotations that such a term holds.

Another left wing MSNBC host, Keith Olbermann, made a joke about cleaning up after the tea bagging and then admitted, “and that will be my last intentional double entendre on this one, at least until the end of the segment.” A double entendre is a figure of speech which is meant to be understood in either of two ways, one being straightforward, and the other less so, often risqué or inappropriate.

A report posted on the Anti-Defamation League’s (ADL) website, titled Rage Grows in America: Anti-Government Conspiracies, lists the Tea Party protests as evidence that since the election of Barack Obama as president, “a climate of fervor and activism with manifestations ranging from incivility in public forums to acts of intimidation and violence” has occurred in America.

The report contains a section titled The Tea Parties which reads, “The rapid growth of anti-government anger in the wake of Obama’s election first became apparent in the spring of 2009, when conservative groups and grass-roots activists organized a nationwide series of anti-government rallies dubbed ‘Tea Parties.’ At these events, and later sequels, anti-government sentiments and conspiracy theories proliferated, with a common theme being that somehow Obama had ‘stolen’ the country from Americans.”[lvi]

This report also lists Alex Jones from Infowars.com as the “Conspiracy King” and says, “Further out into the extremist fringe, one person in particular has been responsible for stirring up anti-government and anti-Obama conspiracy theories in the United States.”

Establishment Attempts to Demonize Critics of Obama’s Economic Policies

MSNBC host Carlos Watson, who is an African American, was addressing the increased use of people labeling President Obama as a socialist because of his policies, when Watson stated, “you start to wonder, in fact, if the word socialist is becoming a code word, whether or not socialist is becoming the new N-word.”[lvii]

After a story broke about Barrack Obama’s wife Michelle having 26 aids, and conservatives were questioning why she would need so many and were concerned about the cost, MSNBC’s Chris Matthews tried to quell such criticism by stating, “When I heard people going after the first lady and the number of staff that they have, it sounds racist to me. It sounds like people are mad we have a black first lady.”[lviii]

Comedian Janeane Garofalo stated on MSNBC’s Countdown with Keith Olbermann that the Tea Party protests in 2009 were not about protesting out of control government spending or increasing taxes, but that, “Let’s be very honest about what this is about. It’s not about bashing democrats, it’s not about taxes, they have no idea what the Boston Tea Party was about. They don’t know their history at all. This is about hating a black man in the White House. This is racism straight up…and there is no way around that.” She was not joking.

Former Democratic President Jimmy Carter told Brian Williams during an interview on NBC that, “I think an overwhelming portion of the intentionally demonstrated animosity towards President Barrack Obama is based on the fact that he is a black man, that he’s African American….and I think it’s bubbled up to the surface because of a belief among many white people, not just in the south, but around the country, that African Americans are not qualified to lead this great country.”[lix]

The Servant Class

So a private bank (the Federal Reserve) has a stranglehold over the United States government, in much of the same way that many consumers are in debt to credit cards or other unsecured loans. (An unsecured loan is a loan that is not backed by collateral.) Much of consumer debt is due to people “buying things they don’t need with money they don’t have” as the cliché goes. Dining out, bar tabs, new clothes, and vacations often rack up enormous credit card debt which then continues to rise with compounding interest, with people often only making the minimum payment that doesn’t even cover the previous month’s interest.

The larger the national debt of the United States government goes, the higher taxes are raised, and the lower the standard of living gets. You often hear that “the middle class is shrinking,” which means that more and more people will never own a home or be able to retire, and will never really accumulate any valuable assets. Another cliché, “the rich get richer and the poor get poorer” is sadly coming true.

A major financial goal for the New World Order is to completely erode the middle class and leave only two social classes remaining: the wealthy, and the poor working class who will forever be slaves to the system, laboring away to pay their taxes and fuel the lifestyles of the elite Illuminati.

While many people fear this coming and are trying to fight against it, the vast majority of Americans are happy as long as they can get drunk and watch football on the weekends, and have come to embrace their slavery. The elite are pleased with this servant class since they are uninformed and out of the way, and while living only for the moment, they don’t even consider the possibility that there is more to life or that they have been reduced to mere peasants.

One World Currency

People who are aware of the emerging New World Order often warn of a coming one world currency, and the “mark of the beast.” In fact, many Christians are aware of Revelation 13:16-18 which states, “And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads: And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name. Here is wisdom. Let him that hath understanding count the number of the beast: for it is the number of a man; and his number is six hundred threescore and six.”

The infamous mark of the beast is fairly well known in Christian circles, and secular circles as well. The term refers to a passage in the Book of Revelation, which is the last book in the Bible, and indicates some kind of mark that the Antichrist world dictator will force everyone to take on their right hand or on their forehead, and if they don’t, then they will not be able to buy or sell anything or partake in any kind of financial transactions using money.

This book of the Bible is believed by most scholars to have been written sometime between the year 68 A.D. and 90 A.D. by John of Patmos and describes his apocalyptic visions of the last days of the earth.

While most Christians have heard of the mark of the beast and have some idea of what it is, unfortunately most of them do not see the underlying forces and institutions that are continuously striving to bring such a thing into reality. For decades resistance groups and those who were concerned about a New World Order saw the signs that one day the elite bankers around the world hoped to implement a single global currency and eliminate all other forms of money. This unified global currency will be transferred into an electronic currency then, and the use of cash and coins will practically be eliminated and a thing of the past.

Once this electronic currency is the universally accepted method of payment for all goods and services, every person in the world will be subjected to having each and every one of their financial transactions recorded in a database. Exactly what you buy, when you buy it, how much you paid, and what store location you bought it from will be cataloged and stored indefinitely. The days of making cash transactions for things like selling an old car, or even mowing a neighbor’s lawn will be a thing of the past. Once this system is implemented the government can ensure that they will be aware of each and every financial transaction, no matter how large or small, and be sure to tax you as they see fit.

The financial transaction database on each person can also be used in ways that most people could never imagine. The financial institutions connected to your mark of the beast can sell your entire purchasing history to advertisers or even insurance companies. Are you purchasing large quantities of chocolate cake on a weekly basis? Cigarettes? Beer? Your insurance company would love to know these things, and could use such information to either increase your rates, or to place you lower on the priority list when you need medical treatment since your purchasing profile shows that you buy a lot of chocolate cake and beer and aren’t paying any monthly dues to a gym or health club.

President Bill Clinton’s mentor at Georgetown University, the establishment insider named Carroll Quigley wrote in his 1966 book Tragedy and Hope that “The powers of financial capitalism had (a) far-reaching aim, nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole. This system was to be controlled in a feudalist fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert, by secret agreements arrived at in frequent meetings and conferences. The apex of the systems was to be the Bank for International Settlements in Basel, Switzerland, a private bank owned and controlled by the world’s central banks which were themselves private corporations. Each central bank...sought to dominate its government by its ability to control Treasury loans, to manipulate foreign exchanges, to influence the level of economic activity in the country, and to influence cooperative politicians by subsequent economic rewards in the business world.”[lx]

The Amero

The Amero is the new currency that elite globalist organizations are pushing to replace the American dollar, the Canadian dollar, and the Mexican peso. This will likely happen after the North American Union becomes official, which they are also pushing.

Once regional currencies are established around the world, all those currencies will then be merged into the one world currency, and then transformed into an electronic currency.

The Amero was first proposed in 1999 by a Canadian economist named Herbert G. Grubel who published a book titled The Case for the Amero.[lxi] This was the same year that the Euro became the official currency in Europe for the European Union.

Chairman of the Council on Foreign Relations, Robert Pastor, later had a book published in 2001 titled Toward a North American Community, where he wrote, “In the long term, the amero is in the best interests of all three countries,”[lxii] referring to the United States, Canada, and Mexico. Anyone who has spent any time looking at the elite organizations at the heart of the New World Order knows that the Council on Foreign Relations usually gets what it wants, and it is very telling when the chairman writes a book about wanting a North American Union and a new regional currency.

An economist at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, Eric van Wincoop, co-authored a journal article in 2001 which discussed what he said were the benefits of a regional currency, saying, “The use of different moneys across borders can form a barrier as there are costs in exchanging currencies in spot and forward markets and traders face uncertainty about currency movements that cannot always be hedged. A common currency also leads to greater transparency of price differentials.”[lxiii]

It is very interesting that elite members of the Council on Foreign Relations and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York have been promoting the idea of creating a new regional currency involving the United States, Canada, and Mexico, while at the same time such an idea is called a conspiracy theory by most so-called financial or political experts. The reason for this is so that such a plan may be formulated and finalized without the public’s awareness so the plan for such a currency will be just a few steps from completion before it or its supporters are faced with any opposition.

Since the insider’s discussions of such a plan are mainly in literature only read by other insiders and not in the mainstream press, it is basically an open secret which goes unnoticed by the masses who are distracted by the pop culture circus that is presented to them by the mainstream media.

Hal Turner’s Amero Hoax

A man named Hal Turner posted a video on his YouTube channel on October 4th 2008 titled “Hal Turner Shows New AMERO Currency,” where he claimed to have in his possession an actual Amero coin he obtained from a contact at the Denver Mint. The video quickly received over 400,000 views and reached the number one spot on Google Video’s top 100 list and was spread around the Internet like wildfire. A lot of people gullibly accepted his claims, and believed that the Amero would soon be released to the public. What most people didn’t realize is that Hal Turner is a white supremacist who worked for the FBI as an informant and an agent provocateur. More on this later.

The “Amero” that Turner held in his hand for his video was simply a novelty replica that could be purchased from www.AmeroCurrency.com or www.DC-Coin.com. As he is displaying his coin in his video, at one point the camera zooms in on the front and back of the coin to show the designs as he attempts to “prove” its authenticity, and if you compare the coin he is holding to the replicas sold on the Internet, they are EXACTLY the same.

After someone does two minutes of research, Hal Turner’s claims become absurd and can be seen as completely fraudulent, but some of his supporters still defended him online saying that he himself was “duped” into believing that he had been sent a “real” Amero by an informant who worked at the Denver Mint. After all, the Council on Foreign Relations and other New World Order organizations have been planning such a thing for years. The previous year Turner had posted photos of “real” Amero coins on his website, which also spread around the web, and interestingly enough he would later buy or obtain the replica and show it off to be real.

A quick Google search shows anyone that the pictures of the coins were taken from the various websites that create novelty coins and replicas. Countless people must have emailed him to point this out to him, as did the comments on his blog post, so he had to know that the coins were simply replicas, but that didn’t stop him from trying to continue the hoax a year later by claiming to have an actual coin.

Posting comments on the video on his YouTube channel of his alleged discovery had been disabled by him, obviously because people would post comments and links showing his coin was nothing but an easily obtained replica. Numerous counter videos were posted to YouTube exposing this hoax, and various bloggers had posted articles pointing it out as well.

Two months later, on December 3rd 2008 Turner posted photos of “Amero paper currency” and wrote, “To the chagrin of the government, I have obtained new “AMERO” paper currency notes! You know, the “AMERO” . . . . the new currency that is going to replace the US Dollar, The Canadian Dollar and the Mexican Peso? Yea, the new currency that all three governments claim doesn’t exist. . . I have it.”[lxiv]

His article goes on to say how over a year ago he “first broke” the story about Amero coins being secretly created at the Denver Mint, referring to the photos he posted on his website. His article also claims that YouTube notified him that the video he had posted showing his alleged Amero coin had been deleted and his account “permanently closed at the request of the United States Treasury Department.” Turner wrote, “The Treasury department told YouTube/Google that my video was destabilizing the U.S. Dollar and was thus a threat to national security.”[lxv]

While his articles allow readers to post comments, the user is notified that the administrator (Turner) must approve all comments first, and if and when this happens, it will show up on the website. So obviously, all comments posted informing him and the readers that the photos and his claims are fraudulent, were simply not approved, and never found their way on the website. It is incredible the number of gullible people that continue to believe Turner. By reading the comments that he had approved, it becomes clear the inability of Turner’s readers to distinguish fact from fiction. What’s worse is that Turner’s articles are often copied and pasted into emails and sent around to others by people who believe his writings and aren’t aware of his continuous lies and his admitted role as a government agent.

One can see how a large percentage of the viewers of his video claiming to show an Amero will believe him at first—that the Ameros are already being coined, only to later dismiss the idea of the U.S. Dollar collapsing and being replaced by a new currency—because it turns out the video was a hoax. It’s a classic case of disinformation by mixing facts with fiction, in an attempt to prevent the public from focusing on the impact of such issues that we will ultimately face in the near future.

Turner has a history of urging and hoping for violence against others, including judges, and has posted their home addresses on his website and written blogs celebrating their murders.

In July 2009 Turner was arrested for allegedly posting threats to federal judges. During a court appearance his lawyer Michael Orozco pleaded with the judge saying Turner worked for the FBI beginning in 2002 as an “agent provocateur” and was taught by the agency “what he could say that wouldn’t be crossing the line.”[lxvi]

“His job was basically to publish information which would cause other parties to act in a manner which would lead to their arrest,” Orozco said.[lxvii]

So it is clear that not only was Turner wrong about having an actual Amero coin, but he was purposefully lying about it in an attempt to create the idea that a regional currency, likely to be called the Amero, is a hoax and something American’s don’t need to worry about or look into. This way when people hear about such a plan, they quickly dismiss it as a conspiracy theory or a hoax thanks to actions like Turner’s.

Turner’s admission that he worked for the FBI and his somewhat creative hoaxes about the Amero led many to believe that he worked as a disinformation agent, whose job it was to put out false and fraudulent information about the Amero, in order to make anyone who talked about such a thing seem like they were falling for Turner’s scam and that there was no such thing in the works.

China Calls for Global Currency

In May of 2009 just before the G-20 economic summit in London, an official from China’s central bank made news around the world when they began calling for a new global currency to replace the U.S. dollar.

The proposal came from Beijing’s central bank governor, Zhou Xiaochuan, who said that “the world economic crisis shows the inherent vulnerabilities and systemic risks in the existing international monetary system.”

He recommended creating a currency that would be controlled by the International Monetary Fund in order “to achieve the objective of safeguarding global economic and financial stability.”

China has been getting concerned about the value of the U.S. dollar because of Beijing’s estimated 1 trillion dollars in U.S. Treasuries and other government debt.

U.S. Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner

Immediately after news surfaced of China’s desire for a one world currency, U.S. Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner was asked what his thoughts were on the proposals while he was speaking at a Council on Foreign Relations conference. A reporter asked, “[unintelligible]…about the Chinese proposal for a global currency…” Geithner answered, “I haven’t read the governor’s proposal…we’re actually quite open to that suggestion.”

The previous day Geithner was asked by United States Representative Michelle Bachman, “I’m wondering, would you categorically renounce the United States moving away from the dollar and going to a global currency as suggested this morning by China and also by Russia?,” to which Geithner replied, “I would. Yes.” She then asked Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke, who was sitting right next to him, and he answered, “I would also.”[lxviii]

So in a 24 hour period Geithner completely changed his mind, from being against a global currency, to supporting it, and while speaking at a Council on Foreign Relations press conference none the less.

Russia Calls for Global Currency

The Kremlin (Russia’s Parliament) published its priorities just prior to the G-20 meeting in March 2009, where they openly called for the creation of a supranational reserve currency that they said should be part of the strategy to reform the global financial system which began collapsing in the fourth quarter of 2008. (The G-20 meeting is a yearly forum consisting of the finance ministers and central bank governors of the world’s largest 20 economies who meet to discuss international financial issues.)

Russia urged the International Monetary Fund to create a new “super reserve currency accepted by the whole of the international community.”[lxix]

Russian President Shows Off Sample Coin of New ‘World Currency’ at G-8

Just a few months later at the 2009 G-8 meeting held in L’Aquila, Italy, the President of Russia, Dmitry Medvedev pulled a coin out of his pocket and displayed it for the press saying it was a sample of the coin of a “united future world currency.”

The sample coin was minted in Belgium and was presented to the heads of the G-8 delegations. It bears the words, “unity in diversity.” He said the coin, “means they’re getting ready. I think it’s a good sign that we understand how interdependent we are.”[lxx]

Remember that just a few months earlier during the April 2009 G-20 meeting, Russia proposed creating a new supranational currency and questioned the U.S. dollar’s future as the global reserve currency.

Euro Contributor Endorses Global Currency

Kazakstan was part of the Soviet Union until it became an independent nation in 1991, and is the ninth largest country in the world. It borders Russia, China, Uzbekistan and Turkmenistan. While not thought of as a key player in global events, it is still noteworthy that the President, Nursultan Nazarbayev, also proposed a new global currency which he called the “acmetal.”

What is also interesting, is that Robert Mundell, a man who played a key role in creating the Euro currency for the European Union voiced support for Nazarbayev’s idea saying, “I must say that I agree with President Nazarbayev on his statement and many of the things he said in his plan, the project he made for the world currency, and I believe I’m right on track with what he’s saying,” adding the idea held “great promise.”[lxxi]

Robert Mundell is an economics professor at Columbia University in New York City and was given the Nobel Prize in economics in 1999 for his role in creating the Euro currency for the European Union which unified currencies in many European countries—including Germany, Greece, Ireland, Italy, Spain, Finland, Austria, and others.

Population Reduction

At the time that this first edition of The New World Order: Facts & Fiction was first published in 2010, the earth’s population was around 6.795 billion people.[lxxii] One of the main goals of the New World Order is to massively reduce this number by billions of people. You read that correctly. A reduction of billions of people. Depending on the elitist, the goals of population reduction efforts range from reducing population by 50% to 95%. The elite politicians and businessmen say that the current population levels are dangerously high and will soon result in the depletion of the earth’s natural resources. To accomplish this reduction, various strategies have been implemented such as promoting contraception, abortions, and one child policies. Mass genocide has also been discussed, including using biological weapons to kill off large numbers of people in developing countries. Many fear that such a tactic will one day be attempted in developed countries as well.

The rationale behind such massive and horrific population reduction plans is quite chilling. The elite feel that since most tasks involving a large amount of physical labor have been accomplished, such as clearing countless acres of land for interstate highway systems, building infrastructure, such as dams and power plants, mining national resources, etc., and so now only a maintenance force is needed. Just think for a moment about the immense number of man hours it took to build the roads, bridges, and buildings that you take for granted every day. While at one point in time, people had to mine for minerals with simple hand tools, we now have enormous pieces of machinery that can do a job that used to take hundreds of men to do. The human species has been able to streamline nearly every process through the use of mechanical and technological means.

During the incredible construction process of much of the world’s infrastructure, the workers needed food, clothes, shelter, medicine, and a variety of other things which are part of modern life. But now that most of the work is done, the elite see these people as using up valuable resources and simply being in the way and detrimental to the way of life that the elite hope to maintain. While people may find these claims hard to believe, as you keep reading you will find solid evidence and sources for them. The Illuminati want you dead.

Ted Turner

Billionaire founder of CNN, Ted Turner, was interviewed Tuesday April 1st 2008 on Charlie Rose’s PBS show, where he revealed his beliefs about reducing the global population, but this was no April Fool’s joke. Turner began by parroting the sensationalized fears of climate change, saying it needed to be stopped.

“Not doing it will be catastrophic. We’ll be 8 degrees hotter in 10, not 10 but 30 or 40 years and basically none of the crops will grow. Most of the people will have died and the rest of us will be cannibals. Civilization will have broken down. The few people that are left will be living in a failed state like Somalia or Sudan. And living conditions will be intolerable. The droughts will be so bad there will be no more corn growing. Not doing it will be like suicide.”

Then he went on to say, “After that, we’ve got to stabilize the population. There’s too many people. That’s why we have global warming. We have global warming because too many people are using too much stuff, if there were less people, they’d be using less stuff.” Ted Turner himself has five children.

In 1996, Turner stated in an interview with an environmental magazine Audubon that, “A total population of 250-300 million people, a 95% decline from present levels, would be ideal.” In 1997 he donated one billion dollars to the United Nations to support their goals, which include population reduction.

Dr. Eric Pianka

Dr. Eric Pianka (born January 23, 1939) is a biology professor at the University of Texas at Austin, who made national news in March of 2006 after his acceptance speech for the Distinguished Texas Scientist Award given by the Texas Academy of Science.

A science writer named Forrest Mims was in attendance during this speech and was shocked at what he had heard, and soon after wrote an article about it for The Citizen Scientist, claiming that Pianka had advocated genocide to reduce the world’s population. In this article Mims recounts that an official of the Academy approached the video camera operator at the front of the auditorium and, “engaged him in animated conversation. The camera operator did not look pleased as he pointed the lens of the big camera to the ceiling and slowly walked away.”

So, by Forrest Mims account, Pianka’s speech was not allowed to be videotaped, and he writes that he noticed this curious incident because of his many years of experience as a writer and editor, and that it raised a red flag in his mind. Dr. Pianka began his speech by “explaining that the general public is not yet ready to hear what he was about to tell us,” Mims wrote.

After Dr. Pianka told the audience that there were too many people on the earth and listing all the evils of humanity, Mims wrote that Pianka stated, “the only feasible solution to saving the Earth is to reduce the population to 10 percent of the present number…He then showed solutions for reducing the world’s population in the form of a slide depicting the Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse. War and famine would not do, he explained. Instead, disease offered the most efficient and fastest way to kill the billions that must soon die if the population crisis is to be solved.”

He then explains that Pianka displayed a slide showing rows of human skulls and says he was deeply disturbed, not only by Pianka’s speech, but because he “watched in amazement as a few hundred members of the Texas Academy of Science rose to their feet and gave a standing ovation to a speech that enthusiastically advocated the elimination of 90 percent of Earth’s population by airborne Ebola.”[lxxiii]

After learning of the sinister nature of Pianka’s speech, an affiliate of Mims named William Dembski informed the Department of Homeland Security which resulted in the FBI interviewing Pianka.[lxxiv]

While Pianka’s speech was not allowed to be videotaped, one can read his own words on his official University of Texas website where he wrote, “Humans have overpopulated the Earth and in the process have created an ideal nutritional substrate on which bacteria and viruses (microbes) will grow and prosper. We are behaving like bacteria growing on an agar plate, flourishing until natural limits are reached or until another microbe colonizes and takes over, using them as their resource.”[lxxv]

“First, and foremost, we must get out of denial and recognize that Earth simply cannot support many billions of people, at least not in the lifestyles we would all like to live.”

“I am convinced that the world, including all humanity, WOULD clearly be much better off without so many of us.” [The bold face and capital print is in the original text on his website, and was not added in this book.]

One of the links on his website is to an obituary that he posted of himself, although at the time of this writing he is still alive. One more disturbing detail regarding Dr. Pianka is that on this website he shows pictures of a bison he raised on his land whose name is identified as Lucifer.[lxxvi]

World-Famous Microbiologist Planned Genocide

In 2001 shocking information was released showing that decades in the past a world-famous microbiologist and winner of the Nobel prize named Sir Fram Macfarlane had secretly urged the Australian government to develop and use biological weapons against Indonesia and other “overpopulated” countries in South-East Asia to target food crops and spread infectious diseases in order to kill large numbers of the population.

Such plans, which were developed in 1947, were revealed to the public in 2001 after the top-secret files were declassified by the National Archives of Australia. The release of the reports were faced with resistance from the Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade, which fought to prevent them from becoming public after historian Philip Dorling uncovered information on biological warfare in the National Archives in 1998.

It wasn’t until 2001 that the damning files were released to Dorling, which included a detailed memo Sir Macfarlane wrote for the Defense Department in 1947, where he said that Australia should develop biological weapons that would work in tropical Asia without spreading to Australia’s more temperate population centers.

“Specifically to the Australian situation, the most effective counter-offensive to threatened invasion by overpopulated Asiatic countries would be directed towards the destruction by biological or chemical means of tropical food crops and the dissemination of infectious disease capable of spreading in tropical but not under Australian conditions,” the microbiologist said.[lxxvii]

It’s important to note that his plans to unleash such weapons were not because Australia was at war, but because he wanted to reduce the large populations that were using the national resources. His reference to an “invasion by overpopulated countries” doesn’t refer to a military invasion but refers rather to the overpopulation itself.

Another unclassified document reads that he noted, “Its use has the tremendous advantage of not destroying the enemy’s industrial potential which can then be taken over intact.”

Sir Macfarlane was the head of the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute of Medical Research, and won the Nobel prize in 1960 for medicine. In September, 1947, he joined a chemical and biological warfare subcommittee of the New Weapons and Equipment Development Committee in Australia, where he would develop his genocidal ideas where he recommended, “the possibilities of an attack on the food supplies of S-E Asia and Indonesia using B.W. agents should be considered by a small study group.”

In 1951, he recommended that “a panel reporting to the chemical and biological warfare subcommittee should be authorized to report on the offensive potentiality of biological agents likely to be effective against the local food supplies of South-East Asia and Indonesia.”

Prince Philip

Prince Philip, Duke of Edinburg, is the husband of the Queen of England, and at the time of this writing in 2010, he is 57 years old (born in 1921). The British royal family has long been involved with the Illuminati, and some say they themselves believe that they are descended from the lost tribe of Dan from Israel.

The Prince made a disturbing statement years ago regarding the world’s population, where he said, “In the event that I am reincarnated, I would like to return as a deadly virus, in order to contribute something to solve overpopulation.”[lxxviii]

Prince Philip is the father of Prince Charles, and the grandfather of Prince William and Prince Henry of Whales. Some people believe that the Antichrist will come from this family and that they are crypto-Jews, meaning they are hiding their Jewish ancestry. Regardless of whether this is true or not, the British Royal Family has been a major part of the secret establishment for many generations.

President Obama’s Science Advisor

President Obama appointed a man named John Holdren to be his chief science czar, which means he is basically the top advisor to Obama regarding science and technology and their effects domestically and internationally. Immediately after his appointment bloggers began looking into his past and discovered that he was the co-author of a science text book in 1977 titled Ecoscience: Population, Resources, Environment, which contains several startling proposals to deal with what the authors perceived to be issues society would soon face regarding overpopulation and resource shortages.

Adding Sterilants to Water Supply

Holdren’s book openly discusses the idea of adding chemicals to the water supply to sterilize entire populations, saying, “Adding a sterilant to drinking water or staple foods is a suggestion that seems to horrify people more than most proposals for involuntary fertility control. Indeed, this would pose some very difficult political, legal, and social questions, to say nothing of the technical problems. No such sterilant exists today [in 1977], nor does one appear to be under development. To be acceptable, such a substance would have to meet some rather stiff requirements: it must be uniformly effective, despite widely varying doses received by individuals, and despite varying degrees of fertility and sensitivity among individuals; it must be free of dangerous or unpleasant side effects; and it must have no effect on members of the opposite sex, children, old people, pets, or livestock.”[lxxix]

Involuntary Fertility Control

Another disturbing idea the book outlines is forcing women to become sterilized after having two or three children. “A program of sterilizing women after their second or third child, despite the relatively greater difficulty of the operation than vasectomy, might be easier to implement than trying to sterilize men,” the text reads.[lxxx]

Aside from forcing women to become sterilized after having several children, the authors also postulated that young girls could be forced on birth control to prevent them from having children, and that the birth control method would only be removed if the government allowed it. “The development of a long-term sterilizing capsule that could be implanted under the skin and removed when pregnancy is desired opens additional possibilities for coercive fertility control. The capsule could be implanted at puberty and might be removable, with official permission, for a limited number of births.”[lxxxi]

Mandatory Abortions

As if adding a sterilant to the water supply or forcing young girls to submit to birth control until the government approves of them having a child weren’t horrific enough ideas, the textbook goes on to discuss and endorse forcing women to have abortions if they get pregnant without government permission. The book uses the term “compulsory” which is a fancy word meaning mandatory or forced against one’s will. The book reads, “Indeed, it has been concluded that compulsory population-control laws, even including laws requiring compulsory abortion, could be sustained under the existing Constitution if the population crisis became sufficiently severe to endanger the society.”[lxxxii]

Notice how these population ideas are not something only for 3rd world countries, but also for America as the authors point out that forced abortions, they believe, would be legal under the Constitution!

Two Child Limit

John Holdren and his co-authors try to equate their tyrannical reproduction policies with other laws concerning public safety. “In today’s world, however, the number of children in a family is a matter of profound public concern. The law regulates other highly personal matters. For example, no one may lawfully have more than one spouse at a time. Why should the law not be able to prevent a person from having more than two children?”[lxxxiii]

Toward a Planetary Regime

After reading the Nazi-style reproduction regulations in Holdren’s book and seeing that decades after its publication he would find himself in President Obama’s inner circle, it should come as no surprise that he would also suggest an all-powerful global government structure to enforce his nightmarish ideas, and to regulate other aspects of our lives.

He wrote that current government agencies around the world, “might eventually be developed into a Planetary Regime—sort of an international super-agency for population, resources, and environment. Such a comprehensive Planetary Regime could control the development, administration, conservation, and distribution of all natural resources, renewable or nonrenewable, at least insofar as international implications exist. Thus the Regime could have the power to control pollution not only in the atmosphere and oceans, but also in such freshwater bodies as rivers and lakes that cross international boundaries or that discharge into the oceans. The Regime might also be a logical central agency for regulating all international trade, perhaps including assistance from DCs to LDCs, and including all food on the international market.”

“The Planetary Regime might be given responsibility for determining the optimum population for the world and for each region and for arbitrating various countries’ shares within their regional limits. Control of population size might remain the responsibility of each government, but the Regime would have some power to enforce the agreed limits.”[lxxxiv]

Abortions are Good for the Economy

Speaker of the House, Nancy Pelosi was interviewed on NBC’s Meet the Press where she explained why she appropriated hundreds of millions of dollars to expand Planned Parenthood and similar services as part of an economic stimulus package. A brief transcript of this encounter follows:

STEPHANOPOULOS: Hundreds of millions of dollars to expand family planning services. How is that stimulus?

PELOSI: Well, the family planning services reduce cost. They reduce cost. The states are in terrible fiscal budget crises now and part of what we do for children’s health, education and some of those elements are to help the states meet their financial needs. One of those—one of the initiatives you mentioned, the contraception, will reduce costs to the states and to the federal government.

STEPHANOPOULOS: So no apologies for that?

PELOSI: No apologies. No. We have to deal with the consequences of the downturn in our economy.

End of Transcript

The Limits to Growth

The Club of Rome, a notorious elite globalist think tank, published a book in 1972 titled The Limits to Growth which would mark the first major propaganda piece warning of a rapidly growing population and finite natural resources. The book was written by Dennis L. Meadows, Donella H. Meadows, Jorgen Randers, and William W. Behrens III.

World population, industrialization, pollution, food production, and resource depletion were the main focus of the report which argued that while population grows exponentially, technology and the availability of natural resources only grow linearly. This would be the beginning of the growing campaign and propaganda aimed at justifying a massive population reduction around the world.

Global 2000 Report

The Council on Environmental Quality and the State Department released a report in 1980 that was commissioned by President Jimmy Carter which continued to lay the foundation for propaganda concerning population reduction, diminishing resources, and global warming. The Global 2000 Report supposedly used computer models to make projections concerning these issues for the coming decades, and aimed to show what life would be like in the year 2000 (twenty years after its publication). “Computer projection models” were seen as extremely high-tech in 1980 when this report was published—an aspect to this report that was highlighted in an attempt to add to its credibility.

It concluded by saying, “If present trends continue, the world in 2000 will be more crowded, and more vulnerable to disruption than the world we live in now. Serious stresses involving population, resources, and environment are clearly visible ahead. Despite greater material output, the world’s people will be poorer in many ways than they are today.”

Agenda 21

Agenda 21 is a program launched by the United Nations (UN) pertaining to what they call “sustainable development” around the world, which is a fancy term for reducing the population and preserving natural resources. The name Agenda 21 refers to the UN’s agenda for the 21st century. The full text of Agenda 21 was revealed at the United Nations Earth Summit in 1992 (officially called the Conference on Environment and Development) that was held in Rio de Janeiro.

At this Earth Summit, 178 governments voted to adopt the Agenda 21 program, which is a blueprint for members of the UN and other governments and groups to take action to increase regulations in every area where humans have an impact on the environment.

There are 40 chapters in the Agenda 21 report which cover topics such as: changing consumption patterns of natural resources, controlling pollution, educating children about such issues, and implementing new financial mechanisms to achieve these goals.

United Nations Population Fund

The United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA), originally called the United Nations Fund for Population Activities, was started in 1969 to supposedly provide supplies and services involving reproductive health, but a dark cloud has lingered over the fund for decades because of coerced sterilizations and forced abortions. When word of these practices surfaced, groups pressured the Regan administration as well as both Bush administrations (George H.W. and George W.) to withhold funding from UNFPA.

As a result of the United States cutting off funding for the program, a nonprofit organization called Americans for UNFPA was started and compensated for the loss by raising donations. After Barack Obama was sworn in as president in January 2009, he restored U.S. funding to UNFPA which resulted in taxpayers’ money once again funding forced abortions and sterilizations in foreign countries.

According to its Annual Report, the UNFPA received a total of $845.3 million dollars in funding in 2008, with $118 million coming from the Netherlands, $53 million from the United Kingdom, 52 million from Spain, and the European Commission and Japan each donated 36 million.

In 2009 UNFPA released a report titled State of World Population which is 104 pages long and blames global warming on too many people living on the earth. “Slower population growth...would help build social resilience to climate change’s impacts and would contribute to a reduction of greenhouse-gas emissions in the future,” it says. “Population growth is among the factors influencing total emissions in industrialized as well as developing countries.”

“Each person in a population will consume food and require housing, and ideally most will take advantage of transportation, which consumes energy, and may use fuel to heat homes and have access to electricity.”

“The growth of population can contribute to freshwater scarcity or degradation of cropland, which may in turn exacerbate the impacts of climate change…So too can climate change make it more difficult for governments to alleviate poverty and achieve the Millennium Development Goals.”

“Fear of appearing supportive of population control has until recently held back any mention of ‘population’ in the climate debate…Nonetheless, some participants in the debate are tentatively suggesting the need at least to consider the impacts of population growth.”

The Georgia Guidestones

The topic of the Georgia Guidestones monument is fascinating, yet disturbing, and a complete analysis of the subject can be found in this author’s previous book, The Resistance Manifesto, so for the sake of keeping this book to a manageable length, I will only briefly discuss them and their mysterious origins here.

Basically, a large 19 foot tall granite monument stands in the small town of Elberton, Georgia, in the United States, consisting of four major stone slabs standing upright and assembled in a paddle wheel formation. Each of the eight stone faces are inscribed with ten commandments, with each set consisting of a different language: English, Russian, Hebrew, Arabic, Hindi, Chinese, Spanish, and Swahili. While some of the “guides” as they are called, are somewhat benign, there are several of them which are quite chilling. The first one reads, “Maintain the earth’s population at 500,0000,000” (500 million). Others speak of creating a world court and allude to a global religion, and finally the tenth one reads, “Be not a cancer on the earth. Leave room for nature.”

As if this isn’t strange enough, the story of the Georgia Guidestones gets stranger the closer one looks into it. The monument was created in 1980 and was the result of a mysterious man calling himself “R.C. Christian” who said he represented a group of concerned citizens and wanted to erect a monument for mankind. He worked with a local granite company to design the stones, and he paid for the entire project, an estimated cost of tens of thousands of dollars. The stones currently sit on public property on the highest point in Elberton County.

To anyone familiar with the Rosicrucians, the pseudonym that this man chose, “R.C. Christian,” is clearly a reference to this enlightenment group which dates back to the early 1600s. Several years after the monument’s completion this same man published a book titled Common Sense Renewed, under the admitted pseudonym Robert Christian, and proclaimed, “The hearts of our human family must be touched and warmed to welcome a global rule by reason.”[lxxxv]

The book basically outlines his political philosophy and says that the first two printings were sent to several thousand political officials and shapers of public opinion throughout the world, and all members of the United States Congress.

The Georgia Guidestones were not a simple task to complete and certainly cost several tens of thousands of dollars to construct, and after reading their depopulation commandments, it comes as no surprise that the mysterious individual who commissioned them used a pseudonym with Illuminati overtones.

In December of 2008 some vandals spray painted several messages across the stones, such as, “Death to the Globalists,” “No North American Union,” and “Skull and Bones Suck Dick,” referring to the Skull and Bones secret society at Yale University, which serves as a recruiting ground for the elite Illuminati. Photos of the vandalism were posted on the Internet.

This author was later contacted by a freelance journalist named Randall Sullivan who was working on a story about the monument, and when his article was published in April 2009, he wrote, “While Dice denies any involvement in the assault, he seems to have inspired it,”[lxxxvi] because I had publicly expressed my disgust for the stones and my desire to have them removed.

Life Extension Technology

Aside from wanting to reduce the world’s population by 90 to 95%, the elite New World Order kingpins are also hoping that very soon scientists will be able to prevent them from aging and possibly live forever by using some form of molecular repair, organ replacements, or transhumanist development (merging computers and machines with the human body). While anti-aging creams and remedies have been around for decades and often associated with quackery, scientists are working very hard to figure out how they can prevent the oxidization of cells, or to get cells to reproduce themselves indefinitely, thus ensuring a healthy body as long as this process continues.

Ray Kurzweil and others have proposed that nanorobots could one day be injected in the body and perform cellular repair from within. These ideas are not fanciful thinking of science fiction writers, but are instead very serious branches of science that are making tremendous advances in their quest.

Even if the elite are not able to live indefinitely by using some of this coming technology, they will certainly be able to extend the human lifespan several decades or perhaps longer. Such an extension obviously means that people will use more natural resources during the course of their prolonged life, and this is another reason the elite are concerned with the global population and desire to dramatically reduce it.

As miraculous life extending technologies become possible, the enormous cost for such procedures will be unaffordable by most people and will not be covered by insurance. This puts the technology exclusively in the hands of the wealthy, who are the same people shaping the New World Order. As this technology becomes closer to a reality, the elite will be even more compelled to unleash their genocidal plans.

One World Religion

When discussing the goals of the New World Order, often three objectives are found at the top of the list: A one world government, a single global currency, and a unified world religion. The reason for this unified single religion is said to be a prerequisite to the Messiah arriving, who religious prophecies predict will be the savior of all mankind and will unveil the mysteries of existence and lead the world into an era of everlasting peace.

Many religions speak of this Messiah figure, and while Christians believe that he arrived as Jesus Christ and will later return at the end of time, other religions are still looking for the Messiah’s arrival. In order to set the groundwork for this individual (who Christians believe will be a counterfeit claiming to be God and later defeated by the return of Jesus) the New World Order must set the philosophical foundation for this “Christ” to be seen as the appearance of God on earth, and be worshiped as such.

The main problem for this philosophy and the coming counterfeit to be universally accepted as the Messiah, is the traditional belief in Christianity and the Bible’s description of the Antichrist, as well as Christians desire to live by a set of traditional values that are taught in the Bible. These are the reasons that traditional Christianity and family values are the largest obstacle to the New World Order’s coming unified religion, and thus traditional Christianity has been targeted for a revision or total destruction.

Manly P. Hall explains, “Christianity is not the sole revelation of God to man. It is but a fractional part of the body religious. It is simply a crutch upon which the genus homo leans until he learns to stand and walk alone. It is something he believes in before he is capable of believing in himself with understanding. Like all external things it will finally pass away and be remembered only for that which it contributed to the inner realization of its devotees.”[lxxxvii]

Christians who do not convert to a more liberal and universal form of Christianity will be seen as problematic for the New World Order since their conservative and traditional beliefs will be seen as holding back the global utopia and ruining the fun and “anything goes” attitude of the majority of society.

“Hate Speech” Laws

It’s well known that some Christians can make judgments of other people for their sexuality, stance on abortion, and ideas of what is socially acceptable behavior. Some Christians speak out against such things using harsh criticism, while others simply express their disagreement. Most Christians tend to be socially conservative and lean towards more traditional views of family dynamics and sexual activity. People who are not religious can be very liberal in these areas, and the two different ideologies occasionally clash in disputes over what is being taught to children, or what is being distributed in the popular culture.

In the United States of America, people are luckily able to exercise the freedom of speech which is outlined and guaranteed by the First Amendment to the Constitution. This freedom is only supposed to be restricted in the case of defamation and incitement to riot, but many fear that living in the New World Order will create criminals of Christians for simply voicing their opinions on certain social issues or behaviors, or even quoting the Bible.

In recent years various legislation has been introduced regarding what is called hate speech, which aims to criminalize certain statements or opinions when expressed publicly. In 2001, a man was arrested in Canada for “inciting hatred” after submitting a newspaper ad containing Bible quotes about homosexuality.[lxxxviii] He was forced to pay out $1500 to each of four different homosexuals who filed a complaint against him. Canadian officials signed a bill into law in 2004 that reinforced such rules.

In Britain a woman was visited at her home by two police officers after she wrote a letter to her city council expressing her displeasure that a gay pride parade was scheduled for her neighborhood. In the letter, she referred to homosexuals as sodomites and perverts and the police threatened to charge her with a criminal offense because “a hate incident is any incident that is perceived by the victim or another person as being motivated by prejudice or hatred.”[lxxxix]

In 2004 a group of eleven Christians were arrested and charged with multiple crimes, including felonies in Pennsylvania for peacefully demonstrating against a gay pride parade.[xc] The demonstrators were said to have committed “hate speech” for preaching to the homosexuals and holding signs with Bible verses printed on them.

501(c)(3) Tax Exempt Churches

It’s pretty much common knowledge that most churches don’t have to pay taxes since they are considered “not for profit” organizations, but most people have no idea what kind of restrictions this license places on these churches. A 501c organization is a provision in the United States Tax code which lists 26 different types of organizations that are exempt from federal income tax. Churches fall under section 3 of the 501c code, meaning they are a religious organization.

Organizations that fall under section 501(c)(3) are prohibited from certain political activities and even comments. The Internal Revenue Service website explains, “Under the Internal Revenue Code, all section 501(c)(3) organizations are absolutely prohibited from directly or indirectly participating in, or intervening in, any political campaign on behalf of (or in opposition to) any candidate for elective public office. Contributions to political campaign funds or public statements of position (verbal or written) made on behalf of the organization in favor of or in opposition to any candidate for public office clearly violate the prohibition against political campaign activity. Violating this prohibition may result in denial or revocation of tax-exempt status and the imposition of certain excise taxes.”[xci]

The tax code goes on to say, “voter education or registration activities with evidence of bias that (a) would favor one candidate over another; (b) oppose a candidate in some manner; or (c) have the effect of favoring a candidate or group of candidates, will constitute prohibited participation or intervention.”[xcii]

Language saying activities may not “have the effect of favoring a candidate or group of candidates,” or that they are “absolutely prohibited from directly or indirectly participating in, or intervening in, any political campaign on behalf of (or in opposition to) any candidate for elective public office,” mean that if a pastor gives a sermon about certain social issues such as homosexuality, gay marriage, or abortion, the church will be in violation of the law and could have their tax exempt status revoked because the pastor is “indirectly participating in” a political activity.

In 2005, the 3500 member All Saints Episcopal Church in Los Angeles, California was threatened by the IRS that they could lose their tax exempt status after the Reverend gave an anti-war message.[xciii] The church’s tax attorney Marcus Owens said the IRS offered to drop the proceedings if the church admitted wrongdoing.

A United Methodist Church in New Jersey lost its tax exempt status in 2007 after officials refused to allow two lesbian couples to have their “weddings” on church property.[xciv] After it was discovered that members of the Mormon Church organized to support Proposition 8 passing in California in 2008, which banned gay marriage, many homosexual groups attempted to have their tax exempt status revoked as well.

Most church goers have no idea that there are federal restrictions placed on what the pastor or priests can say to their congregation. Not only has the federal government locked churches into a contract preventing them from even indirectly influencing political affairs, but they also have been secretly working with major churches to get their leaders to teach their flocks what the government wants them to.

Government Secretly Working With Churches

In May of 2006 a pastor came forward saying that FEMA (the Federal Emergency Management Agency) had implemented a secret program to train pastors of large churches and have them work secretly with FEMA in order to encourage their congregations to obey the government’s demands in the case of martial law, firearm seizures, forced vaccinations, or forced relocations.

The pastor, who contacted Infowars.com[xcv] to make such events public, wanted to remain anonymous but said that he and other religious representatives were invited to a secret meeting which encouraged and trained pastors to help implement FEMA and Homeland Security directives. The first directive was for pastors to preach to their congregations a message based on Romans 13 in the Bible, which when taken out of context urges people to obey their government and says the government was established by God.

The informant also reported that it was made clear they were to start preaching subservience to authorities now, in order to condition their congregations to accept such ideas. He also reported that those in attendance were told that quarantines, martial law, and forced relocations were a problem for authorities when enforcing federal mandates because of what they called a “cowboy mentality” of people standing up for their rights and not going along with such demands.

Some people may be skeptical of such claims, especially since the pastor chose to remain anonymous, but one year later in August of 2007, a TV station in Shreveport, Louisiana reported on this, confirming what this pastor had claimed.

KSLA news reported that FEMA was secretly working with what they called Clergy Response Teams that were being trained by the federal government to “quell dissent” and pacify people in order to obey any orders given by the government in the event of martial law.

Adam Weishaupt on Christianity

John Robison, one of the first authors to publish English translations of the writings of Illuminati founder Adam Weishaupt, wrote, “It surely needs little argument now to prove, that the Order of Illuminati had for its immediate object the abolishing of Christianity (at least this was the intention of the Founder), with the sole view of overturning the civil government, by introducing universal dissoluteness and profligacy of manners, and then getting the assistance of the corrupted subjects to overset the throne. The whole conduct in the preparation and instruction of the Presbyter and Regens is directed to this point.”

Robison quotes an original correspondence between Illuminati members from the 1700s where one member wrote, “I have been at unwearied pains to remove the fears of some who imagine that our Superiors want to abolish Christianity; but by and by their prejudices will wear off, and they will be more at their ease. Were I to let them know that our General holds all Religion to be a lie, and uses even Deism, only to lead men by the nose.”

Albert Pike’s Alleged 3 World Wars Letter

A letter allegedly written by Albert Pike and sent to an Italian politician named Giuseppe Mazzini, dated August 15, 1871 outlined sinister plans for three different world wars that would purposefully be orchestrated to bring about the New World Order and set the stage for Luciferianism to become the world’s religion. Albert Pike is of course the author of Morals and Dogma and remains one of Freemasonry’s most influential members.

In this letter, Pike allegedly wrote, “The First World War must be brought about in order to permit the Illuminati to overthrow the power of the Czars in Russia and of making that country a fortress of atheistic Communism. The divergences caused by the ‘agentur’ (agents) of the Illuminati between the British and Germanic Empires will be used to foment this war. At the end of the war, Communism will be built and used in order to destroy the other governments and in order to weaken the religions.”

“The Second World War must be fomented by taking advantage of the differences between the Fascists and the political Zionists. This war must be brought about so that Nazism is destroyed and that the political Zionism be strong enough to institute a sovereign state of Israel in Palestine. During the Second World War, International Communism must become strong enough in order to balance Christendom, which would be then restrained and held in check until the time when we would need it for the final social cataclysm.”

“The Third World War must be fomented by taking advantage of the differences caused by the ‘agentur’ of the "Illuminati" between the political Zionists and the leaders of Islamic World. The war must be conducted in such a way that Islam (the Moslem Arabic World) and political Zionism (the State of Israel) mutually destroy each other. Meanwhile the other nations, once more divided on this issue will be constrained to fight to the point of complete physical, moral, spiritual and economical exhaustion…We shall unleash the Nihilists and the atheists, and we shall provoke a formidable social cataclysm which in all its horror will show clearly to the nations the effect of absolute atheism, origin of savagery and of the most bloody turmoil. Then everywhere, the citizens, obliged to defend themselves against the world minority of revolutionaries, will exterminate those destroyers of civilization, and the multitude, disillusioned with Christianity, whose deistic spirits will from that moment be without compass or direction, anxious for an ideal, but without knowing where to render its adoration, will receive the true light through the universal manifestation of the pure doctrine of Lucifer, brought finally out in the public view. This manifestation will result from the general reactionary movement which will follow the destruction of Christianity and atheism, both conquered and exterminated at the same time.”

Alice Bailey’s Open Admissions

The respected New Age author Alice Bailey writes in her book The Externalization of the Hierarchy, “It has therefore become possible to synchronize the Approach of the divine to the human and to instruct the masses of men in the technique of thus invoking the Approach. This attitude of humanity will lead to a new revelation, to the new world religion and to new attitudes in the relation of man to God (religion) and of man to man (government or social relationships).”[xcvi]

“The Members of the Hierarchy are seen to be the Custodians of the divine Plan….The spiritual Hierarchy of the planet, the ability of mankind to contact its Members and to work in cooperation with Them, and the existence of the greater Hierarchy of spiritual energies of which our tiny planetary sphere is a part—these are the three truths upon which the coming world religion may be based.”[xcvii]

Bailey also discusses the role of Freemasonry in the creation of this one world religion. Since Freemasonry is a continuation of the ancient Mystery Schools, it should come as no surprise that the Universalist teachings of the fraternity are laying the philosophical foundation for the New World Order religion. She writes, “There is no dissociation between the One Universal Church, the sacred inner Lodge of all true Masons, and the innermost circles of the esoteric societies…It must not be forgotten that only those souls who are on the Probationary Path or the Path of Discipleship will form the nucleus of the coming new world religion.”[xcviii]

“The new religion will manifest, for instance, through organizations like Masonry. In Freemasonry is embedded the core or secret heart of the occult Mysteries—wrapped in number, metaphor and symbol.”[xcix]

Unification Church

Most people are shocked to find, or simply don’t believe, that the founder and owner of the Washington Times claims to be the Second Coming of Christ and is the leader of what is called the Unification Church. Sun Myung Moon is a Korean billionaire who has millions of people who follow him and see him as the return of Jesus. Moon’s Unification Church and his enormous following show just how easily people are duped into believing false religious doctrines and how wealthy and powerful these fake prophets can be.

Aside from being a billionaire and owning the Washington Times, Sun Myung Moon has maintained close relationships with powerful politicians around the world who have no problem with the fact that he thinks he’s the return of Christ.

The Vatican

Vatican City in Rome is an entire sovereign country which is basically a small city owned and run by the Catholic Church. It has enormous wealth and its own police force, along with the Pope’s personal army, the Swiss Guard. The Catholic Church has long been intertwined with the Illuminati, and its society of Jesus (the Jesuits) are the Vatican’s foot soldiers attempting to make the Catholic Church the world’s leading religious authority. In 2007, Pope Benedict XVI announced that the Catholic Church was the only way to salvation, and that all other denominations are not true churches.[c] He wasn’t talking about non-Christian religious organizations such as Islam or Buddhism, the Pope was talking about all Christian churches other than the Catholic Church.

The Catholic Church, the popes, and bishops are basically the same as the Pharisees that Jesus denounced over 2000 years ago for their hypocrisy and their pride and arrogance due to their spiritual knowledge. One needs to look no further than the Inquisition or the massive institutional cover-up of countless pedophile priests to see the core of the Catholic Church is corrupt. The Catholic Church also diverts and perverts the teachings of Jesus in numerous ways, such as having people confess their sins to a priest (who is called Father, which the Bible says nobody but God should be called that) as well as selling indulgences and worshipping the virgin Mary and other saints.

The selling of indulgences, if you don’t know, means that people used to pay money to a church and in return the priest would forgive that person’s sins and tell them they could then get into Heaven. Some indulgences were even sold for sins people would commit in the future. Such a practice was clearly a shameful abuse of power and completely contradictory to the teachings of Jesus.

The Catholic Church basically took the freeing messages of Jesus and packaged them up and then sold them to the public, when Jesus had intended it to be accessible to all for free. This is the same thing the Jewish Pharisees did with Judaism. It is for these reasons and more that the Vatican, and specifically the Pope is looked at with suspicion regarding the New World Order and is believed by some to one day be the false prophet spoken about in the Bible. The counterfeit Christ (the Antichrist) will be a political figure and the leader of the world, and the false prophet is believed to be a global religious leader who will (wrongfully) confirm to the world that the Christ has returned when the Antichrist announces he is God. Since the Catholic Church is trying to reinstate itself as the only Christian authority, many see the Pope as a prime candidate for this false prophet.

A strange revelation was made by the Vatican at the end of 2009 concerning space aliens when the Vatican’s chief astronomer said that there could be other “extraterrestrial brothers” of ours out in space who “remained in full friendship with their creator.”[ci] Reverend José Gabriel Funes, head of the Vatican Observatory and a scientific adviser to Pope Benedict XVI, said “Why can’t we speak of a ‘brother extraterrestrial?’” And suggested our “brothers” could be more evolved than humans.

While the subject of space aliens is filled with speculation, misidentification, and craziness, the idea of other intelligent life existing in other solar systems is a fascinating one, and certainly is likely. But what is interesting about the statements from Reverend Funes is that he said these beings could still be “in full friendship with their creator,” meaning they are in an unfallen state, unlike mankind. This means they would be without sin. It’s a very interesting statement that some see as setting the stage for an alien being to arrive on earth that will claim to be the return of Jesus, when in fact, it could be the Antichrist. This is, of course, only speculation, but the role of the corrupt Catholic Church in the New World Order’s coming new religion should be monitored very closely, and the Pope, whoever it is, and the leadership of the Vatican should be seen for the imposters and criminals they are.

Israel

The State of Israel in the Middle East remains the focus of world events due to the continuous fighting between Arabs and Jews as they argue and kill each other over who has the right to the land, the Palestinians or the Jews. The State of Israel was created in 1948 following World War II so the Jews could return to the land their ancient ancestors once inhabited. This plan was organized by Britain as a sort of reparation for the persecution of the Jews during the war and the Holocaust. The current population of Israel is around 7.5 million with 5.62 million being Jewish.

The creation and existence of the Jewish country remains controversial for several reasons. First of which is that the Jews are seen by many as having stolen the land they are now occupying, having run off the Arabs who were inhabiting the area prior to the creation of Israel. Most Jews believe that God had promised them that land and have a Jewish supremacist view that they are entitled to the land because they believe God said they were. Controversy also surrounds the fact that Israel was created as a country for a specific race of people—the Jews. It is difficult to criticize Israel because the Jews and their blind supporters quickly label any criticism as anti-Semitic—no matter how valid it is.

Israel also remains a focal point for Christians and those who study Bible prophecy and the New World Order. Mainline Christians believe that Israel will be the capitol of the New World Order and will be the geographic location where the Antichrist will rule from, and where Jesus Christ will return to at the end of time. Many Jews have a similar view of the role of Israel in the New World Order, but they believe that Jesus was not the Messiah, and are still waiting for this individual to arrive and lead the Jews and the rest of the world into a utopia of peace and prosperity. The Illuminati and New Age secret societies and cults also look forward to this world leader, who they say will arrive and be identified as the long awaited Christ and Messiah.

A Global Dictator Claiming to be God

It is basically common knowledge that Christians believe that at some point in time, a global leader will rise to power and will wreak havoc on the earth as a dictator known as the Antichrist. Other religions such as Islam, have similar prophecies which foresee such a scenario as well. In Christian theology this dictator will rise to power at a point in time when the planet is engulfed in chaos and war, and he will promise world peace if given the power to lead the world. According to the prophecies, this individual will not only be a tyrannical dictator once in power, but he will also claim to be God incarnate and demand to be worshiped as such.

This isn’t exactly a novel idea. If one looks at the history of past civilizations, similar events have occurred over and over again. The pharaohs of Egypt claimed to be gods and demanded their people treat them as such. Nero, the emperor of Rome, expected such treatment as well. A more modern example is that of Adolf Hitler, who saw himself as the savior of Germany and the white race, and who was essentially worshiped as the messiah. A “God complex” seems to fall upon the most power-hungry men throughout history as their thirst for power and recognition leads them to the conclusion that they themselves are a god, and can do whatever they like with their power, no matter how unjust.

There are a few fascinating points that I would like to address regarding this Antichrist scenario, and how it ties directly into the secret societies that are shaping the New World Order. As you should have gathered by now from my writings, a main theme within the secret societies is that the teachings elevate the initiate to a level of enlightenment where they themselves become a god, or god of their own perceived universe.

Manly P. Hall explains in his classic book, The Secret Teachings of All Ages that, “The Mysteries were therefore established for the purpose of unfolding the nature of man according to certain fixed rules which, when faithfully followed, elevated the human consciousness to a point where it was capable of cognizing its own constitution and the true purpose of existence. This knowledge of how man’s manifold constitution could be most quickly and most completely regenerated to the point of spiritual illumination constituted the secret, or esoteric, doctrine of antiquity.”[cii]

Such enlightenment philosophies are not that dangerous by themselves, although considered heretical by Christianity and other religions, but instead it is the potential that one can develop this God complex and then place himself above all others and think that the rules of basic human conduct don’t apply to them.

While people defend occult organizations such as the Freemasons and other fraternities that teach the ancient Mysteries because they see the teachings as a way to build moral character and make sense of the world and their place in it through the spiritual and symbolic teachings found within such schools, it is undeniable that within such organizations there exists a corrupt core, who many say have hijacked and perverted the ancient Mysteries. The Illuminati is the key culprit who admittedly infiltrated Freemasonry in 1782 and created an inner circle to function covertly under the cover of the fraternity. Others say that the corruption had occurred centuries earlier.

We do find clear evidence of the corrupt core today, and they continue to give a bad name to secret societies and are the source of countless conspiracy theories surrounding them. It is an interesting debate to discuss whether or not the Mysteries themselves are inherently evil, or whether they have been hijacked and abused by organized criminal networks that pervert them for their own gain.

Now, let’s analyze the striking parallels between Christian Bible prophecy and the published plans and hopes of the elite secret societies. The Book of Revelation, the final book in the Bible, describes a man who is said to be the Antichrist, or a worker of Satan, who claims to be God and the savior of the world, but in reality is a ruthless dictator.

The teachings of the Mystery Schools are believed to enlighten a man so he may become god-like and as we know men are inclined to get a God complex and become over taken by megalomania and selfishness. What is also interesting is that the Bible describes the counterfeit Christ as a world leader who will claim to be God and demand to be worshiped as such, and will do so in the new Solomon’s temple in Jerusalem. This temple, as of early 2010 when this book was first published, has not been rebuilt. The original location of the historical Solomon’s temple is currently occupied by a Muslim mosque called the Dome of the Rock. Solomon’s temple was destroyed twice in the past, once in 586 BC by the Babylonians, and again in 70 AD by the Romans. Jews have long hoped and planned for the third temple to be rebuilt on the original location, but since the Dome of the Rock stands there, they have a problem. This mosque will surely be destroyed during a conflict sometime in the future and the land will be taken over by Jews, who will then rebuild their long awaited temple.

It’s pivotal to note that Freemasonry is a modern Mystery School teaching the same philosophies that had been carried on in secret fraternal orders for thousands of years. Freemasons also consider their lodge where they meet, a temple, but not just any temple. It represents the Temple of Solomon. The head Mason of a lodge is called the Worshipful Master—an interesting choice for a leader. He is so enlightened, Masons believe, that he is a master of the universe and has achieved godhood, so he is “worshipful.”

It is not hard to see then that the leader of the New World Order, or the “president of the world” will be a 33rd degree Freemason and believed by himself and his inner circle of associates to have achieved godhood, and will be a “worshipful master” and will take up the rebuilt Temple of Solomon as his own personal temple or office.

In 2 Thessalonians 2:4-8, the Bible explains that the Antichrist will sit in the Temple of Jerusalem where he will exalt himself above God, claiming that he is God, saying, “Who opposeth and exalteth himself above all that is called God, or that is worshipped; so that he as God sitteth in the temple of God, shewing himself that he is God.”

Matthew 24: 15-16 quotes Jesus speaking to His disciple, saying, “When ye therefore shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet, stand in the holy place [meaning the temple], (whoso readeth, let him understand), then let them which be in Judea flee into the mountains.”

New Age guru Benjamin Crème writes about the appearance of what he calls the Maitreya or the Christ, saying, “This will lead to the Day of Declaration, when He will appear on the radio and television networks of the world linked by satellite. On that day Maitreya will mentally overshadow the whole of humanity simultaneously. All will hear His words inwardly in their own language. This telepathic communication will reach everyone, not only those watching or listening, and hundreds of thousands of miraculous healings will take place throughout the world. On that day, there will be no doubt that Maitreya is the Christ, the Imam Mahdi, Maitreya Buddha, Kalki Avatart: the World Teacher. His open worldwide mission will have begun.”[ciii]

While Benjamin Crème may think that such an event will be the result of this individual’s “super natural power,” there is actually a perfectly logical explanation for how this kind of “telepathic” phenomena can occur.

Project Bluebeam

In February of 1999, the Washington Post reported that operations were drawn up during the first Gulf War to project a huge holographic image of Allah [the Islamic god] in the sky over Baghdad.[civ] Then, using a 5-15KHz acoustic beam, the appearance of Allah talking would also have been manufactured, telling the Iraqi people to turn on Saddam.

A similar plan was considered in Project Mongoose to overthrow Fidel Castro, where a Jesus-like figure would have been projected, telling the Cubans to overthrow “Godless Communism.” This technology has been labeled Project Blue Beam, and is likely ready to be used at any time. Of course, such technology is classified under national security, but this explains perfectly how Benjamin Crème’s prediction could come true of the “Christ” telepathically communicating with people, fooling them into believing he has supernatural powers and is God.

The Holy Bloodline Theory

Ideas that Jesus Christ had a child with Mary Magdalene have been introduced to the mainstream though various books and novels, most popular of which is Dan Brown’s The Da Vinci Code,which was released in 2003 and made into a film starring Tom Hanks in 2006. Such an idea has no real evidence, yet it has taken hold in millions of people’s minds as being the truth. This idea has several large implications on the New World Order’s goal of eroding faith in Christianity, as well as providing a possible justification for the supposed divine right of the Antichrist to rule earth, as he claims to be the long awaited Messiah.

Since secret societies like the Knights Templar and the Freemasons are said to be guardians of the Holy Grail, which in this theory means the bloodline of Jesus and not some cup or book of knowledge, this theory could very well be used as “evidence” that the Antichrist is the physical reincarnation of Jesus, or a direct descendent of him in an attempt to dupe Christians and Agnostics into believing he is divinely ordained to rule the New World Order.

The Rapture

According to many Christians, when the end times come and the world has decayed into a disastrous wasteland and the Antichrist is about to take power, Christians will miraculously disappear from the face of the earth and be spared the harsh existence the rest of the world will face at the hands of this global tyrant. While many faithful Christians point to various Bible verses they believe verify this idea, it is highly doubtful such an event will occur, and it is this author’s opinion that the Rapture is a misinterpretation of the Bible, and a hoax.

Some people who see the idea of all faithful Christians magically disappearing off the face of the earth and leaving everyone else behind to live in the New World Order as foolish, adhere to what is called a post tribulation rapture, which they say is a rapture of the Christians after the rule of the Antichrist. This idea is at least more realistic than a pre-trib (pre-tribulation) rapture.

A major downfall to believing in the pre-trib rapture (the idea that Christians will be taken to Heaven as soon as the Antichrist comes on the scene, therefore being spared from the chaos and persecution) is that by believing they will supernaturally be taken off the earth and avoid the troubling times when the global dictator Antichrist is in power, they do not see a need to resist the New World Order or any major political or social policies being implemented, because they think that before things get too bad they’re going to go to Heaven and they won’t have to deal with it.

When told about the encroaching Big Brother surveillance system and the VeriChip or similar device replacing paper currency and fulfilling the prophecy of the mark of the beast, instead of speaking out against it or pushing for some kind of accountability or alternative for such a system, Rapture believing Christians are actually pleased such things are right around the corner because they think it means the Rapture is one step closer. Such a pathetic and cowardly attitude only allows their freedoms, privacy, and liberties to be taken away much more easily.

Other Implications of the Dictator

This counterfeit Christ who claims to be God will espouse a very liberal and immoral philosophy on the world. Any sort of moral judgment on behaviors traditionally seen as immoral or reprehensible will be faced with extreme consequences. A very hedonistic lifestyle will be embraced and conservatives and Christians who oppose such behaviors will be labeled as the evil ones who are out of touch with the times. Many Christians will not believe that this man is God and will be aware of the massive fraud that is being perpetuated, and these individuals will be targeted as the trouble makers and the ones who are preventing the New World Order utopia from being realized.

Some prophecies predict that the Antichrist will be nearly killed in an assassination attempt (or an accident) and will seemingly come back to life but with a massive wound to one of his eyes. His miraculous recovery will be touted as a miracle by his inner circle and will be more justification in the minds of his supporters that he has supernatural powers and has the divine right to rule. It’s interesting to note that the symbol for the Illuminati is one eye, often drawn inside a triangle or placed at the top of a pyramid. If this dictator is missing one eye after he is “resurrected” after his attack (or accident), the Illuminati would surely link their symbol of their God (the all-seeing eye) with their leader, who will also have one eye. This too may be seen as another “sign” that he is the Messiah.

Global Police and Military Force

There have been suspicions that UN (United Nations) troops could be deployed on American soil for any number of reasons, such as supposedly to aid Americans in the event of a major terrorist attack from biological or nuclear weapons, or to take over American infrastructure in the event of the U.S. dollar collapsing and becoming worthless as foreign countries try to recoup their losses.

Such fears are stoked by videos that surface of the American military training foreign troops on US soil, sometimes practicing urban exercises where they simulate taking over a town’s main buildings, locking down the area, and even rounding up civilians who are willing participants in the exercises who pretend to be upset that they are being detained. Some videos even show make-shift prison camps where detainees are checked in and given ID badges and held inside tents surrounded by barbed wire.[cv]

One main reason for people’s uneasiness about such situations is that if UN forces are used on American soil for any reason, they do not have any loyalty to this country or the Constitution. We are nothing but foreigners to them. They would not be protecting their own neighborhoods or cities, but instead would simply be doing a job. Such troops will likely have no problems confiscating guns from house to house or rounding up large numbers of Americans for relocation to prison camps.

President Obama’s chief science czar John Holdren wrote in his 1977 book Ecoscience about what he felt were the advantages of a global police force, saying, “If this could be accomplished, security might be provided by an armed international organization, a global analogue of a police force. Many people have recognized this as a goal, but the way to reach it remains obscure in a world where factionalism seems, if anything, to be increasing. The first step necessarily involves partial surrender of sovereignty to an international organization.”[cvi]

This is the same man who wrote in this same book about adding sterilizing agents to the water supply and forcing all women onto birth control or else forcing them to have an abortion if they get pregnant after having two children.

Another unsettling aspect concerning military troops in the New World Order is the existence of private contractors being employed. Such a strategy became fairly well known during the Iraq War when the infamous Blackwater private security company became the focus of controversy after the public learned that these “contractors” were being paid a large amount of money and were given luxurious living conditions and great food compared to regular US soldiers. These Blackwater troops are basically paid mercenaries who do not have the same chain of command and codes of conduct that members of the US military have. Such mercenaries don’t have any loyalty to any particular country either, and will accept a paycheck and orders from practically anyone.

Blackwater

Now called simply Xe (pronounced Zi), is the new name for the private military contracting company formerly called Blackwater that became known for various controversies surrounding its employees activities during the War in Iraq. The company is the largest tactical training facility which trains more than 40,000 people per year in military offensive and defensive operations.

In early 2009, the company changed its name from Blackwater to Xe and the new name, “reflects the change in company focus away from the business of providing private security.” The company denied the new strange name has any significance or special meaning. They did, however, admit that the name Blackwater became too closely associated with the company’s work in the occupation of Iraq.[cvii] The company’s license to operate in Iraq was not renewed and the new Iraqi government made several attempts to have them kicked out of the country during the course of the war.[cviii]

Xe (Blackwater) is still the largest private security contractor used by the United States government. 90% of the company’s money comes from government contracts; two-thirds of which are no-bid contracts[cix]—meaning they are the only company providing a quote to the government for the job—so multiple companies won’t have to compete with each other for the job by offering a lower price than the others.

The scandals and controversies surrounding corruption and murder involving Blackwater (Xe) mercenaries are numerous. In one instance executives at Blackwater authorized secret payments of nearly $1 million dollars to Iraqi officials in order to buy their silence regarding a 2007 incident where Blackwater security guards killed 17 Iraqi civilians in Bagdad.[cx] Blackwater’s president Gary Jackson was fingered by four former executives as having personally approved the bribes.

The CIA also contracted Blackwater to create a hit squad and assassinate leaders of resistance groups in Iraq.

American Police Force

A mysterious private security company came to the attention of concerned citizens in September 2009 which went by the name American Police Force, and used a Serbian coat of arms as its logo. The company had been contracted to run an empty prison facility in the city of Hardin, Montana, which drew suspicion of local residents. Local officials had hoped the facility would be used to detain prisoners that were held at the prison at Guantanamo Bay in Cuba, which President Obama claimed he would close. The contract between the city of Hardin and American Police force was reported to be a 10-year, multimillion dollar deal.[cxi]

American Police Force is owned by a man named Michael Hilton, whose criminal record shows he “pleaded guilty in March 1993 to 14 felonies, including 10 counts of grand theft, one count of attempted grand theft and three counts of diversion of construction funds, according to Orange County court records. He was sentenced to two years in prison, but it is unclear how much time he served.”[cxii]

Hilton is said to speak English with a heavy accent and told reporters he is a naturalized US citizen who is originally from Montenegro, which borders Serbia.

Orange County, California court records show Hilton has used sixteen different aliases, one of which, Michael Miodrag, is listed as being connected to a multimillion dollar fraud case in Australia from 2007.

Shortly after all the controversy surrounding the American Police Force and people looking into Michael Hilton’s shady past, the city of Harding announced that American Police Force would not be taking over the abandoned prison facility. The Serbian government also forced American Police Force to change its logo, since it was a coat of arms used by the Serbian government.

Mystery still surrounds this strange “American Police Force” company and how they were able to get a ten million dollar deal to operate an abandoned prison. When news reports first started surfacing about this issue, some people began fearing that this prison would be operated as a concentration camp for US citizens who some feared would be rounded up for not taking the H1N1 swine flu vaccine that the government was pushing at the time.

It’s also strange that a private security company was allowed to operate using a name that impersonates the police, when such an action is a felony.

Other Private Military Companies

While Blackwater and Private Police Force may be two of the most well-known contracted military or mercenary companies, the list is fairly long of other lesser known companies. MVM Inc. provides contracting services for the CIA and the NSA (National Security Agency) and is located in Vienna, Virginia, which is just 6 miles from the CIA headquarters in Langley, Virginia. DynCorp is another infamous contracting company used by the military, which has been implicated in kidnapping children from Russia and Romania and selling them as sex slaves.

KBR Inc. (Formerly Kellogg Brown and Root) is another private military contractor whose employees have also been implicated in human trafficking.[cxiii] Numerous women have also reported being gang raped by their fellow employees while working for KBR. One woman, Jamie Leigh Jones, testified before a Congressional hearing that she had been gang-raped by approximately seven of her coworkers when she worked for KBR in Iraq back in 2005.[cxiv] Jones’ lawyers said that 38 other women reported similar experiences. KBR was a subsidiary of Halliburton at the time. Dick Cheney, if you recall, was the CEO of Halliburton from 1995 to the year 2000, before becoming vice president under George W. Bush and then pulling strings so his former company would make millions in no-bid contracts.

Posse Comitatus Act

The Posse Comitatus Act was a law passed in 1878 which specifically prohibited the U.S. military from being used on American soil for law enforcement purposes. The term is Latin for “power of the county.” The reason for such a law was to prevent a dictatorship from arising in America by prohibiting a corrupt president from ordering the Army or other military branch to enforce laws that may be unconstitutional.

After 9/11, numerous instances of uniformed military personnel helping police conduct security checks began to be reported as violations of Posse Comitatus, but all instances were described by officials as merely “training exercises,” thus claiming there was no collaboration between police and military, when clearly there was. One concerned citizen videotaped a brief conversation with a uniformed officer in Kingsman, Arizona where the citizen was subjected to a vehicle checkpoint. The military officer admitted, “We’re just helping with security and traffic and stuff for the races.” The solider was then asked if he was under the control of the police and working for the city, to which he responded, “I have no idea, I just do what I’m told.”[cxv]

In 2008, the California Highway Patrol announced its officers would work with US Marines to staff sobriety and driver’s license checkpoints.[cxvi] An ABC affiliate KESQ reported on this after locals expressed concern that this violated the Posse Comitatus Act. The Marines, of course, denied this and Lieutenant Thomas Beck claimed, “We were not actively participating in enforcing any laws. We were there to observe and observe only.”[cxvii]

Another instance of our military working with police was captured on video by a member of the political activist group We Are Change, where they traveled to Newport, Kentucky during River Fest. The person was questioning a uniformed Army soldier who was staking out public streets. The soldiers were in full uniform and armed with handguns and had military Hummers parked on the side of the road.[cxviii]

Another soldier who was part of this same operation was asked if he would follow orders to confiscate guns from American citizens door-to-door, like what occurred after Hurricane Katrina in 2005. He answered, “I’m just a soldier. I do what I’m told.”[cxix]

This author (Mark Dice) has lived in the San Diego, California area for over ten years and has numerous friends who have been stationed at Camp Pendleton in Oceanside, California, which is in the North County of San Diego. One friend informed me that it is against policy for Marines to wear their uniforms anywhere out in public other than from their home directly to the base or vice a versa. They are not allowed to stop off at the grocery store and go shopping, or take a stroll through the mall, because seeing a Marine in camouflage out in public can be unsettling for people and gives the feeling of a police state with public areas being patrolled by the military.

The Department of Defense’s slick legal team always insists that such collaborations of military and police are just “training” exercising and claim they do not violate the Posse Comitatus Act. Such claims are of course lies.

John Warner Defense Act

A bill passed by Congress in 2006 under the Bush administration known as the John Warner National Defense Authorization Act (H.R. 5122), greatly expanded the president’s power to declare martial law and deploy the National Guard into US cities without state governor authorizations when public order has been lost or is seen as being potentially lost. Before this, there were strict limitations on the president’s ability to do so and the authority was delegated to state governors, but now the president can make the decision himself.

At some point, this authority will ultimately be superseded by the United Nations or the president of the world who will then have the authority to deploy troops and declare martial law anytime and anywhere they see fit.

Military Commissions Act of 2006

The United States Military Commissions Act of 2006 (HR-6166), was an Act of Congress signed into law by President George W. Bush in order to “authorize trial by military commission for violations of the law of war, and for other purposes.”

What this really did was allow the President of the United States (Bush and future presidents) to declare someone (including a U.S. citizen) to be considered an “enemy combatant,” which then eliminates their right to habeas corpus, meaning they no longer would have the right to challenge their imprisonment, and could be detained without having any charges even filed against them. Such a practice is in clear violation of the Constitution which says a person can’t be held without being charged with a crime.

The language in the law is so broad that it can be used to label anyone an “enemy combatant” who is engaged in hostilities or who has supported hostilities against the United States. This “support” could be financial, [direct or indirect] or simply counseling.

The Act also suggests that the label “unlawful enemy combatant” refers to any person, “who, before, on, or after the date of the enactment of the Military Commissions Act of 2006, has been determined to be an unlawful enemy combatant by a Combatant Status Review Tribunal or another competent tribunal established under the authority of the President or the Secretary of Defense.” This basically means that if the President says you are an enemy combatant, then you are one.[cxx]

The language in the Act also made this power retroactive, which means that since it was passed, people can be detained and not charged for something they allegedly did before the Act was passed in 2006, when such detainment was not authorized.

Concentration Camps

When one hears of concentration camps, images of Nazi Germany and the Holocaust immediately come to mind, but many American’s would never think that innocent citizens in their country would ever be rounded up and placed in prison camps. Many Americans distracted by professional sports and pop culture are unaware that during World War II, President Roosevelt had 120,000 Japanese Americans rounded up and placed in prison camps. The conditions of living were certainly not what Jews and other prisoners faced in Nazi Germany, but nonetheless, innocent American citizens were taken from their homes and placed in large prison camps called War Relocation Camps for several years.

Even if some people are aware of the Japanese internment, they dismiss such events as being a thing of the past, and never suspect that large scale detention facilities exist today.

During the Republican National Convention of 2004 in New York City, hundreds of protesters were rounded up and taken to an old dilapidated bus garage by the Hudson River, which was converted into a secret detention camp by the NYPD in preparation for the convention.[cxxi]

The facility was dirty with motor oil on the ground and the building was contaminated with asbestos. People were held in crowded conditions for long hours, and the facility was dubbed “Guantanamo on the Hudson” in reference to Camp X-ray in Cuba, where suspects in the “War on Terror” are held without having any charges filed against them.

Another secret prison camp that was discovered and made public was in Austin, Texas in an abandoned airplane hangar at an airport. The hanger was equipped with barbed wire fences, shackles on the ground, and mattresses for detainees to sleep on. This secret prison was created in the build-up to the year 2000 because officials worried that there would be massive civil unrest and possibly the breakdown of civilization if the rumored Y2K bug shut down computers.

Such facilities are now plentiful in America as the New World Order continues to be constructed and such prisons are not new. In the 1980s during the Iran-Contra hearings, Jack Brooks (D-TX) tried to learn about Oliver North’s role in FEMA’s plans to suspend the Constitution and detain political dissidents during a declared state of national emergency.

During the hearings, Chairman Daniel Inouye (D-HA) prevented Brooks from further questioning as indicated in a transcript of the hearing.

Brooks: Colonel North, in your work at the N.S.C. [National Security Council] were you not assigned, at one time, to work on plans for the continuity of government in the event of a major disaster?

Brendan Sullivan: [North’s counsel]: Mr. Chairman?

Inouye: I believe that question touches upon a highly sensitive and classified area so may I request that you not touch upon that?

Brooks: I was particularly concerned, Mr. Chairman, because I read in Miami papers, and several others, that there had been a plan developed, by that same agency, a contingency plan in the event of emergency, that would suspend the American constitution. And I was deeply concerned about it and wondered if that was an area in which he had worked. I believe that it was and I wanted to get his confirmation.

Inouye: May I most respectfully request that that matter not be touched upon at this stage. If we wish to get into this, I’m certain arrangements can be made for an executive session.

End of Transcript

The goofy admitted alcoholic Mormon Glenn Beck became practically a house hold name after he left CNN and moved over to the Fox News Channel in January 2009. Beck’s attempt to imitate Robert Beale of the popular 1970s film Network has gotten him a large fan base who see him as an honest average American, even though he signed a $50 million dollar contract for his radio show alone.[cxxii]

A concerned looking Beck appeared on Fox and Friends, a morning show on the Fox News Channel to promote his new show on their network, and told the hosts, “I have to tell you, I’m doing a story tonight. I wanted to debunk these FEMA camps, you know about them? I’m tired of hearing about them. I wanted to debunk them, well, now for several days we’ve done research on them…I can’t debunk them. And we’re going to carry this story tonight.”[cxxiii] He goes on to explain to the other hosts, “FEMA prisons, FEMA camps. These are actually prisons that were built under the Bush administration…they’re sitting there empty…you’ll see that tonight. Something just doesn’t sit right with me.”

Later that night during The Glenn Beck Program when viewers were expecting to learn more about these prison camps, Beck took a complete 180 degree turn and denied that such camps even exist. He actually decided not to air the segment, and instead told his audience, “I told you that I was going to tell you about the FEMA camps or the FEMA prisons today…I don’t believe in the FEMA prisons, if you don’t know I’ll tell you about it in a couple of days.” He then said he was going to talk about it today but that his research was “incomplete” and he needed to wait a few more days. He then admitted, “this is going to drive the conspiracy theorists crazy. I’ll add this. They’re making me say this. Help,” and went on to imply that nobody from management killed the story, and that he only answers to himself.

The following week Beck had James Meigs on as a guest, who is the editor of Popular Mechanics magazine and the two had a field day attacking the “conspiracy theories” about the FEMA camps, and denied that there are such things. James Meigs is the same man who presents himself as having “debunked” the “9/11 conspiracy theories” by choosing straw men arguments and fringe theories about the 9/11 attacks and then claiming the entire body of research supporting 9/11 was an inside job must be false. For anyone of any intelligence, Glenn Beck’s complete reversal is obvious, and proves that the higher ups at the Fox News Channel killed his original story and then produced a new one with the help of “debunker” James Meigs.

In other instances Beck has made numerous slanderous remarks about 9/11 Truthers (those who see the 9/11 attacks were an inside job) and in one instance Beck has fabricated statements saying that the nutcase who shot a security guard at the Washington DC holocaust museum was a “hero” to the 9/11 Truthers.[cxxiv] These instances and others prove Glenn Beck to be a slick disinformationist and a gate-keeper who works to prevent important information from reaching the public, while pretending to bring his audience cutting edge commentary and news.

The film Camp FEMA (2009) produced by Gary Franchi and directed by Richard Lewis documents the existence of modern concentration camps, a topic that is beyond the scope of this book.

MTV Warns about Martial Law and Concentration Camps

A series of several brief commercials, or perhaps more accurately PSAs (Public Service Announcements), aired on MTV, of all places, in 2008 depicting situations where an out of control police force rounded up citizens in the back of trucks and put them on trains at gunpoint. At the end of the segment, the scene froze and faded into a historical photograph of Jews being rounded up for the Holocaust in a similar manor. The segments were only thirty seconds long, but were extremely disturbing. They concluded with a printed message on the screen reading, “The Holocaust happened to people like us.”

Abusing, Torturing, and Raping Prisoners

As the Iraq War drug on for years and the lies continued to unravel about the reasons America started the war, word began to spread about American soldiers abusing prisoners. Hundreds of photos were made public that soldiers themselves had taken of each other abusing detainees for their own amusement, and the abuse was blamed on a handful of soldiers who were said to have acted on their own and not in accordance with their superiors. Other photos were never made public which show soldiers raping and sodomizing detainees, although such activities are officially denied to have occurred.

While some photos of abuse were made public, President Obama prevented the release of over 2000 others shortly after he was sworn in as president, despite his earlier promises to have them released. Major General Antonio Taguba was the Army officer in charge of conducting an inquiry into the Abu Ghraib jail in Iraq and gave an interview with the London Telegraph admitting that, “These pictures show torture, abuse, rape and every indecency.”[cxxv]

Just one month after Obama flip flopped and changed his mind about releasing photos, he stated, “The most direct consequence of releasing them, I believe, would be to inflame anti-American public opinion and to put our troops in greater danger,” but those on the inside like Major General Taguba know the real reason for not releasing them. “The mere description of these pictures is horrendous enough, take my word for it,” Taguba said.

One such description was released under the US Freedom of Information Act where an Egyptian translator named Kasim Mehaddi Hilas said, “I saw [name of a translator] fucking a kid, his age would be about 15 to 18 years. The kid was hurting very bad and they covered all the doors with sheets. Then when I heard screaming I climbed the door because on top it wasn’t covered and I saw [name] who was wearing the military uniform, putting his dick in the little kid’s ass…and the female soldier was taking pictures.”[cxxvi]

Despite all the now sealed photos and descriptions by eyewitnesses, this level of abuse is officially denied by the US government. What was admitted, after being denied of course, is the use of waterboarding, which is pouring water down the mouth and nose of someone who is strapped to a table, thus making them feel like they are drowning due to inhaling water into their lungs. Waterboarding has been illegal under international law and is considered torture by countless legal experts, war veterans, medical experts, and human rights organizations. This didn’t stop the Bush administration from using it though, and after numerous denials that the CIA and military officials were waterboarding suspects and prisoners, they finally admitted it, but called it an “enhanced interrogation technique” and denied that it was torture.

Fox News’ Operation Mockingbird asset Sean Hannity, an avid war propagandist and George W. Bush defender, continuously stated that waterboarding was no big deal and when asked live on television by one of his guests if he would volunteer to be waterboarded, Hannity agreed to do it for charity. He never followed through with his promise, and completely ignored the fact that he made such a statement. MSNBC’s Keith Olbermann publicly offered to pay $1000 to charity for every second Hannity was subjected the practice, but of course it never happened.

Mancow Muller, a popular Chicago radio host, had also spoken publicly in support of waterboarding and denied that it was torture, that is, until he himself voluntarily underwent the procedure. Mancow thought that he could be waterboarded and then say it was no big deal and that liberals who were against it and those who called it torture would be proven wrong, but immediately after the procedure began Mancow ended it and admitted he thought it constituted torture. An EMT was present in case anything went wrong.

Immediately after ending the experiment, Mancow said, “It is way worse than I thought it would be…Look…all that’s been done to this country, and I heard about water being dropped on someone’s face, I never considered it torture, even when I was laying there, I thought this is gonna be no big deal, I go swimming, it’s gonna be like being in the tub…it was instantaneous. I thought I could hold out 30 seconds, 60 seconds, it was instantaneous, and I don’t want to say this…absolutely torture. Absolutely, I mean that’s drowning.”[cxxvii]

COINTELPRO

A sinister covert and highly illegal program admittedly conducted by the FBI between 1956 and 1971 was called COINTELPRO (an acronym for Counter Intelligence Program) which investigated and disrupted political organizations deemed problematic by the establishment. Since its discovery and the nature of its crimes and activities, of course the FBI says the program was dissolved and no such thing exists anymore. Such claims are laughable, and COINTELPRO’s discovery only served as a learning experience for the FBI and measures were put in place to prevent such activities from being discovered and exposed in the future.

The original program targeted groups seen as “subversive” or groups suspected of being subversive. Martin Luther King Jr. and other leaders in the Civil Rights Movement and those associated with the NAACP (the National Association for the Advancement of Colored People), and the Southern Poverty Law Center were also targeted, as well as groups protesting the Vietnam War, including many college students. The directives of COINTELPRO were given by J. Edgar Hoover, who was the head of the FBI at the time, and ordered agents to “expose, disrupt, misdirect, discredit, or otherwise neutralize” the leaders and activities of such groups.

Agents involved in the program used a lot of dirty tricks, such as mailing letters to leaders of organizations claiming to be from someone else and making accusations that they had been sleeping with that person’s wife, for example. In one instance a recording of Martin Luther King Jr. that was taken illegally from a hotel room and proved he was cheating on his wife. FBI agents then anonymously mailed the recording to his wife because they wanted to discourage King from pushing for civil rights.

Illegal wire taps, spreading false and slanderous rumors about people, frame-ups and worse were all common in COINTELPRO and are still methods used today by elite law enforcement and intelligence agents.

The MIAC Report

A joint venture between the Department of Homeland Security and local law enforcement in Jefferson City, Missouri called The Missouri Information Analysis Center (or MIAC), is said to analyze terrorist threats and criminal activity in order to help prevent them. This MIAC was fairly unknown until March of 2009, when an eight page report the organization had wrote up was leaked to the public titled The Modern Militia Movement, which contained some disturbing information regarding the kinds of individuals the report labeled as potentially dangerous or domestic terrorists.

When the MIAC report first surfaced, a lot of people thought it was a hoax since the criteria it used to identify potential militia members and terrorists was completely absurd, but the report was confirmed authentic by Lieutenant John Hotz, the Assistant Director of the Public Information and Education Division of the Missouri State Highway Patrol.[cxxviii] The report contains what it called common symbols and media associated with terrorists in order for officials to more easily identify them. These items include bumper stickers showing support for Congressman Ron Paul, owning gold coins, and Aaron Russo’s film America: Freedom to Fascism.

The report begins by trying to explain why the militia movement gained numbers in the 1980s and 90s, saying, “It was during this timeframe that many individuals and organizations began to concoct conspiracy theories to explain their misfortunes. These theories varied but almost always involved a globalist dictatorship, the ‘New World Order (NWO),’ which conspired to exploit the working class citizens…Much of this rhetoric would become anti-Semitic, claiming that the Jews controlled the monetary system and media, and in turn the ‘Zionist Occupied government (ZOG).’”

In a section titled The Militia Post September 11th 2001 it reads, “Newer versions of the NWO conspiracy have been concocted in order to empower the movement. The NWO is seen as using law enforcement, military, national guard, and federal agencies in order to carry out its elitist one world government.”

It goes on to say, “Many militia organizations feel that the U.S. government will fall due to economic or racial issues. They believe that during the chaotic fall of the government, moves will be made to install Martial Law, confiscate firearms, and imprison many citizens.”

The report mentions the North American Union and says, “conspiracy theorists claim that this union would link Canada, the United States, and Mexico. The NAU would unify its monetary system and trade the dollar for the AMERO.”[cxxix]

Radio Frequency Identification Devices (RFIDs) are also mentioned, saying “there is a fear that the government will enforce mass RFID human implantations. This process would make it possible for the government to continually know the locations of all citizens.”[cxxx]

The report is a tremendous piece of propaganda aimed at convincing police that anyone who discusses these particular issues should be viewed as a potential threat. It says, “The militia subscribes to an anti-government and NWO mindset, which creates a threat to law enforcement officers. They view the military, National Guard, and law enforcement as a force that will confiscate their firearms and place them in FEMA concentration camps.”

Since most people familiar with the New World Order learn about the private Federal Reserve Bank and its role in the economy, the MIAC report also included this topic in their report painting these people as extremists. “Members of the militia movement are strongly against the FRS (Federal Reserve System) and see it as a mechanism of the elitist New World Order. In November, End the FED protests were held nationwide at Federal Reserve Banks in opposition to the FRS. Many right-wing extremists oppose the FRS and propose a system that would be backed by gold,” it reads.

Also, since many who see the left vs. right paradigm one of controlled opposition, and the leadership of both the Republicans and the Democrats as being globalists with ties to the secret establishment, many people begin favoring third party candidates who don’t have to bow down to any special interests. While this is a conclusion any thinking American would come to after learning about how the political structure actually functions, the MIAC report chose to demonize such people.

“Militia members most commonly associate with 3rd party political groups. It’s not uncommon for militia members to display Constitution Party, Campaign for Liberty, or Libertarian material. These members are usually supporters of former Presidential Candidates Ron Paul, Chuck Baldwin, and Bob Barr.”[cxxxi]

The report even warns that people who display political messages on their vehicles in the form of bumper stickers should be suspects. “Militia members commonly display pictures, cartoons, [and] bumper stickers that contain anti-government rhetoric. Most of this material will depict the FRS, IRS, FBI, ATF, CIA, UN, Law Enforcement, and ‘The New World Order’ in a derogatory manor.”[cxxxii]

Shortly after word spread of this report and the demonizing language in it, even mainstream media outlets covered it in shock saying it amounted to political profiling. Soon afterward, by the end of March 2009, the report was said to be scrapped and the director of the MIAC was reassigned.

“For that reason, I have ordered the MIAC to permanently cease distribution of the militia report,” said Chief James Keathley of the Missouri State Patrol. “Further, I am creating a new process for oversight of reports drafted by the MIAC that will require leaders of the Missouri State Highway Patrol and the Department of Public Safety to review the content of these reports before they are shared with law enforcement. My office will also undertake a review of the origin of the report by MIAC.”[cxxxiii]

Department of Homeland Security Labels Veterans as Possible Terrorists and Extremists

While some skeptics say the MIAC report was just one insignificant report drafted and circulated in the state of Missouri, not soon afterwards a similar report was made public that was drafted by the Department of Homeland Security which labeled veterans and pro-life organizations as possible extremists or terrorists.

The report, titled Right-wing Extremism: Current Economic and Political Climate Fueling Resurgence in Radicalization and Recruitment, also says that due to the collapse of the economy which began near the end of 2008 and the election of Barack Obama as the first black president of the United States, that “rightwing extremists” are having an easier time recruiting supporters who are concerned about illegal immigration, restrictions of firearms, abortion, and the loss of US sovereignty.

The report even admits, “threats from white supremacist and violent anti-government groups during 2009 have been largely rhetorical and have not indicated plans to carry out violent acts,” but suggests that, worsening economic conditions, potential new restrictions on firearms and “the return of military veterans facing significant challenges reintegrating into their communities could lead to the potential emergence of terrorist groups or lone wolf extremists capable of carrying out violent attacks.”

The report says that rightwing extremism, “can be broadly divided into those groups, movements, and adherents that are primarily hate-oriented (based on hatred of particular religious, racial or ethnic groups), and those that are mainly anti-government, rejecting federal authority in favor of state or local authority, or rejecting government authority entirely. It may include groups and individuals that are dedicated to a single issue, such as opposition to abortion or immigration.”

“[T]he consequences of a prolonged economic downturn—including real estate foreclosures, unemployment and an inability to obtain credit – could create a fertile recruiting environment for right-wing extremists and even result in confrontations between such groups and government authorities similar to those in the past,” the report reads.

It also warns that, “Proposed imposition of firearms restrictions and weapons bans likely would attract new members into the ranks of right-wing extremist groups as well as potentially spur some of them to begin planning and training for violence against the government…The high volume of purchases and stockpiling of weapons and ammunition by right-wing extremists in anticipation of restrictions and bans in some parts of the country continue to be a primary concern to law enforcement.”

The report also mentions what it calls people who believe in anti-government conspiracy theories about gun confiscations, citizen detention camps, and a Jewish-controlled ‘one-world government’ and says that, “end times prophecies could motivate extremist individuals and groups to stockpile food, ammunition and weapons. These teachings also have been linked with the radicalization of domestic extremist individuals and groups in the past, such as the violent Christian Identity organizations and extremist members of the militia movement.”

It also attempts to cast suspicion on veterans, saying, “Returning veterans possess combat skills and experience that are attractive to right-wing extremists…DHS/I&A (Department of Homeland Security’s Office of Intelligence and Analysis) is concerned that right-wing extremists will attempt to recruit and radicalize veterans in order to boost their violent capacities.”

People who support enforcing immigration laws and who oppose illegal immigration or speak out against it are also demonized in the report. “DHS/I&A assesses that right-wing extremist groups’ frustration over a perceived lack of government action on illegal immigration has the potential to incite individuals or small groups toward violence.”

The report concludes that the Department of Homeland Security will work with state and local officials in the near future to determine the levels of right-wing extremist activity in their areas.

Project Megiddo

In the months preceding the turn of the twenty-first century, the FBI released a report warning of violence they thought would likely be carried out to mark the new millennium at the hands of people who believed in the “New World Order conspiracy theory.” The report specifically listed white supremacists, Black Hebrew Israelites, the militia movement, and apocalyptic cults as groups who the FBI should be on the lookout for. While it is true that a very small number of white supremacists and apocalyptic cults have carried out violence driven by their ideologies, the Project Megiddo report casts suspicion on anyone who talks about the New World Order.

This 32 page report was titled Project Megiddo because, as it explains, “The Hebrew word ‘Armageddon’ means ‘hill of Megiddo.’ In English, the word has come to represent battle itself. The last book in the New Testament of the Bible designates Armageddon as the assembly point in the apocalyptic setting of God’s final and conclusive battle against evil. The name ‘Megiddo’ is an apt title for a project that analyzes those who believe the year 2000 will usher in the end of the world and who are willing to perpetrate acts of violence to bring that end about.”

In the section focusing on the militia, the report tries to paint those who talk about the New World Order or the United Nations as potential violent extremists, saying, “Meanwhile, for members of the militia movement the new millennium has a political overtone rather than a religious one. It is their belief that the United Nations has created a secret plan, known as the New World Order (NWO), to conquer the world beginning in 2000.”[cxxxiv]

The report goes on to demonize gun owners and supporters of the Second Amendment who oppose gun control measures, reading “The passage of the Brady Bill and assault weapons ban in 1994 were interpreted by those in the militia movement and among the right-wing as the first steps towards disarming citizens in preparation for the UN-led NWO takeover.”[cxxxv]

“In light of the enormous importance and prominent role that extremist groups place on the Second Amendment, it is probable that recent government actions aimed at controlling guns are perceived to be compelling signs of the UN-led NWO takeover.”[cxxxvi]

It is well known to those who are aware of the New World Order that FEMA has constructed various prison camps, detention centers, and so-called emergency relocation centers which are usually kept secret from the public, and in some cases have been covered by mainstream news.[cxxxvii] Most people who are familiar with these “FEMA camps” are not very comfortable with their existence and the secrecy which surrounds them. The Megiddo report addresses these worries, saying, “One can find numerous references in militia literature to military bases to be used as concentration camps in the NWO and visiting foreign military personnel conspiring to attack Americans.”[cxxxviii]

One of the most unsettling ideas conveyed in the report is that Christians who are uneasy about the New World Order for its prophetic implications regarding the end times are viewed as cult members who may act out violently in order to bring about the end of the world. “Cults with an apocalyptic agenda, particularly those that appear ready to initiate rather than anticipate violent confrontations to bring about Armageddon or fulfill ‘prophesy’ present unique challenges to law enforcement officials.”[cxxxix]

“Religiously motivated extremists may initiate violent conflicts with law enforcement officials in an attempt to facilitate the onset of Armageddon, or to help fulfill a ‘prophesy.’ … Likewise, extremists who are convinced that the millennium will lead to a One World Government may choose to engage in violence to prevent such a situation from occurring.”[cxl]

It certainly is interesting that since this report was released in October 1999, talk of the New World Order by major political figures around the world has become common place, and the vast majority of people around the world who speak out against it are viewed as dangerous extremists who the government and law enforcement agencies claim are prone to violence.

A Nation of Spies

In the New World Order, the mainstream media and the government purposefully create a climate of fear, putting the population on edge with the threat of terrorism they claim can come from any number of individuals or groups. The ethereal “al Qaeda” became the focal point of such fears after the September 11th 2001 terror attacks in New York City and Washington DC and the fear mongering went on practically daily throughout the Bush administration.

While it is understandable that law enforcement would put out information urging people to be on the lookout for specific suspicious behavior in hopes of preventing any crimes from taking place, the rhetoric accompanying such alerts has created a climate where people are urged to spy on their neighbors and are made to feel powerful by doing so, as if they themselves are working in cooperation with law enforcement.

During the 2008 presidential campaign in America, Barrack Obama made a startling statement referring to his desire to create a program which sounds like it was coming right out of George Orwell’s dystopian novel Nineteen Eighty-Four. Obama proclaimed, “We cannot continue to rely only on our military in order to achieve the national security objectives that we’ve set. We’ve got to have a civilian national security force that’s just as powerful, just as strong, just as well-funded.”

The man chosen by President Obama to be his chief of staff, Rahm Emanuel, made equally unsettling statements in the past. On August 21, 2009 Rahm Emanuel, who was a Democratic member of the House of Representatives, was interviewed on C-Span about his book The Plan: Big Ideas for America, and when asked specifically what he meant by the idea of a “universal citizen service” Emanuel answered, “Citizenship is not an entitlement program. It comes with responsibilities. Everybody between the ages of 18 and 25 will serve three months of basic training and understanding in a kind of civil defense.”

In George Orwell’s classic novel Nineteen Eighty-Four, the children spy on their parents and neighbors and accuse the lead character Winston Smith of being a “thought criminal,” meaning he has negative thoughts about the government. These same children report their father as a thought criminal as well, and he is arrested based on these accusations.

The idea of civilians spying on other civilians by simply keeping their eyes and ears open for anything they might say or do that seems to criticize the ruling party was something that people thought occurred only in Nazi Germany or the Communist Soviet Union, but there have been multiple attempts by leadership in both Republican and Democratic parties to create a culture in America where people feel empowered because they are on the lookout for anyone that is not in step with current leadership and their ideologies.

Often such programs are defended citing “things have changed since 9/11,” referring to the September 11th terrorist attacks and claims that a secret society of Muslim extremists are living among us plotting their next attack and waiting for the right moment or the green light from Osama Bin Laden, the mythical leader of this society of radicals.

Operation TIPS

A snitch program implemented under the fear-mongering years of President George W. Bush was called Operation TIPS, which was an acronym for the Terrorism Information and Prevention System. This program was aimed at workers who had access to people’s homes, such as cable installers and telephone repairmen, who were encouraged to look for and report “suspicious” activity to authorities. The program was intended to begin in August 2002 and hoped to include over one million workers in ten US cities.

John Ashcroft who was the Attorney General under President Bush admitted that information generated by Operation TIPS would then be stored in databases for various law enforcement agencies. Senator Patrick Leahy from Vermont criticized the program and likened it to J. Edgar Hoover’s misuse of the FBI when he hired citizens to spy on their neighbors if they were political protesters during the 1960s. Legislation was introduced in the House version of the Homeland Security Bill that prohibited the creation of Operation TIPS, but senator Joe Lieberman blocked its removal from the Senate’s version. The Senate later passed the House version which called for the program’s termination in November 2002. However, in 2008 it was reported that ordinary people such as utility workers and others had been trained as what are called Terrorism Liaison Officers who report “suspicious” activity that could be signs of terrorist.[cxli]

InfraGuard

InfraGard is a program developed by the FBI which basically functions as a secret society of businessmen, academics, utility workers, and law enforcement agents who secretly look for suspicious activity and share information and intelligence in order to supposedly prevent terrorist attacks against critical infrastructure in the United States. InfraGuard stands for Infrastructure Guardians and began in 1996. As of December 2009, the organization reported their membership to be more than 34,000 people. Most people have never heard of InfraGuard.

In 2008, Matthew Rothschild reported in the journal The Progressive that several InfraGard members told him if martial law was declared that InfraGuard members would be given orders to “shoot to kill” in order to protect critical infrastructure and would not be prosecuted.[cxlii] The FBI has denied this.

The article in The Progressive also reported that the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) said there “is evidence that InfraGard may be closer to a corporate TIPS program, turning private-sector corporations—some of which may be in a position to observe the activities of millions of individual customers—into surrogate eyes and ears for the FBI.”[cxliii]

iWatch

A citizen spy program launched in Los Angeles, California called iWatch is promoted as being the “21st century version of Neighborhood Watch.”[cxliv] Through brochures, meetings with community groups, and even television commercials, the iWatch program lists what they call suspicious behavior that should compel people to call the police. Several of these “indicators” are: If you smell chemicals or other fumes; If you see someone wearing clothes that are too big and too heavy for the season; And, if you see someone purchasing supplies or equipment that could be used to make bombs. So, I guess you’re supposed to call the police if your neighbor is spray painting something in their backyard or using paint thinner to clean some tools in his garage and you smell the fumes, or if someone is buying a steel pipe at the hardware store to fix some plumbing.

The program also created a toll-free telephone number for people to report such activities to, as well as a website. Mike German, who is a former FBI agent now working with the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) admits that many of the iWatch indicators are all relatively common behaviors and worries that people will use the program to report people who are thought to look like a terrorist based on personal biases and stereotypes.

Supporters of the program hope iWatch will become as successful and as well-known as the Smokey Bear campaign used to prevent wildfires. “There he is with his Smokey the Bear hat, similarly here, we hope that this program, even though it’s in its birthing stages right now, in a few years will become that well known to the American public,” said Los Angeles police Chief William Bratton.

One of the television commercials for the program consists of a dozen or so people each saying a sentence or two and then cutting to the next in a montage, saying, “What is iWatch? It’s a way to report suspicious behavior, or activities that relates to terrorism. Terrorism is a crime. It is our shared responsibility to keep America safe. That’s why I, iWatch. It’s like a neighborhood watch for the whole city. If you see, hear, or smell something suspicious, report it. Reporting is easy. Use the web, or the phone. Let law enforcement determine if it’s a threat. And let the experts decide. A single report can lead to actions that can stop a terrorist attack. Think about the power of that. Think about the power of iWatch. I watch. I report. I keep us safe.”

Cash Payments Given to Snitches

Chicago implemented a “tax whistle-blower” program offering people a cash reward for informants who turn in businesses that are cheating on their taxes. The amount of the reward is a percentage of the tax money the city recovers as a result of the informant’s tip. “It’s just another way of bringing people into compliance,” Revenue Department spokesman Ed Walsh told the Sun-Times.[cxlv]

“It would probably be a business knowing that a competitor is not remitting a tax. An employee [of the tax-dodging business] could know that, too. Typically, you need to provide some type of incentive.”[cxlvi]

Boy Scouts and Girl Scouts

In a move that could lead to a scenario similar to Hitler Youth in Nazi Germany, the Department of Homeland Security created a program where they decided to “partner” with the Boy Scouts of America to allegedly help Americans to prepare for and respond to emergencies. “We are delighted to partner with the Department of Homeland Security on this very important initiative for America,” said Roy Williams, Chief Scout Executive.

The New York Times ran an article discussing the Boy Scouts activities with Homeland Security and showed a photo of some kids dressed up in SWAT gear and holding fake rifles.[cxlvii]

The article tells how the practice drill the children were involved in included the goal of rounding up a terrorist, who in this case was a “disgruntled Iraq war veteran,” and admits that thousands of young people were being trained to “confront terrorism” and the program aimed to “prepare youths for more traditional jobs as police officers and firefighters.” [cxlviii]

“Scouting embodies the very essence of being prepared and has specific training and merit badges designed to encourage proper awareness and planning in our Scouts. To partner on a program such as this allows us to reinforce the importance of preparation to families throughout the nation,” said Roy Williams, Chief Scout Executive.

In an equally strange move, the Department of Homeland Security also decided to team up with the Girl Scouts as well, in order to “combat hurricanes, pandemics, terror attacks and other disasters.”

The head of the Department of Homeland Security, Janet Napolitano, said “As a former Girl Scout, I know the ‘Be Prepared’ motto well, and I look forward to working with the Girl Scouts to spread the preparedness message to all of our nation’s citizens.”

It was reported that Homeland Security designed a new “preparedness badge” that the girls can earn while defending America.

Climate Cops

A British website called ClimateCops.com geared for children ages 7 to 11 features cartoon images and downloadable materials for children to become “climate cops” so they can keep a watchful eye over their parents and then build a “Climate Crime Case File” to report back to their parents and make sure they, “don’t commit those crimes again (or else)!”

The site also warns children that they “may need to keep a watchful eye” to prevent future violations. When one logs onto the website they are first shown a brief cartoon introducing them to four characters, the “climate cops,” who are going to fight against global warming because it is “threatening our world” and the viewer is told “it’s time to fight back” and that they “need new recruits and your training starts here.”

The user then can play various games or “missions” as they are called, and can download tickets to report “climate crime” which are used to write up violations for their parents for instances like leaving the room and not turning the light off, or leaving a cell phone charger plugged in when it’s not being used. One ticket even lists “using a tumble dryer on a sunny day” and carries the assumption that people should line dry their clothes and not use a dryer. Another one says, “Putting hot food in a fridge or freezer is in fact, a crime. Climate Cops know that waiting for it to cool is the right time.”

Not only does this kind of propaganda push the global warming theory onto children, but gives them the feeling of authority over their parents and teaches them that they are the ones in power and can give the orders. Global warming poster boy Al Gore once told a group of school kids that, “There are some things about our world that you know that older people don’t know…Why would that be? Well, in a period of rapid change, the old assumptions sometimes just don’t work anymore because they’re out of date. New knowledge, new understandings are much more widely available, sometimes to young people who are in school who aren’t weighed down with the old flawed assumptions of the past.”

The hoax of deadly man-made climate change and the Armageddon said to occur unless people pay carbon taxes and give in to a global government is covered in its own section of this book. (See Global Warming/Climate Change)

Elimination of the Right to Bear Arms

The Second Amendment to the Constitution of the United States outlines the right for citizens to bear arms—meaning to own guns. It can’t be at random that this Amendment immediately follows the right to free speech (the First Amendment), which is one of the most cherished freedoms Americans enjoy. So placing an amendment guaranteeing the right to own guns as the second one shows just how important the founding fathers felt this right was. They knew that if masses of citizens were armed, that an out of control government would have a much more difficult time imposing its will on the people because they would be able to organize and fight against such an event.

In Asia, people made nunchucks and other weapons out of commonly available materials in the ancient past when all weapons were banned and only members of the military were allowed to possess such things. Nunchucks, for example, were first made from a flail used to thresh rice or soybeans. Corrupt tyrants and governments throughout history have disarmed their own citizens so they couldn’t organize and resist. A disarmed public also causes people to rely more on the government for their safety, instead of being able to protect themselves. Even modern anti-gun activists fail to see how citizens owning guns actually prevents crime. Often their anti-gun attitudes are installed in them by the mainstream media that tries to impress on people that only police and military personnel are qualified to own and carry guns.

Thomas Jefferson, quoting Cesare Beccaria in On Crimes and Punishment (1764) famously said, “Laws that forbid the carrying of arms disarm only those who are neither inclined nor determined to commit crimes…Such laws make things worse for the assaulted and better for the assailants; they serve rather to encourage than to prevent homicides, for an unarmed man may be attacked with greater confidence than an armed man.”

If a burglar breaks into someone’s home armed only with a knife or baseball bat, they are the one who will be in control of the situation, and could bash the brains in of the homeowner and then rape his children and wife with little to stop him. The reason people call the police in the event of a burglary is because the police have guns and can hopefully stop the burglar and protect the victims, but it makes no sense to rely on such a strategy when the homeowner himself could own a firearm and neutralize the burglar immediately upon his discovery.

Despite reliable statistics that show for every crime committed with a gun, even more are prevented, people are still often convinced that guns should only be used by police and military. The November 2009 shooting at Fort Hood in Texas, where thirteen people were killed by gunman Nidal Hason, shows that even supposed trained professionals can be mass murderers. Hason was a U.S. Army Major and was stationed at the base. Some believe Hason was a victim of MK-ULTRA mind control and programmed to kill. Others see him as a Muslim terrorist who became unstable and murderous as he grew more upset with the United States involvement in the Middle East. Whatever the truth surrounding this tragedy, there are numerous other instances each year of police and military committing murder and/or suicide despite being trained professionals who are trusted with firearms.

Anti-gun activists also fail to see that an extremely small percentage of humans will commit murder by any means necessary to them, even if a gun is not available. If these unstable individuals cannot get their hands on a gun, they will simply stab, bludgeon, poison, or run over their victims.

Groups like the National Rifle Association and Gun Owners of America help to organize Second Amendment advocates and try to minimize the effects of anti-gun tactics, although many see the NRA as having given in to anti-gun legislation and not taking a strong enough stand against it. Despite the numbers and money behind such groups, unconstitutional and unfair gun policies have been written into law in America and the ultimate goal of banning all guns from citizens, is a very real possibility.

Gun Bans in American Cities

Despite the Second Amendment clearly outlining that people have the right to own guns, Anti-American politicians and judges have been able to successfully ban guns in certain cities. Hand guns, for example, were illegal in Washington DC until a landmark case in June 2008 (District of Columbia v. Heller), which overturned the ban, once again making the district compliant with the Second Amendment for the first time since 1976. Washington DC was not the only city to have such a ban in place. Other cities such as Chicago and New York had also banned handguns and placed such ridiculous restrictions on rifles and shotguns that the laws practically render the guns useless.

Alan Gura of Alexandria, Virginia, who successfully argued the Heller case at the high court, is also scheduled to argue the McDonald case in Chicago hoping to lift the ban on handguns there as well.

Before the 2008 overturning of the DC gun ban, an appeals court ruled in the Chicago case that their handgun ban did not violate the Constitution because the Supreme Court had not yet declared whether its decision in the Heller case established a fundamental right for citizens to own guns. Many antigun activists say the Second Amendment doesn’t apply to average citizens, but instead applies only to the police and military.

While we can look at the 2008 lifting of the DC gun ban as a victory for the Second Amendment, this is likely only a temporary lifting. After just a handful of highly publicized murders involving guns by lone nuts, the anti-gun propaganda will go into full force and the establishment will do everything they can to get as many guns out of the hands of honest, law abiding citizens as they can.

Gun Confiscation After Hurricane Katrina

Immediately after Hurricane Katrina struck the Gulf Coast in September 2005, police were confiscating guns from people in their homes in New Orleans as they went door to door in what looked like affluent middle class neighborhoods. One video aired on a local news channel shows police tackle an elderly woman and steal a small revolver from her that she had for personal protection. This woman was inside her own home on dry land.

The National Rifle Association (NRA) produced a short video titled The Untold Story of Gun Confiscation After Katrina, which shows interviews of several other law abiding citizens who also had their guns taken away unlawfully by the police in the aftermath of the hurricane. One man interviewed explains how he complied with the officers and turned over his rifle and asked for some kind of receipt documenting that they had taken possession of the gun, and the officer informed him that no such policy was in place. The man then asked how he could get his gun back after things had settled down and the officer told him to get a lawyer.

Oath Keepers

In March of 2009, an organization was founded with the intent of educating police and military about the possibility of unlawful and unconstitutional orders being given, and aimed to prevent such illegal orders from being carried out by those who were on the receiving end of them. Oath Keepers was founded by a man named Stewart Rhodes, and when joining, the new members swear an oath to the following ten things they will not engage in:

1. We will NOT obey orders to disarm the American people.

2. We will NOT obey orders to conduct warrantless searches of the American people.

3. We will NOT obey orders to detain American citizens as “unlawful enemy combatants” or to subject them to military tribunal.

4. We will NOT obey orders to impose martial law or a “state of emergency” on a state.

5. We will NOT obey orders to invade and subjugate any state that asserts its sovereignty.

6. We will NOT obey any order to blockade American cities, thus turning them into giant concentration camps.

7. We will NOT obey any order to force American citizens into any form of detention camps under any pretext.

8. We will NOT obey orders to assist or support the use of any foreign troops on U.S. soil against the American people to “keep the peace” or to “maintain control.”

9. We will NOT obey any orders to confiscate the property of the American people, including food and other essential supplies.

10.We will NOT obey any orders which infringe on the right of the people to free speech, to peaceably assemble, and to petition their government for a redress of grievances.

Left-wing propagandist and gate-keeper Chris Matthews had Stewart Rhodes as a guest on MSNBC’s Hardball and tried to misinform the audience about the Oath Keeper’s mission. Matthews states, “What I don’t like about people who are armed who are being recruited to stand up in some operation, I want to know when you would call your forces together and challenge the authority of the US government?”

Rhodes had to clarify the organization’s goals and explained, “It’s not calling forces together, it’s simply saying they’re not going to comply with orders to violate the rights of the American people. We’re not talking about asking them to go fight, we’re saying simply, don’t fight.” Matthews went on to patronize Rhodes about his beliefs in potential concentration camps in America and citizens being rounded up and detained.

In a report by the ADL (Anti-Defamation League) about growing anger in America aimed at the government, the Oath Keepers were attacked, saying, “One manifestation of the ideology of resistance was the creation in March 2009 of the Oath Keepers, an anti-government group that tries to recruit police and military personnel and veterans. Members refuse to obey hypothetical “orders” from the government, “orders” that speak more to their own paranoid and conspiratorial beliefs than to any realistic government action.”[cxlix]

The ADL was obviously trying to divert attention away from the fact that such actions are very plausible and in some cases have already occurred.

Supreme Court Justice Sonia Sotomayor

In 2009, after Barack Obama was sworn in as president, he nominated Sonia Sotomayor to sit as a Supreme Court justice. It was no surprise that Obama’s pick was a Latino woman, as he was doing his best to select people for high level positions, not based on their qualifications, but instead on their race and gender. One of the things which make Supreme Court Justice Sotomayor anti-American and a willing conspirator in implementing the New World Order is her stance on the Second Amendment.

In Maloney v. Cuomo, a case from January 2009, Judge Sotomayor ruled that the Second Amendment only applies to the federal government and not individual states or cities.[cl] According to her and her ruling, it is perfectly constitutional for any city or state to ban gun ownership. A 2004 opinion she joined which is now cited as precedent, states that “the right to possess a gun is clearly not a fundamental right.”

Rahm Emanuel’s Hopes of Disarming Americans

President Obama’s chief of staff, Rahm Emanuel, can be seen in a video clip widely available on the Internet where he is giving a talk about how he and Obama hope to eliminate the Second Amendment, which clearly states that individual citizens have the right to own guns. Rahm declared, “The most simple thing we can do, and we’ve got to make this a number one issue, as a test vote and then take it into the election, and that is if you are on the no-fly list because you are known as maybe a possible terrorist, you cannot buy a handgun in America.”[cli]

The “no-fly list” isn’t really a no-fly list, it’s more of a watch list which supposedly contains the names of suspected terrorists, or people who may have terrorist ties, and if such a person attempts to board a flight, then extra security measures are taken to ensure that they aren’t carrying any explosive devices or weapons with them onto the aircraft. While on the surface, such a procedure can surely be understood, what makes this “no-fly list” such a slippery slope is the fact that the standards and criteria for landing one’s name on the list is kept secret. Not only that, but over one million people are on this list,[clii] including many young American children[cliii] and even a CNN reporter who describes having to go through enhanced security checks every time he flies.[cliv]

There is also no known way for an individual to get their name off the list. So if Rahm Emanuel got his way of using this list to justify confiscating all firearms registered to persons on that list and prevent them from purchasing one if they didn’t already own any, it would then eliminate the Second Amendment right guaranteed by the Constitution of the United States, all without a conviction of any crime or even an arrest. Think of the implications. By some government agent simply adding your name to the no-fly list, for any reason, you now lose your guns. Hopefully in the months and years that come, such an underhanded policy would be faced with such opposition that it can never be enacted, but the very fact that Rahm Emanuel spoke publicly about such an idea shows just how low the power players in Washington are willing to sink in order to disarm the American people.

Open Carry Groups

While extremely surprising to many people, most states in America allow people to publicly carry an unconcealed visible handgun on their person, with the exception of places banned by federal laws such as school zones, post offices, government buildings, and state parks. Such a right is called open carry, and in many states the gun can actually be loaded, while in others the gun may be carried openly but cannot be loaded. Such a practice came to national attention shortly after Barack Obama became president and started pushing for a nationalized healthcare system.

President Obama had a town hall meeting in Portsmouth, New Hampshire on August 10, 2009, where a man joined the protesters across the street with a loaded handgun in a holster attached to his leg. This was perfectly legal. The man was interviewed by Chris Matthews on MSNBC where Matthews expressed his utter shock that someone would do such a thing and tried to make it out that the guy wished harm upon Obama. When this practice continued by other open carry advocates, liberals tried to make such people out as racists, but at an event in Phoenix, Arizona, an African American man brought an AR15 rifle which was strapped hanging off his back. Talking heads on CNN and other news networks expressed their shock, but the fact that this event involved an African American made it impossible for the media to spin the story as if a bunch of right-wing racists were bringing guns to Obama’s events. About a dozen others at the same event were also armed.

The Secret Service can declare an area surrounding the president to be a Federal Zone where weapons are not allowed. During these events where open carry advocates had their weapons, Obama was nowhere near them and wouldn’t have been anywhere close to being in the line of fire. The anti-gun propagandists at MSNBC and CNN led viewers to believe that Obama could have been shot by one of these individuals if they were unstable, which wasn’t the case.

“Assault Weapons”

Much of the ignorant public supports so-called “assault weapon” bans because they believe that an “assault weapon” means a fully automatic weapon like a machine gun. So when anti-gun activists and politicians talk about their desire to ban assault weapons, it seems like a reasonable idea to many people, since they falsely believe they are trying to get machine guns off the streets. The National Firearms Act of 1934 specifically addresses the ownership, possession, and use of fully automatic weapons, which are highly regulated and extremely rare.

A gun is usually classified as an assault weapon because it contains several features in combination such as a detachable magazine along with a folding or telescoping stock or a pistol grip. Flash suppressors and bayonet mounts are also included in these lists.

The state of California has the strictest gun laws in the United States and has their own list of what they deem “assault weapons.” In addition, for over a decade California has had a law in place that prevents the manufacture, sale, or transfer of magazines that hold more than ten rounds. The law is for every gun; handguns, rifles, and assault weapons. Some standard magazines for handguns are capable of holding sixteen rounds, but the only people legally allowed to possess such magazines are people who owned them prior to the ten round restriction becoming law on January 1, 2000.

So let it be clear that what the government calls an “assault weapon” is not a machine gun as they would like people to believe, but is instead a classification given to a firearm because it contains a combination of features such as a flash suppressor, a collapsible stock, a pistol grip, or other features. It’s also important to understand that frequently when the mainstream media airs stories about “assault weapons” or renewing the “assault weapon” ban, they show footage of people in the desert or at shooting ranges using fully automatic guns which have been basically illegal for civilians too use for over 75 years.

California’s Ammo Tracking Policy

As governor of California, Arnold Schwarzenegger signed a bill into law which required stores that sell ammunition to thumbprint everyone who buys, as well as log their driver’s license and require a signature for each sale. Each person who buys ammo now is entered into a federal database and a running tally of what they buy and when they bought it is kept on record indefinitely. As a result of the law, all Internet and mail order sales to California are now a thing of the past.

Schwarzenegger claimed to be against such a policy in the past but changed his mind saying, “Although I have previously vetoed legislation similar to this measure, local governments have demonstrated that requiring ammunition vendors to keep records on ammunition sales improves public safety.”[clv]

Sam Paredes, the executive director of Gun Owners of California, said the new law treats gun owners like registered sex offenders. The database will be used to flag anyone who buys what the government considers a large amount of ammo and may be considered probable cause to investigate the individual further or place them under surveillance.

Elimination of National Sovereignty

America has been the envy of the world for generations and the leader in human rights and freedoms as well as military power and economic prosperity. The problem is, in order for the New World Order to be complete, America must yield its political, economic, and military power over to the global government that will then use it, not for what’s best for America, but what the elite establishment see as the best thing for the New World Order. Sovereignty is defined as the quality of having supreme, independent authority over a territory, which in this case we are talking about the United States; a quality which may have been set up to fail by the Illuminati a long time ago when America was first created.

Britain, the United States, and Israel are at the heart of the New World Order, and have been the major forces behind its creation. Manly P. Hall, an occult insider, explains in his book The Secret Teachings of All Ages that secret societies have been covertly using America since its creation to carry out their goal of a global utopia.

He wrote, “European mysticism was not dead at the time the United States of America was founded. The hand of the Mysteries controlled in the establishment of the new government, for the signature of the Mysteries may still be seen on the Great Seal of the United States of America. Careful analysis of the seal discloses a mass of occult and Masonic symbols chief among them, the so-called American Eagle...only the student of symbolism can see through the subterfuge and realize that the American eagle upon the Great Seal is but a conventionalized phoenix.”[clvi]

He continues, “Not only were many of the founders of the United States government Masons, but they received aid from a secret and august body existing in Europe which helped them to establish this country for a peculiar and particular purpose known only to the initiated few. The Great Seal is the signature of this exalted body—unseen and for the most part unknown—and the unfinished pyramid upon its reverse side is a teeterboard setting forth symbolically the task to the accomplishment of which the United States Government was dedicated from the day of its inception.”[clvii]

A video posted on YouTube showing Walter Cronkite accepting the Norman Cousins Global Governance Award in 1999 at a United Nations conference includes a disturbing joke about Satan running the New World Order and countries giving up their sovereignty. Cronkite was the anchor for the CBS evening news from 1962 to 1981.

During this event Cronkite said, “What Alexander Hamilton wrote about the need for law among the thirteen states applies today to the approximately two hundred sovereignties in our global village, all of which are going to have to be convinced to give up some of that sovereignty to the better greater union, and it’s not going to be easy.”

He then referenced how some Christians believe the construction of the global government is the work of the Devil, at which point Cronkite added, “Well, join me, I’m glad to sit here at the right hand of Satan.”

This video is widely available on YouTube. Cronkite is believed to be the voice for Moloch played over the loudspeakers in the Bohemian Grove during the Cremation of Care human effigy sacrifice done each summer.

The United Nations

As many people know, the United Nations (UN) is an international organization aiming to facilitate international law between countries around the world, and claim to be working for economic development, human rights, and world peace. The UN was founded in 1945 after World War II and replaced the League of Nations. There are currently 192 member states.[clviii]

Supporters of the UN see it as a global forum for world leaders to exchange ideas and discuss policies that affect the rest of the world such as wars, economic policies, and human rights issues. Opponents see the UN as an authority that the United States will one day give up its sovereignty to, causing the elimination of various Constitutional rights and liberties that Americans have enjoyed since the founding of the country. It’s interesting to note that the John Birch Society began criticizing America’s membership in the UN back in 1959 with their “get US out of the UN” campaign, and warned the UN’s goal was to establish a one world government.

Criticism of the United Nations continues to this day by various groups and for various reasons. The United Nations Population Fund, for example, has provided support for different groups promoting forced abortions and sterilizations. Another controversial issue has been the UN’s connection with Lucis Trust (formerly called Lucifer’s Trust) which is Alice Bailey’s occult organization that continues to publish her books, including The Externalization of the Hierarchy. Robert Muller, the former Assistant Secretary General of the United Nations was known as the “philosopher” of the UN, and openly praised Bailey’s occult writings.

The North American Union

Just like multiple countries in Europe joined together to form the European Union (EU) and agreed on a single common currency (the Euro), a similar plan has been drafted for the North American continent that would merge the United States, Canada, and Mexico in what would be called the North American Union (NAU), and then introduce a common currency (the Amero) for the region as well. (See the Amero)

Just as the New World Order has been denied for decades and called a conspiracy theory, the North American Union was also denied and said to be the figment of people’s imaginations. In 2006 a government website, www.SPP.gov went online which contained information on what was called the Security and Prosperity Partnership of North America, which is a code term for the North American Union that would advance the global unified government in a major step.

Other regional unions are also planned such as the Asian Union, the Middle Eastern Union, and the African Union. Once each of these regions are unified with their laws and currency, the next step then is to merge all unions into one system, as well as merge all of their regional currencies into the global currency. (See One World Currency)

Illegal Immigration

Traditionally most conservatives support enforcing immigration laws and securing America’s borders, particularly the southern border with Mexico, since that is where millions of illegal aliens have snuck in from, while liberals usually turn a blind eye to immigration laws and even encourage massive influxes of illegal aliens breaking into America.

By allowing and encouraging illegals to come to American, it causes various strains on the economy such as the workers not paying taxes; 20 to 30% of federal prison inmates are illegal aliens; they use medical services without paying for them; and they take jobs that would otherwise go to American citizens. As of 2010 the number of illegal aliens living in America range from between 6 and 13 million.

While on the surface it makes no sense to have allowed such a practice to continue for decades, allowing illegal immigration to continue at massive levels has been a core strategy by the elite to usher in the North American Union and the New World Order. It became fairly obvious to thinking Americans that Republican President George W. Bush had no interest in slowing illegal immigration when after the terrorist attacks of September 11th 2001 the borders were not regulated, and during Bush’s entire eight years as president, he did nothing to attempt to do so.

Common sense would say that if an army of dark skinned terrorists from Al Qaeda were dedicated to sneaking into America to plot and carry out more terrorist attacks, then one would think tightly regulating the borders would be a prime concern, but it wasn’t. Not only was it not a concern for President Bush, but after a group called the Minutemen formed and began voluntarily patrolling the borders with nothing more than binoculars, walkie talkies, and cell phones, President Bush attacked them, calling them “vigilantes.”[clix]

What is perhaps even more shocking is that illegal aliens in Los Angeles, California had been given mortgage loans[clx] and credit cards,[clxi] and in cities around the country, groups were fighting to prevent poll workers from checking the ID of people who voted to insure they were a citizen and were who they said they were.[clxii] Other states wanted to allow illegal aliens to get valid driver’s licenses.[clxiii]

In the over ten years that this author (Mark Dice) has lived in San Diego, California, every morning in the same exact locations all over the city I have witnessed a dozen or more “day laborers” standing on the sides of roads or in front of businesses waiting to be picked up by people who need physical labor. The vast majority of these day laborers are illegal aliens from Mexico, and loiter every single day, week after week, month after month, year after year, in the same places where locals know they can pick them up and pay them cash to do yard work or other manual labor. They are paid cash for this work, and such a practice is very common in southern California, Arizona, New Mexico, and Texas.

U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement does absolutely nothing and largely ignore the day labor pick-up locations. People not familiar with the practice, or who don’t live in border states may imagine that such workers would be extremely cheap, but I can attest first hand that they make more than you think. Back in 2003 I worked for a company that would occasionally use one of these men to “sign spin,” meaning that a person stands on the side of the road holding, spinning, or moving a sign advertising a business. On multiple occasions the owner of the business I worked at, which was a retail store, had me drive to the nearest day labor spot and pick up a guy for the job. There were often a dozen or more men who would all crowd around my truck when I pulled up, each of them hoping to be chosen for the job so they could make some money. They would ask how many hours of work was needed, and how much I was going to pay.

Out of the dozen or more men standing around looking for work, none of them would get in my vehicle unless I said I was going to pay them $10.00 an hour. This is, of course, cash, so it’s really like they were making $12 or $13 an hour. My boss at the time was cheap and didn’t want to pay them very much, so he told me to see if I could get a worker for $7 or $8 an hour, but nobody would take it.

Allowing the illegal immigrants in America from Mexico also causes the government bureaucracy to grow and consume more tax payer’s money to deal with the economic and social burdens that the millions of illegals cause to the healthcare system, law enforcement and prisons, as well as straining our schools and social welfare programs. This is all, of course, looked at favorably by the elite, and allows them to expand the size and scope of government in conjunction with the New World Order.

Some government officials have been pushing hard for complete amnesty of all illegal aliens which will automatically turn them into official American citizens. The vast majority of Mexicans are Democrats and after granting amnesty to them they will be able to vote, and will then support the liberal Democrats socialist agendas aimed at solidifying the New World Order.

Monitoring the Population with Big Brother

Personal privacy has been slowly eroding in recent decades due to new technology and legislation such as the Patriot Act, but this slow and gradual process is speeding up and will soon advance at such a high pace that many aspects of the personal privacy we once enjoyed will be left to the past and never experienced again. There was a time not long ago, when if your boss tried to call you at home after work or on the weekend and you weren’t home or didn’t answer the phone, then he would be out of luck and have to wait until you returned to work to speak to you.

This was before cell phones and caller ID, but today if your boss wanted to get a hold of you, he would simply call your cell phone and even if he didn’t leave a message, you would be expected to return his call within minutes or hours because he knows you will see the missed call on your call log. While cell phones have amazing advantages, they have also changed the social customs in ways most people do not notice unless they step back and really look at the implications such technology has carried with it.

But this social change can be seen as tremendously insignificant compared to other implications stemming from Radio Frequency Identification Devices (RFIDs), facial recognition cameras, and fingerprint scanners. Such devices do in fact offer some advantages but also hold a large potential for abuse in ways that most people couldn’t even imagine.

VeriChip and RFID

An RFID (Radio Frequency Identification Device) is a small computer chip that can be encoded with information and then read from various distances by a receiver. They are sort of electronic bar codes and have various uses, including tracking products as they travel around a warehouse or en route to a delivery.

The VeriChip is the world’s first implantable RFID which is the size of a grain of rice and is implanted in the body of animals as well as humans. In pets and livestock, the device is used as an electronic dog tag to identify the animal. The VeriChip company is planning to have their chips implanted into people’s hands or arms to replace debit cards and drivers licenses. The VeriChips have been used to enter VIP areas in clubs and pay bar tabs since around 2004.[clxiv] The device’s manufacturer has been promoting the chip as a simple alternative to carrying around cash, credit cards, or a driver’s license, and is hoping to make the implantable VeriChip or an invisible tattoo the standard form of ID and payment around the world.

While the original version of VeriChip only acts as an identifier that can be read by a receiver from a short distance away, in the future, smaller versions equipped with GPS will be small enough to also be implanted under the skin as well, and will be able to be tracked wherever the person implanted with one goes.

GPS Tracker for Children

In October 2009, a tracking device was put on the market called the Little Buddy, which consists of a fairly large unit that the company promotes as a safety device which can be placed in a child’s backpack or lunchbox and can then be located and tracked via GPS on the parent’s cell phone or computer.

The device also allows boundaries to be set up by the parents and activated during specific time periods, and if the device travels outside of that specified area, a text message or email will be sent to the parent notifying them of this. For example, a boundary could be set up around a one block radius from the child’s school during the school hours, and if the device travels outside that area during this timeframe, the parent would be immediately notified. This device is rather large and cannot be easily concealed, so most children would be aware that such a device was placed in their backpack by their parent, but future versions of such a device will be incredibly smaller and can be placed on a person without their knowledge.

When these smaller devices are available, they will open the door for horrendous implications involving stalking and personal privacy issues. One newscaster on the Fox News Channel even joked about placing the device in her boyfriend’s car so she could keep tabs on exactly where he went and when. Most people would obviously be unaware such a device was placed in their vehicle.

One commercial for the Little Buddy tracking device said, “Get peace of mind. Build trust. And be confident that your child is OK when you can’t be with them.” It’s unclear what they meant by “building trust” with the device, since using such a thing is a clear sign of an overbearing, controlling, or paranoid parent. The device costs under one hundred dollars.

Plans to Implant U.S. Soldiers with RFIDs

Aside from the VeriChip corporation first marketing their Orwellian product as a life-saving medical device, and later entering into talks with banks hoping their chip will replace credit and debit cards as a form of payment for goods and services, the company aggressively pursued the Pentagon with hopes that their RFID chips would be implanted in the 1.4 million soldiers in the armed forces as a replacement for their metal dog tags.[clxv]

The D.C. Examiner called the company “one of the most aggressive marketers of radio frequency identification chips,” and reported that they were in discussions with the Pentagon about implanting them in soldiers. VeriChip spokeswoman Nicole Philbin told the Examiner that, “The potential for this technology doesn’t just stop at the civilian level.”

Facial Recognition Cameras

In George Orwell’s novel Nineteen Eighty-Four, he described what he called Telescreens which were placed in every home and on every street that were television screens which could also watch whatever was going on in its field of view. These Telescreens were monitored and recorded by the Thought Police and kept everyone under a constant state of surveillance to make sure they wouldn’t conspire against the ruling Party or even speak negatively of them.

While security cameras have been a common fixture in banks, stores, and parking lots for decades as a method to deter crime or allow their videotapes to be reviewed in order to gather evidence if a crime is committed, new computer software allows cameras to be able to spot someone out of a crowd if they are entered into the system as a target. These facial recognition cameras have been used in casinos for years in order to spot suspected card counters who the casinos want to keep an eye on.[clxvi] Such systems spot them as soon as they enter the casino even if they are wearing a disguise.

In the New World Order, facial recognition systems will one day be as common as street lights and will record everyone’s movements throughout their day. The information stored by these systems will be able to trace your exact movements throughout an entire city (and country), as well as log the names of any individuals you happen to meet during the course of your day. This system can be programmed to detect if and when two or more specific individuals come into close proximity to each other. Supporters of these systems claim they prevent crime and fight terrorism but the potential for stalking and other abuses are horrifying.

In the New World Order it may even become common place for cameras to be in people’s homes that are wired into a universal database and can be monitored by officials. There will be very few places where the all-seeing eyes are not constantly looking at you.

Echelon

Even many electrical engineers find it hard to believe that the United States government has an advanced spy system that can monitor practically every phone call, fax, email, and text message in real time. This system is so powerful that it uses what are called “dictionaries” to flag certain keywords used in conversations around the world. If a series of keywords appear in a single conversation, then that telephone conversation will be flagged and analyzed to determine if it is a threat or not. For example, if a person uses words such as “bomb,” “kill,” “president,” and “White House” in a conversation, then the Echelon system will detect it and the conversation will be flagged and analyzed by authorities. Most conversations are recorded and stored for a period of time and are only deleted if they are not deemed important.

This system also has voiceprint technology that is capable of detecting a specific person’s voice among the millions of voices that are being transmitted over satellites at any given time. If a specific individual is targeted for surveillance, even if that person uses a payphone, their voiceprint will be detected by Echelon, and their location will be identified and the phone call will be recorded. This is no more difficult than Google instantaneously finding a specific article among the tens of millions of web pages after a specific set of words are searched for.

It may be alarming to people that simple systems are able to activate specific cell phones and listen to the conversations, and can even turn on the cell phone’s microphone and listen to the surrounding area even when the phone is off. Surely this technology violates the rights of people and the 4th Amendment to the Constitution that protects against unauthorized searches and seizures, but the authorities in control of this technology couldn’t care less. Only fools believe them when they say that it isn’t abused and doesn’t infringe upon peoples’ rights.

The Internet

While valuable information still gets past the mainstream media gate-keepers, most people spend hours each week on Facebook and Twitter self-promoting themselves and posting meaningless drivel about how good their lunch was, or how they are feeling at the moment. The comments that their friends post on their status updates make the user feel important as if they are their own celebrity with a fan base who follow their every move. These same zombies often cyberstalk people of the opposite sex who they are interested in and spend hours looking through all of their Facebook or MySpace pictures and fanaticizing about having that person as a part of their life. These same types of fools subscribe to YouTube channels like “Fred,” “Hot for Words,” or “Sxephil.”

These kinds of people are of no concern to the establishment, since they are continuously amused and are kept out of the way. It is the people who are awake to the New World Order and who use the Internet to its fullest capacity to bypass the gate-keepers and propaganda who are a danger to their monopoly. People like you.

Carnivore

It shouldn’t come as a surprise that the FBI, CIA, NSA, and any number of other government agencies can identify every website you’ve been on, what files you downloaded, and read any email you’ve ever sent. The computer system that was first created to do this was called Carnivore and was implemented by the FBI. The system was first used during the Clinton administration after the Internet became widely used, and its sophistication has grown in step with advancing technology.

After repeated negative coverage in the press due to personal privacy concerns, the FBI changed the name of the Carnivore system to DCS1000, which stands for “Digital Collection System.” In 2001 the FBI also started using commercially available software such as NarusInsight to monitor the Internet traffic of targeted individuals.[clxvii] The software can easily monitor a target’s Internet usage in real time, as well as go back and trace them step by step, through each web page they visit, link they click, and file they download.

Most laptop computers have built in microphones and webcams that can also be used to watch and listen to suspects without their knowledge. It also shouldn’t come as a surprise that any one of the “alphabet agencies” can also get access to your computer’s hard drive, if the computer is online, and can search and copy its contents.

Google Ousts Blogger Over Name Calling

A lot of people with blogs, websites, and YouTube accounts don’t use their real name and instead use a handle or pseudonym. The reasons for using a handle usually stem from them wanting anonymity to prevent crazy stalkers from coming to their home or place of work because they are either fans of their content, or want to hurt them because they hate what they post online. Most bloggers enjoy this anonymity but there are increasing risks that if someone posts a blog or video saying derogatory things about a specific person or group, then their identity may be discovered and they may be sued or even charged with a “hate crime.”

In January 2009 a model sued Google to get the identity of a blogger who called her a “skank” and an “old hag.”[clxviii] Liskula Cohen, a blond beauty who has modeled for Giorgio Armani, Versace, and Vogue magazine wanted to sue the blogger for defamation.

The blog was on Google’s Blogger service and titled “Skanks in NYC” where the blogger wrote, “I would have to say the first-place award for ‘Skankiest in NYC’ would have to go to Liskula Gentile Cohen.”

A Manhattan Supreme Court judge ruled that Cohen was entitled to know the name of the blogger and ordered Google to reveal her name which is Rosemary Port. The model then filed a $3 million defamation lawsuit against the Port.

The Cyberbullying Act

The Cyberbullying Act of 2009 (HR 1966, the Megan Meier Cyberbullying Prevention Act), is named after the high-profile “MySpace suicide” of a young 13-year-old girl named Megan Meier who killed herself after being harassed on MySpace by her classmate’s mother who pretended to be a teenage boy online. It’s meant to prevent people from using the Internet to “coerce, intimidate, harass, or cause substantial emotional distress to a person” but the vague language in the bill has alarmed people because it so broadly defines “cyberbullying” that it could be interpreted to apply to practically any situation, including blog posts critical of public officials.

The National Crime Prevention Council defines cyberbullying as “when the Internet, cell phones or other devices are used to send or post text or images intended to hurt or embarrass another person.”

UCLA Law Professor Eugene Volokh wrote on his blog that everyday situations could be considered cyberbullying. “I try to coerce a politician into voting a particular way, by repeatedly blogging (using a hostile tone) about what a hypocrite/campaign promise breaker/fool/etc. he would be if he voted the other way. I am transmitting in interstate commerce a communication with the intent to coerce using electronic means (a blog) ‘to support severe, repeated, and hostile behavior’— unless, of course, my statements aren’t seen as ‘severe,’ a term that is entirely undefined and unclear,” Volokh wrote.[clxix]

Parry Aftab, a lawyer and Internet security expert said, “We have existing harassment statutes in all 50 states that already cover this problem. We don’t need Linda Sanchez’s law.”[clxx] (Linda Sanchez (D-CA) introduced the Cyber Bullying Act.)

According to the text in the Cyber Bullying Act, people who “bully” others via any electronic means could face fines, two years in prison, or both. This means if you sent a nasty text message to your ex or post derogatory comments on someone’s YouTube video, you could be arrested. It also means you post something insulting or judgmental about someone on your Facebook, MySpace, or Twitter pages, or on any Internet forum, then you may be violating the law.

Researchers say that anywhere from 40 percent to 85 percent of kids have been exposed to some kind of “cyberbullying,” such as being called “fat” via instant message or postings on social networking sites.

Cybersecurity Act of 2009

The Cybersecurity Act of 2009 gives the president the ability to declare a “cybersecurity emergency” and shut down or limit Internet traffic in any “critical” information network “in the interest of national security.” This bill does not define what a critical information network or a cybersecurity emergency is, because that definition would be decided by the president of the United States.

The bill also grants the Secretary of Commerce “access to all relevant data concerning [critical] networks without regard to any provision of law, regulation, rule, or policy restricting such access.” This means the government can access or monitor any data on private or public networks without regard to privacy.

This creepy, Big Brother power was introduced by none other than Jay Rockefeller, the great-grandson of John D. Rockefeller, nephew of banker David Rockefeller. When discussing how “dangerous” the Internet was and why he felt the Cyber Security Act is important, Jay Rockefeller stated, “It really almost makes you ask the question, would it have been better if we had never invented the Internet.”

So using the authority given to the government by the Cyber Security Act, in the event of an emergency such as a major terrorist attack or a pandemic, the government could turn off practically every website in the country, except ones they deemed “critical” which would be mainstream media sites that would gladly parrot government talking points about what the public should do. The government could also cause every website to “point to” or forward to a government website that contained propaganda about what had just occurred and would give only one-sided instructions about evacuations or inoculations. This is identical to the Emergency Broadcast System used in television which allows the government to interrupt every station in the country simultaneously and broadcast whatever message they want.

A Medicated and Sedated Population

27 million Americans are on antidepressants,[clxxi] which is approximately 10% of the population. People are familiar with the well-known pills such as Prozac or Zoloft, but there are thirty different drugs used as antidepressants—including: Paxil, Celexa, Lexapro, Luvox, Buspar, Nardil, Elavil, Sinequan, Pamelor, Serzone, Desyrel, Norpramin, Tofranil, Adapin, Vivactil, Ludiomil, Endep, Parnate, Remeron, and more.

Some of these drugs have extremely dangerous side effects. A 2004 study in the Journal of the American Medical Association reported that “the risk of suicidal behavior is increased in the first month after starting antidepressants, especially during the first one to nine days.”[clxxii]

In the New World Order, the fun and joy of life is often missing from where it once was. It’s no wonder people are depressed since many social activities such as parties or just chatting with your neighbor for a half an hour have been replaced by videogames, watching television, or surfing the Internet.

In the vast majority of depression cases, instead of someone taking a drug to alleviate the symptoms, all they need to do in order to experience the joy in life is to simply change their lifestyle and their habits. This would then attack the root of the problem instead of just masking the symptoms by taking drugs. But the pharmaceutical industry would rather everyone take a pill every day for the rest of their lives while living the same pathetic existence they did before, rather than join some social clubs or recreational sports team to alleviate their boredom and depression.

A study of antidepressant use in private health insurance plans conducted by the New England Research Institute found that 43 percent of those who had been prescribed antidepressants had no psychiatric diagnosis or any mental health care beyond the prescription of the drug.[clxxiii] The drug companies don’t want people cured, they just want their business.

Drug Commercials

The famous comedian Chris Rock, whose stand-up is often based on the truth, has a hilarious but true joke based on his observation of the massive advertising campaigns by the drug companies and the amount of money doctors and medical companies make by not curing diseases. “There ain’t no money in the cure,” Rock blasts. “The money’s in the medicine. That’s how you get paid!”

Rock goes on, “The government…they don’t want you to use your drugs…they want you to use their drugs. So every night on TV you see a weird ass drug commercial trying to get you hooked on some legal shit. They just keep naming symptoms till they get one that you fucking got. It’s like, are you sad? Are you lonely? Do you got athletes’ foot? Are you hot, are you cold? And they just keep naming symptoms…are you depressed…do your teeth hurt?…I got that! I’m sick! I need that pill!”

The H1N1 Swine Flu Vaccine

In the summer of 2009 the government and mainstream media launched a massive fear-mongering campaign trying to convince everyone in the world that they needed to take a vaccine for the H1N1 virus—the so-called “swine flu” virus. It was the top story for days when it first hit, and then the continued fear-mongering lasted for months as a supposed vaccine was made available to the public in October. It was a pandemic and everyone needed the shot, they said, or tens of thousands would die.

In the 1970s a similar scare was spread about a swine flu virus, and after a vaccine was pushed onto the public, numerous people got sick and died from the vaccine itself. This time around with the H1N1 swine flu virus, government propagandists claimed the vaccines were safe and those who decided not to take it were even called “extremists” by the chief medical examiner in England.[clxxiv]

Public health workers such as doctors and nurses in the state of New York were first told by State Health Commissioner Richard F. Daines that they would have to take the vaccine by November 30th 2009 or risk discipline, including losing their job. After massive resistance and a public demonstration, Governor David Paterson reversed the policy, but said it was prompted by a vaccine shortage.[clxxv]

The Public Employees Federation, New York’s second-largest state employees union, sued over the requirement and was awaiting a state Supreme Court hearing scheduled for October 30, 2009, when the Governor announced the decision to drop the mandatory vaccinations.

On a CNN segment broadcast in October 2009, Dr. Mehmet Oz, who is Vice-Chair and Professor of Surgery at Columbia University and a well-known medical correspondent and host of the Dr. Oz Show, urged everyone to get vaccinated but when Campell Brown, the host, asked him if his children were getting the vaccine, he said, “I’ll tell you, my wife is not going to immunize our kids, cuz I’ve got four of them, and when I go home, I’m not Dr. Oz, I’m Mr. Oz.”

Shepard Smith of the Fox News Channel told his audience not to believe the “conspiracy theories” about the vaccine, or the “negative hype” after a guest was on urging everyone to take the vaccine.[clxxvi] Dr. Nancy Snyderman, MSNBC’s chief medical editor, addressed the large numbers of people who were suspicious of the vaccine and weren’t going to take it telling them to, “forget the conspiracy, listen to our government agencies, these guys are telling the truth. There’s no conspiracy here folks, just get your damn vaccine.”[clxxvii]

One of the major reasons large numbers of people were refusing to take the shot was because of the fear of side effects similar to the ones from the 1970s swine flu vaccine. The 2009 H1N1 swine flu outbreak was so over-hyped in the mainstream media that people began to get suspicious that there was a conspiracy to scare everyone into taking the vaccine. Some saw the reason for the fear-mongering being a way for the vaccine manufacturers to make hundreds of millions of dollars from the sale of their product, while others saw this as a plot to forcibly inject everyone with thimerosal and mercury laced vaccines for the purpose of dumbing down the masses by the neurological damage caused from such preservatives found in most vaccines. Some even believed the “vaccine” was designed to kill them in order to carry out the population reduction agenda of the elite.

RFID Bracelet Hoax

In early September 2009 the person with the YouTube channel “Entimes777” posted a video with the title “URGANT MESSAGE!!!! Make this viral!!!” [the word urgent was misspelled in the title of the original video] which consisted of a video blog of a woman claiming to be a U.S. soldier who says she was training with California police to set up freeway checkpoints and force H1N1 swine flu vaccinations on the public, and then also force them to wear a bracelet containing an RFID tracking device once they were vaccinated.

The woman also claimed that those who refuse to take the vaccination at the checkpoints will be immediately taken to a concentration camp. The video was spread around the Internet and posted on numerous alternative news websites as possible evidence that such plans were being implemented.

A few days later the woman posted a new video saying that in a week she would delete the previous video from her account, which she did, but not before others downloaded the video and reposted it on YouTube where it can still be seen today if one searches for “Soldier Claims Authorities Training To Intern Americans Who Refuse Swine Flu Shot.”

Peoples’ response to the woman’s claims varied, as was noted by the variety of comments, ranging from calling her a “crackpot” to saying, “God Bless You, the Truth is out there cuz of people likeyou.”

A few months earlier on July 29th 2009, former Kansas state trooper Greg Evensen published an article on the web titled The Death of Liberty: The Final Scene Unfolds, where he wrote, “Have you been made aware of the massive roadblock plans to stop all travelers for a vaccine bracelet (stainless steel band with a micro-chip on board) that will force you to take the shot? Refuse it? You will be placed on a prison bus and taken to a quarantine camp. What will you do when your children are NOT allowed into school without the shot? What will you do when you are not allowed into the workplace without the vaccine paperwork? Buy groceries? Go to the bank? Shop anywhere?? Get on a plane, bus or train? Use the toilet in the mall? Nope. Police officers will become loathed, feared, despised and remembered for their ‘official’ duties.”[clxxviii]

A video was posted on YouTube of Evenson speaking at a conference where he was asked about his article where he reiterated his claims that he had been told by numerous state troopers that such a plan was in existence, and then said that he had a “medical specialist” in Milwaukee, Wisconsin tell him that they had witnessed, “A semi-tractor trailer being unloaded at the hospital loading dock with pallets and pallets, scores of cases of metal bracelets, that once put on, would slip into place and be either pegged in there with some kind of device to hold it in place, but the band was meant to be permanent. On top is a chip, and on that chip will contain all kinds of information about you and the fact that you have been inoculated.”[clxxix]

Of course no such plan was ever enacted and Greg Evenson is either a fraud or a dupe. This does not mean, however, that a future outbreak of a disease or a virus will not lead the government to launch a forced vaccination and quarantine program. Such an event will likely occur one day, but unfortunately misinformation and paranoia about checkpoints for the H1N1 vaccine didn’t end here.

Vaccine Checkpoint Hoax

In mid-September 2009 some bloggers and alternative news sites posted a story after someone claimed to have come across a vaccine checkpoint east of San Diego, California. The problem was that the H1N1 vaccine wasn’t even available yet. The story was accompanied by a photo the person allegedly took, which looked like an ordinary border checkpoint that are common in southern California.

The person, who remains anonymous, said they were traveling from California to Arizona, headed east of San Diego when he was subjected to an unusual checkpoint. “As I approached I noticed armed military personnel had most of the cars pulled over and there were a lot of people going in and out of a mobile trailer. The people looked confused and some upset. Seeing what was going on made me really nervous,” the person said.

He then went on to claim that he was approached by a women in military fatigues who asked him where he was headed and mentioned “something about a vaccination.”

“I got scared and told her I was a state geologist doing field research and because I was doing so much driving back and forth I had my vaccine on campus. She didn’t say anything for a few seconds and then the car behind me started honking and she got pissed and waved me on. I was so scared!,” he concludes.

One comment on the story read, “That checkpoint is for the Border Patrol along Interstate 8 just west of Imperial Valley. The reason why the BP is there is because I-8 is within one mile of the border. If you have white skin, they let you through. If you have brown skin and 20 passengers in your Ford Econoline, you are going to get pulled over and interrogated. Yes, checkpoints are un-American and Stalin-esque, but this has nothing to do with Swine Flu. Knock it off with the fear mongering. That crap gets old.”

Another skeptical reader posted, “Besides, the swine flu vaccine is not readily available yet (two more weeks). So why would they be checking to see if people had received it?”

So whoever it was that started this rumor by sending this email and photo out to alternative news sites was either a paranoid and delusional person who somehow after the fact that he was subjected to a standard border patrol checkpoint dreamed up that the officers were talking about a vaccine, or the person simply sent out the email as a purposeful hoax to see if they could fuel the fear that people had about such checkpoints being set up.

Dangers of Vaccines

Robert Kennedy Jr., the son of Robert “Bobby” Kennedy, the younger brother of President John F. Kennedy, has been active in exposing the link between thimerosal in vaccines and autism in children. In 2005 he wrote a powerful article titled Deadly Immunity which was published in Rolling Stone magazine and on Salon.com, where he said, “Since 1991, when the CDC and the FDA had recommended that three additional vaccines laced with the preservative be given to extremely young infants—in one case, within hours of birth—the estimated number of cases of autism had increased fifteen fold, from one in every 2,500 children to one in 166 children.”

Many people are aware of the dramatic increase in autism cases since the 1990s and many doctors and parents point to mercury and thimerosal preservatives that are found in such vaccines as the catalyst for the disorder. Such a link is officially denied by the medical establishment, but the information Kennedy covers in his article is extremely disturbing.

He wrote about a secret meeting of doctors where they had allegedly discussed the dangers of vaccines and how they could cover it up. He explains, “According to transcripts obtained under the Freedom of Information Act, many at the meeting were concerned about how the damaging revelations about thimerosal would affect the vaccine industry’s bottom line. ‘We are in a bad position from the standpoint of defending any lawsuits,’ said Dr. Robert Brent, a pediatrician at the Alfred I. duPont Hospital for Children in Delaware. ‘This will be a resource to our very busy plaintiff attorneys in this country.’ Dr. Bob Chen, head of vaccine safety for the CDC, expressed relief that ‘given the sensitivity of the information, we have been able to keep it out of the hands of, let’s say, less responsible hands.’ Dr. John Clements, vaccines advisor at the World Health Organization, declared that ‘perhaps this study should not have been done at all.’ He added that ‘the research results have to be handled,’ warning that the study ‘will be taken by others and will be used in other ways beyond the control of this group.’”

Kennedy’s article is very lengthy and is available in full on the web. He also gave a very unsettling interview on MSNBC about the issue where he said, “We are injecting our kids with 400 times the amount of mercury that the FDA or the EPA considers safe.”

About thimerosal causing autism, Kennedy says, “The science is out there today for anybody who bothers to read it, and I have read it…The same regulatory bureaucrats that green lighted thimerosal originally are now trying to cover their tracks.”[clxxx]

He went on to say that he had obtained the transcript of the secret meeting of doctors, pharmaceutical companies, and scientists from our government in the year 2000, who say that the link is undeniable and that they would not give the vaccines to their own children, but conspired to hide the evidence from the American people. Kennedy concluded the interview on MSNBC by saying, “We have the guys who are supposed to be protecting American’s health, who are actually conspiring to keep this stuff in the vaccines.”

Actress Jenny McCarthy has a child who was diagnosed with autism, and she has publicly made some statements about the possible link between vaccines and autism but many people in the media ridiculed her and called her crazy because she is known for playing bimbos, although in real life she is very well spoken.

Mercury Poisoning is Good for Children?

K-Eye News, a CBS affiliate in Austin, Texas aired a brief segment about vaccines which was so absurd that it could have been a satire produced by Saturday Night Live. As you now know, there has long been a controversy over mercury in vaccines causing neurological damage, and even triggering autism in children, but this bizarre newscast claimed, “Mercury containing vaccines may help, not harm kids according to two new studies in the Journal of Pediatrics.” The story went on to say, “There have been wide spread concerns that mercury based preservatives in vaccines might impair the neurological development of children. These new studies suggest the opposite, that the preservatives may actually be associated with improved behavior.”

What they meant by “improved behavior” is basically that your children will be mildly brain damaged by the vaccines, and will be more like zombies and less likely to act like normal energetic children.

Sodium Fluoride in Drinking Water

A lot of people who see the New World Order as a threat to their way of life and the freedoms people have enjoyed in places such as America and Europe, see the fluoridation of the drinking water as a way to massively drug the population for the purpose of creating a docile populace that is more willing to accept their present living conditions. The official explanation for adding sodium fluoride to the public water supplies is to supposedly reduce tooth decay and prevent cavities, but other research shows that consuming sodium fluoride has effects on the brain such as calming people down and even reducing their IQ.

G. D. Searle & Company (which is now part of Pfizer) was a company involved with researching and developing pharmaceuticals and agriculture products and is often mentioned in regards to fluoridating drinking water in America. G.D. Searle & Company is claimed to have spearheaded water fluoridation in America and the CEO of the company between 1977 and 1985 was none other than Donald Rumsfeld.

This is the same Donald Rumsfeld who would go on to be the Secretary of Defense under George W. Bush and who helped fabricate the lies that were used to justify the invasion of Iraq in 2003. Rumsfeld was also a member of the Project For a New American Century, which published a document outlining the Neocon strategy for the Middle East and how they needed a “new Pearl Harbor” type of attack on America in order to implement it. This is a whole other issue in and of itself, but since Rumsfeld was involved in such sinister activities with the Bush administration, it is interesting to see that he was also the CEO of the company some claim was responsible for getting sodium fluoride added to the drinking water of cities around the country. Many believe that it was Rumsfeld’s job to get this done, with the goal of drugging the population on a large scale. Recall Obama’s science czar John Holdren who proposed adding a sterilant to the water supply.

There is conflicting science and conflicting claims about the effects of drinking water containing sodium fluoride. The medical establishment denies any side effects from the chemical being consumed, but there are also medical doctors and scientists who say it dumbs people down and shouldn’t be drank. We shouldn’t put it past the secret establishment to drug the people through the water supply, so as a precaution it is advised to drink bottled water without the sodium fluoride additive, or have a filtering system installed on your tap water at home. There are also atmospheric water generators that take the water out of the air and can generate several gallons of clean drinking water per day, but these systems are very expensive.

Science and Technology

Advances in science and technology are a double edged sword, creating amazing communication abilities and life saving devices, but also creating powerful killing machines and nightmarish mind control devices capable of implanting thoughts into people’s minds through invisible radio waves. Such a claim may spark an image of a tin foil hat, but as you will soon learn, such technology is very real.

In the New World Order, advanced technology is sometimes looked at with suspicion due to the capacity for abuse and the corrupt power-hungry elite and politicians who are in control of such technology. Chemtrails, weather modification, HAARP, Eugenics, secret and immoral medical testing and more, are often mentioned as proof of such abuse. Some of these subjects had been considered conspiracy theories by most people for decades, but have recently been the focus of headlines around the world admitting such technology exists and has been used in the past, or is currently being used today.

HAARP

The High Frequency Active Auroral Research Program (HAARP) is allegedly an “investigation project” that is funded by the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA), which is an agency of the Department of Defense. The US Air Force and the Navy are also involved with HAARP and claim its purpose is to investigate the ionosphere and any communication or surveillance capabilities it may enable. The project was started in 1993 and is located north of Gakona, Alaska. Photos that are available of some of the facility look like acres and acres of radio antennas numbering approximately 180 total, which are over 70 feet tall and are all linked together to form one large antenna. It’s reported that this antenna system can aim 3.6 million watts of energy into a specific location of the ionosphere. The largest legal AM radio station in America broadcasts 50 thousand watts, making HAARP 72 times more powerful.

Suspicions and controversy over HAARP grew shortly after its creation when scientists familiar with such technology claimed that it was being developed as a weapon capable of knocking out missiles, enemy satellites, and even causing earthquakes if desired.

HAARP is only one of several ELF (Extremely Low Frequency) wave transmitters. The United States owns three different facilities which are located in Gakona, Alaska; Fairbanks, Alaska; and one in Arecibo, Puerto Rico. Russia also has a similar facility in Vasilsursk, and the European Union has one in Tromso, Norway.

In the 1980s a physicist named Bernard Eastlund developed some of the concepts later used in HAARP and proposed using radio frequency waves to affect the ionosphere in a way that would disable enemy missiles and knock out targeted satellite communications, but the technology has far more dangerous capabilities than this.

A brief series on the History Channel called That’s Impossible featured an episode that dedicated some time to looking into such technology and concluded, “Working in tandem, these transmitters could potentially alter the weather anywhere in the world, changing the jet streams course entirely, triggering massive rain storms or droughts. Even hurricane steering would be possible by heating up the atmosphere and building up high pressured domes that could deflect or change the course of hurricanes.”

Dr. Brooks Agnew, of the Phoenix Science Foundation, used ELF waves to discover underground pockets of oil and gas in what is called earth tomography. He believes that this same technology accidentally triggered an earthquake in 1987 in Roseburg, Oregon. Dr. Agnew reported that as soon as his team energized the ELF wave generator there was a 4 to 4.5 earthquake. In the episode of That’s Impossible, Dr. Agnew designed and built a scale model of the ground conditions found in Rosenberg, and also had a small ELF wave generator aimed at it. As soon as he turned the device on, a large rock sitting on a slanted slope representing a fault line, immediately slid downward. In this demonstration he used a simple 30 watt stereo speaker to generate the ELF waves. Remember, HAARP is capable of blasting 3.6 million watts.

In 1995 a book titled Angels Don’t Play This HAARP: Advances in Tesla Technology was published by Nick Begich Jr., who is the son of Congressman Nick Begich Sr., (D-Alaska) and brother of Senator Mark Begich (D-Alaska), where he claimed that the project in its present stage could be used for “geophysical warfare.”

In August 2002, Russia issued a press release about HAARP reading, “The U.S. is creating new integral geophysical weapons that may influence the near-Earth medium with high-frequency radio waves…The significance of this qualitative leap could be compared to the transition from cold steel to firearms, or from conventional weapons to nuclear weapons. This new type of weapon differs from previous types in that the near-Earth medium becomes at once an object of direct influence and its component.”[clxxxi]

This statement is interesting because Russia has its own ionospheric heater system nearly identical to HAARP which is called Sura, and the real reason for issuing the statement showing concern over HAARP was believed to be due to America withdrawing from the Russian-American Anti-Ballistic Missile Treaty in 2002.

The Convention on the Prohibition of Military or Any Other Hostile Use of Environmental Modification Techniques is an international treaty that was signed by over 75 different countries in 1978, prohibiting the military or other entities acting on behalf of a government from using environmental modification techniques in a hostile manor. Why was there a treaty signed that weather modification won’t be used as a weapon if it isn’t possible for such a thing to occur? Obviously people familiar with the technology are worried about it and are aware of the disastrous effects.

With all the hysteria over so-called climate change and global warming, it should be noted that some believe HAARP is capable of causing such a thing since it is an ionosphere heater and tampers with the earth’s atmosphere.

Former Governor of Minnesota Jesse Ventura hosted a TV show on the Tru network called Conspiracy Theory and investigated HAARP in one episode. As Ventura and his video team were attempting to enter the facility, all of their equipment malfunctioned.

Ventura stated in a radio interview promoting the show, “I went all the way up to Alaska and went to this location…it’s a very interesting thing going on up there. It falls under the military, and yet it is given the distinction of being an unclassified research center, yet I was not allowed in. Now, bear in mind I used to have a top secret clearance with the United States government during my six years as a member of underwater demolition team twelve and SEAL team one. I was also a mayor and a governor, yet I was not allowed to go into this supposed unclassified research center. If it’s unclassified [then] anybody should be able to go in there.[clxxxii]

This episode of Conspiracy Theory left Jesse Ventura visibly upset after he learned that HAARP could be used as a massive weapon and nobody would even know. Ventura’s show was historic because it marked the first time that certain issues were addressed in a serious manner on TV.

Microwave Auditory Effect

The subject of mind control is an extensive and disturbing one, and for this book, we will focus only on one aspect of this practice involving the microwave auditory effect, which is a way of using microwave frequencies to beam sounds and even words and sentences into peoples’ heads which are perceived auditorially by them but appear to be coming from inside the person’s own head or from God. For an expanded analysis of mind control including brainwashing and a history of the MK-ULTRA program you may wish to read The Resistance Manifesto.

While the subject of mind control is vast with the majority of methods involving some kind of physical contact with the subject, technology using radio waves to literally beam thoughts into peoples’ heads is infinitely more insidious because it can be used covertly without the consent or knowledge of the person being targeted. Again, such an idea sounds absurd, but you will discover is very real.

Such experiments have been carried out at the Walter Reed Army Institute of Research in what was called Project Pandora where externally induced auditory input microwave audiograms of words or oral sounds created the effect of hearing voices. An Air Force document on the subject stated, “The signal can be a ‘message from God’ that can warn the enemy of impending doom, or encourage the enemy to surrender.”

In 1996 the United States Air Force submitted a patent which was later awarded on October 22, 2002 for a device called the Radio Frequency Hearing Effect (Patent number: 6,470,214) where the description reads, “A method of encoding an input audio signal a(t) to produce a double sideband output signal having a ωc carrier frequency, which when transmitted to the head of a receiving subject, will by the radio frequency hearing effect induce a thermal-acoustic signal in the bone/tissue material of the head that replicates the input audio signal and is conducted by the bone/tissue structure of the head to the inner ear where it is demodulated by the normal processes of the cochlea and converted to nerve signals which are sent to the brain, thereby enabling intelligible speech to be perceived by the brain.”

In 2007, the Washington Post ran an article titled Mind Games which investigated claims of individuals who believed the government was using such devices on them. The beginning of the article makes it seem as if the people are crazy, but then further into it the article actually outlined some of the technology and research the government has been involved in that is able to accomplish such a thing. It reads, “In 2002, the Air Force Research Laboratory patented precisely such a technology: using microwaves to send words into someone’s head. That work is frequently cited on mind-control Web sites. Rich Garcia, a spokesman for the research laboratory’s directed energy directorate, declined to discuss that patent or current or related research in the field, citing the lab’s policy not to comment on its microwave work.”[clxxxiii]

A successful African American novelist named Gloria Naylor, best known for her novel The Women of Brewster Place, which was made into a miniseries by Oprah Winfrey, has a lesser known book titled 1996 which describes her experiences as an alleged victim of microwave mind control. She begins, “I didn’t want to tell this story. It’s going to take courage. Perhaps more courage than I possess, but they’ve left me no alternatives…I am in a battle for my mind. If I stop now, they’ll have won, and I will lose myself.”

She explains how she thought she had a mental illness at times such as schizophrenia, but says she witnessed other strange occurrences such as people mimicking her every movement and people driving by her isolated vacation home.

“I would lie in bed while the conversations were going on, and I’d ask: Maybe it is schizophrenia?” she wrote. The voices, she said, would taunt her and swear at her, telling her she was stupid and that she couldn’t write. Naylor went to see a psychiatrist and was given a prescription for an antipsychotic medication, but it didn’t stop the voices. She says she was a victim of such harassment by the voices for almost four years until she discovered mind-control forums on the Internet and learned about technology and secret government programs involving such phenomena.

Whether or not Gloria Naylor was simply hallucinating and had some kind of mental illness that eventually was cured, or whether she was a victim of microwave auditory effect technology may never be known. If in fact she was not hallucinating or having some kind of neurological problem causing her to perceive the voices, then why would she be targeted by such technology? One possible explanation could be that someone who worked on such systems and has access to the microwave transmitters knew Naylor personally and perhaps had a personal vendetta against her and found joy and revenge in tormenting her. Perhaps an ex-boyfriend from high school or college later became involved in the government program and chose to target her for his personal amusement.

Perhaps she was chosen as an unknowing test subject who was toyed with and monitored to study what the results of such harassment would be. Or, perhaps maybe she really did have a temporary bout with a mental illness and after learning about such technology her mind somehow corrected itself and was healed. But the fact that such technology does exist leads one to wonder what kinds of horrible tests have been carried out to study the effects of this technology.

Certainly the CIA or the Department of Defense would want to see what people would do when they all of a sudden started hearing voices in their head. Surely such tests were carried out on ordinary citizens without their knowledge and their reactions were monitored to learn how they would react to such a scary occurrence. And surely most of these victims kept such a thing to themselves and didn’t even tell their closest friends or loved ones out of the fear that they would be seen as completely insane for “hearing voices.”

But just think for a minute about the ramifications of such technology. Such a system could easily make people think that they were hearing God, or even the Devil, or that they were going completely insane. And how would they know such a system was being used, since practically nobody is even aware that such technology even exists. There would be no evidence that such a system was being used on a targeted individual, unless the device’s operator was apprehended with some strange looking electronic device that was seized as evidence and analyzed by electrical engineers who would likely be able to determine its purpose. And people who are victims of such technology would most likely never mention it to anyone since “hearing voices” is the epitome of being “crazy.” It is for these reasons that this author feels it is extremely important that the public be made aware of such technology, and that we learn how to detect, and prevent its use.

Khalid Sheikh Mohammed, the alleged mastermind behind the September 11th 2001 terrorist attacks was said to claim that Allah (the God of Islam) had visited him in his prison cell one night and told him to cooperate with his captors and that things would be much easier on him and his fellow detainees. If this report is accurate and he actually did believe that God visited him in his cell one night and told him this, then it certainly would not be far-fetched to think that the microwave auditory effect was used on him to make him think that he was hearing God. This is, of course, just a hypothesis, and if such a thing did occur it likely would never be declassified because of the incredible power that such a technique holds. Think about this.

What if such a strategy was used in prisons? What if officials used this technology to speak to high profile suspects and told them to confess to their crimes and not to tell anyone that “God” had told them to do so. Or, what if this strategy was used to trick the person into doing, or saying things that are completely immoral? What if “God” told the prisoner to kill another inmate, or to confess to the crime even though they were innocent? If the person believes in God, such an experience would be hard to resist. After all, if God told you to confess to a crime you didn’t commit, then surely there must be some bigger picture that he sees and you don’t, or else why would he tell you to confess?

The ramifications of abuse of such systems are endless. How many politicians, business leaders, or political activists could be targeted by such technology and have an experience that “God” was talking to them. The possibilities are extremely disturbing to think about and this is the same technology that will most likely be used by the counterfeit Christ of the New World Order in an attempt to convince everyone that he has supernatural powers and is God himself.

Sonic Nausea Systems

While using the microwave audio effect may be limited to those with fairly complicated technology, a widely available and inexpensive device that uses ultra-sonic waves to induce headaches and nausea can be purchased on the Internet or in catalogs selling law enforcement products. The Shomer-Tech catalog sells such a device for only $29.99. The online catalog reads, “Hiding this device in your inconsiderate neighbor’s house might put an end to their late-night parties. The abusive bureaucrat’s office, the executive lunchroom... the possibilities are endless for that small portion of inventive payback.”

Another more advanced version is also sold called the Super Sonic Nausea system which is advertised to, “disrupt speeches, demonstrations, crowd dynamics, etc. This device has been used to ‘influence’ more of these than you might expect. Deployed near the podium, you might just have a case of an increasingly un-impressive speaker with diminished sharpness and lacking concentration, or perhaps is even unable to complete his presentation. Or, loitering youths on your property might be enticed to move along with no confrontations necessary.”

This “Super Sonic Nausea system” is said to be a “rarely-available government model” that is produced by a company called DSG Laboratories. This version sells for only $99.99. Just imagine for a minute what kind of similar devices are in existence but not made commercially available. Such devices are extremely small and portable, and could easily be covertly used to inflict discomfort on any number of people, in any number of situations, without anyone even having a clue.

Chemtrails

Since approximately 1995 or 1996, increasing numbers of people have been intrigued by, and suspicious of what look like white contrails (short for condensation trails) that follow the path of jetliners in the sky but do not seem to dissipate as fast as such vapor trails used to in the past. These new type of trails that linger in the sky have been called “chemtrails,” short for chemical trails, and are believed by some to be the result of some kind of additive that is being mixed with jet fuel. These suspected additives are said to be used for a variety of reasons, usually for some kind of weather modification or to expose massive numbers of people to some kind of chemicals intended to alter our cognitive abilities.

Skeptics of these claims say that on most days when people see what they call chemtrails (chemical trails), they are really only seeing contrails (condensation trails) caused by a combination of certain atmospheric conditions and a newer type of jet engine called the high bypass ratio turbofan engine, which was first placed on the market in the mid-1990s. This is the same time that people started to notice these strange vapor trails that lingered in the sky for longer than they had in the past. Chemtrail skeptics say that the newer high bypass ratio engines compress the air and the moisture to a higher degree than the older types of engines would, and say this is the reason for the trails lingering for longer periods of time than in the past.

Sometimes the vapor trail disappears right after it comes out of the back of the jet, and other times it lingers in the sky and slowly disperses. Some people call these the chemtrails, while others say atmospheric conditions and high bypass ratio turbofan engines cause this to occur. Adding to the controversy over chemtrails are the numerous instances of governments in multiple countries having declassified various programs where it has been admitted that they sprayed large amounts of dangerous chemicals and biological agents into the air.

Mainstream News Coverage

KSLA news in Louisiana aired a segment on November 9th 2007, which asked, “Could a strange substance found by a southwest Arkansas man be part of a government test? Well, that’s the question at the heart of a phenomenon called ‘chemtrails’ now getting wide spread attention.”[clxxxiv] The segment covers a man who began seeing suspicious trails in the sky that seemed to differ from the typical condensation trails left behind jets. The man says he also noticed small particles falling from the sky from the trials, so he collected some in bowls that he placed out in his back yard. KSLA news had the samples tested at a laboratory and found that they contained high levels of Barium, a toxic substance. 6.8 parts per million, in fact, which is over three times the level deemed toxic by the EPA. There were other strange chemicals in the samples as well.

In May 2006, NBC in Los Angeles, California aired a similar segment investigating the phenomena and interviewed several individuals who were concerned about chemtrails.

HR 2977

On October 2, 2001, Congressman Dennis Kucinich from Ohio introduced a bill (H. R. 2977) titled the “Space Preservation Act of 2001” which mentions chemtrails as an exotic weapon. The bill was to “preserve the cooperative, peaceful uses of space for the benefit of all humankind by permanently prohibiting the basing of weapons in space by the United States, and to require the President to take action and implement a world treaty banning space-based weapons.”

Dennis Kucinich is an interesting Congressman who doesn’t seem to be concerned about addressing controversial issues which are outside of the mainstream political paradigm. In 2008, he addressed Congress with 35 articles of impeachment against George W. Bush, and read them out loud in their entirety on the floor of the House of Representatives. Among the reasons he listed for impeachment were lies about the 9/11 attacks, secretly torturing detainees, and illegally wiretapping American citizens.

In Pop Culture

Alternative rock singer, Beck, released a song titled “Chemtrails” on his 2008 album, Modern Guilt. Some lyrics say, “I can’t believe what we’ve seen outside…You and me watching the jets go by.” On April 27, 2009, the musician Prince mentioned chemtrails during an interview on PBS with Tavis Smiley. During the interview Prince discusses a DVD by comedian and activist Dick Gregory and explains that, “he said something that really hit home about this phenomenon of chemtrails.” Prince goes on to mention an increase in aircraft trails that coincided with an increase in fighting and arguing in his neighborhood.

On March 3, 2009, a television station in Australia aired a film titled Toxic Skies, which starred Anne Heche who plays a medical doctor investigating a series of mysterious illnesses. She concludes that the illnesses are due to “chemtrails” which are described as toxic chemicals added to aircraft fuel and dispersed over the population though the exhaust. Toxic Skies was written by Andrew Erin and Kyle Hart.

Unclassified US Army Testing of Bio Agents

In 1977 the US Army unclassified hundreds of pages of documents titled “US Army Activity in the US Biological Warfare Programs” which detail that 239 populated areas were contaminated with biological agents between 1949 and 1969 by the Army in secret testing programs.

One test involved scientists disguised as ordinary passengers who were spraying bacteria in Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport.[clxxxv] Another involved a jet releasing material over Victoria, Texas.[clxxxvi] The report includes information about a test where a Navy ship sprayed material in the San Francisco bay that traveled more than thirty miles. Other tests involved similar spraying of agents on New York City’s subway system, which affected people with weak immune systems.[clxxxvii]

Government Accountability Office Report

In February, 2008, the Government Accountability Office (GAO) released a report titled, Chemical and Biological Defense, DOD and VA Need to Improve Efforts to Identify and Notify Individuals Potentially Exposed during Chemical and Biological Tests which admitted that tens of thousands of people in the military, as well as civilians, may have been exposed to biological agents at the hands of the Department of Defense.

Several years earlier in 2003, the Department of Defense reported that 5,842 military personnel and approximately 350 civilians were potentially exposed during testing between 1962 and 1973 in a program called Project 112. Many of the people who were identified as being subjected to these secret tests without their knowledge have suffered from long term illnesses as a result.[clxxxviii]

Project SHAD

Another on the long list of government experiments using unwilling humans as test subjects occurred during Project SHAD, which stands for Project Shipboard Hazard and Defense. This program used primarily United States military personnel and was part of Project 112, which began in 1962 during the Kennedy Administration.

The official purpose of Project SHAD was “to identify U.S. war ships vulnerabilities to attacks with biological or chemical warfare agents and to develop procedures to respond to such attacks while maintaining a war fighting capability.”

46 tests were done involving exposing military personnel to chemical and biological agents without their knowledge. VX nerve gas, Sarin, and Tabun gas (all of which are classified as weapons of mass destruction by the United Nations) were some of the chemical agents used, as well as biological agents including Bacillus globigii, ociella burnetti (which causes Q fever) and Francisella (which causes rabbit fever).

The US government officially denied that Project SHAD even existed until 1998, and as a result of this denial, soldiers who were affected by the tests were not able to receive any aid for any health issues they had as a result of the tests. If it were not for a dedicated investigative journalist named Eric Longabardi, who began looking into the program in 1994, the public nor the victims may have never been aware of its existence. Years later in 2002, Congressional hearings were held on the subject which prompted a class action lawsuit on behalf of Navy personnel who were exposed during the testing.

Weather Modification

Fairly recently at the turn of the 21st century, any discussion of modifying the weather such as causing massive rain storms or creating blue skies, was labeled nothing more than a conspiracy theory or fanciful thinking. But incredibly effective and powerful weather modification programs have not only been declassified by American and British governments that occurred back as far as the 1950s, but are now openly discussed in mainstream news and such practices are becoming common knowledge.

Besides simply causing rain or clearing clouds, the practice of weather modification holds the power to be used as a massive weapon against an enormous geographic area without the population even suspecting anything other than bizarre weather.

An interesting series first aired on the History Channel in the summer of 2009 titled That’s Impossible, which covered the existence of various advanced technology that seems as if it was pulled directly from science fiction movies. One episode covered “Weather Warfare” and presented evidence that the U.S. military was able to make massive and strategic changes to weather around the world, including creating hurricanes or torrential rain storms. Brief clips of the show can probably be found on YouTube.

Project Cumulus

In the 1950s the British government developed a weather modification program called Project Cumulus which used cloud seeding and tested the potential of causing massive amounts of rain to effectively bog down enemy movement due to the downpour and saturated ground conditions.

On August 16, 1952, a major flood occurred in the town of Lynmouth in north Devon after nine inches (229 millimeters) of rain fell in one day, causing the East Lyn River to overflow. This flood destroyed homes, businesses, and bridges, and killed thirty-five people. Several days before this disaster, a seeding experiment from Project Cumulus took place over southern England. While it is denied, of course, that Project Cumulus had anything to do with the miraculous flooding, it certainly doesn’t take a stretch of the imagination to think that the two events were not merely a coincidence.

In fact, an old radio broadcast on Radio 4 contains an interview of an aeronautical engineer and pilot named Alan Yates, who worked on Project Cumulus at the time, where he explains, “I was told that the rain had been the heaviest for several years—and all out of a sky which looked summery...there was no disguising the fact that the seedsman had said he’d make it rain, and he did. Toasts were drunk to meteorology and it was not until the BBC news bulletin [about the Lynmouth flood] was read later on, that a stony silence fell on the company.”[clxxxix]

Project Cumulus was allegedly closed down after this tragedy, and classified documents involving the project went missing.[cxc] The UK is not the only government to meddle with such forces. The United States not only investigated the possibilities of such science, but actually used it as a weapon during the Vietnam War.

Project Popeye

The United States military was involved in a cloud seeding operation during the Vietnam War which extended and enhanced the monsoon season over Laos and caused landslides along roadways, softened road surfaces, and washed out river crossings. Operation Popeye, as it was called, went on from 1967 to 1972 and was considered a success.

Investigative reporter Jack Anderson published a story in March 1971 about these operations, and the following year Operation Popeye was mentioned in the Pentagon Papers[cxci] and also in an article in the New York Times.[cxcii]

The stories led to investigations by members of Congress and then the U.S. House and Senate passed a series of resolutions banning environmental warfare. The Environmental Modification Convention (ENMOD), formally the Convention on the Prohibition of Military or Any Other Hostile Use of Environmental Modification Techniques is an international treaty that prohibits the use of such environmental manipulation.

China’s Admitted Modifications

In October 2009 China’s air force used a variety of chemicals to clear the smog out of the air for a parade celebrating the 60th anniversary of Communist China. The day before the parade, chemicals were dispersed in the sky which caused a light rain and cleared the fog.

The senior air force meteorologist in China bragged, “Only a handful of countries in the world could organize such large-scale, magic-like weather modification.”[cxciii] The parade was the biggest in China’s history.

The meteorologist said they used certain chemicals to make it rain, and if the rain persisted for too long threatening the parade, then they had another batch prepared to spray that would stop it.

Clearing the skies of smoggy air was only just the beginning of China’s weather modifications that were widely reported in 2009. Just one month later, the Chinese state media reported that their meteorologists had made it snow in Beijing after seeding the clouds, causing the country’s earliest snow fall. The government implemented such a strategy in an effort to fight a continuing drought.

“We won’t miss any opportunity of artificial precipitation since Beijing is suffering from the lingering drought,” said Zhang Qiang, head of the Beijing Weather Modification Office.[cxciv]

Russia’s Use of Weather Modification

In 2009 the mayor of Moscow publicly promised that he would keep it from snowing on the city by using the Russian Air Force to spray chemicals into storm clouds before they reached the capitol, causing them to release their snow outside the city. One of the major reasons for the project is to ease the city from the need to constantly plow the streets, which are usually covered in snow from November to March.

In past years Moscow had used weather modification to ensure that rain didn’t spoil their Victory Day and City Day parades. “You know how every year on City Day and Victory Day we create the weather?” Yury Luzhkov, the mayor stated. “Well, we should do the same with the snow! Then outside Moscow there will be more moisture, a bigger harvest, while for us it won’t snow as much. It will make financial sense.”[cxcv]

His plan was approved by the Moscow City Council. Such a feat involves having the Air Force spray cement power, dry ice, or silver iodide in the clouds at a cost of $6 million dollars, which is reportedly half of what the city would spend on street clearing. Some are not happy about the plan because the outlining suburbs of the city will get the extra snow falling on them as a result.

Eugenics

Dictionary.com defines Eugenics as, “the study of or belief in the possibility of improving the qualities of the human species or a human population, especially by such means as discouraging reproduction by persons having genetic defects or presumed to have inheritable undesirable traits (negative eugenics) or encouraging reproduction by persons presumed to have inheritable desirable traits (positive eugenics).”

The practice of Eugenics was at the core of Nazi Germany’s occult and racist ideologies and fueled their belief that the Aryan race needed to be purified from other inferior races so they could develop into god-men in future generations. The practice of Eugenics essentially takes the breeding practices used in animals such as race horses or show dogs, and applies it to humans with the hope of desired traits being passed onto the next generation, while at the same time preventing others from breeding because they are not seen as fit enough to pass on their genes.

If one subscribes to the ideologies of Eugenics, as Adolf Hitler and the Nazi party did, it is difficult not to reduce humans down to nothing more than animals and develop a social Darwinist world view where one who is dubbed “more genetically fit” looks at others who are not, as if they are subhuman, or not as valuable of a person.

Since the rule of the Nazi party has long since passed, many think that the practice of Eugenics crumbled along with them, but some see the modern elite or Illuminati as continuing the practice through covert means, attempting to pass their intelligence onto the next generation of Illuminati members, while continuing the structure of a small intellectual and wealthy elite being in power and ruling over the dumbed down and inferior masses. Well before Hitler came to power, back throughout history, the upper class of every society enjoyed better living conditions, food, medical care, and education, which they did their best to preserve and prevent the lower classes from partaking in. Year upon year of poor nutrition, health care, and harsh working conditions kept the lower classes of people from fulfilling their true potential as human beings.

Many who oppose the New World Order and have investigated the secret societies which hold the true power and wealth, see such Eugenics practices continuing today by the masses of population in developed countries living on processed food that is filled with preservatives or genetically modified organisms (GMO), while the elite enjoy healthy natural foods and home cooked meals prepared by their chefs and dieticians. Many also believe that the elite Illuminati and their social networks do not take the vaccines given to most people, believing that the vaccines themselves and their mercury preservatives cause neurological damage and have other biological harmful effects that are inflicted on the masses, while the elite quietly avoid such things.

Add to this the widespread abuse of alcohol and drugs, and people’s pathetic eating and exercise habits, and you clearly have a recipe for tens of millions of unhealthy people who actually enjoy their own slow and gradual deaths.

A popular evolutionary theorist from the London School of Economics, named Oliver Curry, predicts that the human race will one day split into two separate species, one being a ruling elite who are intelligent and attractive, and the underclass of dumb, ugly, goblin-like creatures. Such an event, Curry says, will happen 100,000 years in the future, and believes the human race will reach its peak by the year 3000, at which point the subspecies will begin to regress.[cxcvi]

“Physical features will be driven by indicators of health, youth and fertility that men and women have evolved to look for in potential mates,” says a report written by Curry which also says that humans will be between 6ft and 7ft tall and live up to 120 years.

Curry’s report, which was commissioned for the Bravo TV channel, says that men will develop deeper voices, symmetrical facial features, and bigger penises, while women all will have large breasts, hairless skin, and glossy hair.

Dr. Curry said, “The report suggests that the future of man will be a story of the good, the bad and the ugly.”

Such ideas are similar to those found in H. G. Wells 1895 novel, The Time Machine, where Wells describes the human race as having evolved into two different species, the healthy and intelligent ruling class, the Eloi, and the ugly, slave class, the Morlocks.

Margaret Sanger

Next to Adolf Hitler, perhaps the other name most closely associated with Eugenics is Margaret Sanger, who was an American birth control activist in the early 1900s and later founded Planned Parenthood. Sanger was a negative Eugenicist, meaning that she believed that human hereditary traits can be improved through social interventions such as selective breeding, sterilization, and even euthanasia.

In her 1932 book, A Plan for Peace, Sanger proposed that the American government “Keep the doors of immigration closed to the entrance of certain aliens whose condition is known to be detrimental to the stamina of the race, such as feebleminded, idiots, morons, insane, syphilitic, epileptic, criminal, professional prostitutes, and others in this class barred by the immigration laws of 1924.”[cxcvii]

In this same book, Sanger urged that the government, “Apply a stern and rigid policy of sterilization and segregation to that grade of population whose progeny is already tainted or whose inheritance is such that objectionable traits may be transmitted to offspring.”[cxcviii]

Her first pamphlet on the subject read, “It is a vicious cycle; ignorance breeds poverty and poverty breeds ignorance. There is only one cure for both, and that is to stop breeding these things. Stop bringing to birth children whose inheritance cannot be one of health or intelligence. Stop bringing into the world children whose parents cannot provide for them. Herein lies the key of civilization. For upon the foundation of an enlightened and voluntary motherhood shall a future civilization emerge.”

In 1923 Sanger opened the first birth control clinic in the United States after receiving grants from John D. Rockefeller Jr’s Bureau of Social Hygiene. Further grants were made from Rockefeller but were done so anonymously after 1924 to avoid the Rockefeller’s connection with Sanger’s agenda.

Global Warming / Climate Change

Global warming, as nearly everyone knows, is the idea that human activities and industries are dramatically contributing to changes in the earth’s temperatures which proponents claim threatens humanity. Supporters of this idea have recently changed the terminology they use to “climate change,” instead of “global warming” since regions of the earth are actually cooling, thus conflicting with their idea that the earth is getting warmer. Former Vice President Al Gore has undoubtedly become the face of global warming advocates since his 2006 film An Inconvenient Truth, which won him an academy award for best documentary.

While no decent human being would want to pollute the earth by littering or dumping harmful chemicals into the environment or not properly disposing of them, many global warming advocates have criticized people for setting their thermostat too low during the Summer and running the air conditioner for extended periods of time to keep their home or business cool and comfortable. These same green freaks also get angry at people for not using specific types of light bulbs or appliances. Such fanatics have been using a new term saying that such activities create a “carbon footprint,” which is the total amount of greenhouse gas (GHG) that is emitted by an organization, person, or a specific product.

“Carbon footprints” and “greenhouse gas emissions” are seen as a threat to humanity by global warming fanatics, and bigger government and new taxes and regulations are said to be the only hope for mankind. Speaker of the House, Nancy Pelosi once stated in a conversation about global warming that “I’m trying to save the planet,”[cxcix] a very lofty goal for a politician, when such a cheesy slogan has usually only been said by comic book superheroes like Superman.

Those who simply don’t believe the propaganda and fear mongering are often labeled “global warming deniers” with the intentional connection to the term “holocaust denier.” The biggest pushers of the man-made global warming theory, such as Al Gore, who is basically the symbolic leader of the idea since his 2006 film An Inconvenient Truth, frequently say “the debate is over,” or “all scientists agree” with their ideas, when in reality, there are scores of scientists who refute the man-made global warming propaganda, and some even say the earth is cooling.

Most of the key players behind the global warming propaganda, such as politicians, scientists, and businessmen, have large financial interests in new government regulations which supposedly will work to save the world.

Perhaps the brains behind the climate change hysteria is a billionaire named Maurice Strong who is considered to be one of the leading proponents of the United Nations involvement in international affairs. Strong was the CEO of Petro-Canada, one of Canada’s largest oil companies, and is on the board of directors for the Chicago Climate Exchange (CCX), which is the first greenhouse gas emission registry reduction system for emission sources. 10% of the Chicago Climate Exchange is owned by Goldman Sachs (GS) and another 10% is owned by Generation Investment Management (GIM), which is an investment firm started by Al Gore who is also the chairman. Hank Paulson, who was the Treasury Secretary under George W. Bush and former CEO of Goldman Sachs, was also a founding member of GIM.

While Maurice Strong was born in Canada, he spends most of his time living in China where he has been working to build the communist country into a superpower, and continues to use his wealth and influence to strengthen the grip of climate change propagandists.

One of the most visible and outspoken people who says that man-made global warming is a hoax perpetuated by those who have financial interests in the matter is Lord Christopher Monckton, who is a former advisor to Margaret Thatcher. Monkton asserts that a man named Ben Santer deleted parts from the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change report (IPCC), that showed conflicting data about climate change, in order to make the report appear to fully endorse the idea of man-made climate change. Ben Santer doesn’t deny these claims, and in fact admitted that he removed parts of the report before its publication. The IPCC was created by the United Nations Environment Program (UNEP), which interestingly enough, was headed up by Maurice Strong after the UN General Assembly unanimously voted him in as the chair.

The Kyoto Protocol

The Kyoto Protocol is a formal agreement of the United Nations aimed at fighting global warming that was adopted back in 1997. It is part of the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC or FCCC), which is an international treaty with the goal of achieving “stabilization of greenhouse gas concentrations in the atmosphere at a level that would prevent dangerous anthropogenic interference with the climate system.”

As of November 2009, 187 states have signed and ratified this protocol, which states that the countries commit themselves to a reduction of four greenhouse gases (carbon dioxide, methane, nitrous oxide, sulphur hexafluoride) by 5.2% from their levels in 1990.

Climate-gate

People’s suspicions that climate change was a hoax aimed at justifying carbon taxes, more government regulations, and the New World Order, had many of their suspicions confirmed after an incident that came to be known as “climate-gate” ensued. One of the most prominent institutions that is credited with studying “climate change” is the Hadley Climate Research Unit in Britain. In November 2009 Russian hackers were able to steal thousands of documents including emails that were exchanged between climate scientists over the previous ten years and published the information on the Internet. Some of the email exchanges show how scientists were trying to manipulate data, hide information showing declining temperatures, and prevent other scientific research from being published in academic journals that is counter to the global warming propaganda being pushed by man-made global warming advocates.

The emails were admitted to be authentic, although officials at Hadley deny there were any attempts to manipulate data to conform with the idea of man-made global warming.

In one exchange the center’s director, Phil Jones, emailed Michael E. Mann at Pennsylvania State University and asked whether academics who question the link between human activities and global warming should have their work published in the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) report, which is a global organization that evaluates the risk of so-called climate change allegedly caused by human activity.

“I can’t see either of these papers being in the next IPCC report,” Jones wrote. “Kevin and I will keep them out somehow—even if we have to redefine what the peer-review literature is!”

In another email, Phil Jones and Michael E. Mann discuss how they can pressure an academic journal not to accept the work of scientists whose research doesn’t conform with their climate change belief. Michael Mann wrote, “Perhaps we should encourage our colleagues in the climate research community to no longer submit to, or cite papers in, this journal.”[cc]

In one message sent to a long list of colleagues, Phil Jones himself wrote of having completed a “trick” with recent temperature data to “hide the decline.”

An email from Kevin Trenberth of the National Center for Atmospheric Research in Boulder, Colorado spoke of the unusually cool autumn that Colorado was experiencing, and went on to say, “The fact is that we can’t account for the lack of warming at the moment and it is a travesty that we can’t.”

Phil Jones, the head of the Climatic Research Unit, released a statement saying, “My colleagues and I accept that some of the published e-mails do not read well,” but still denied that they showed any fraud was occurring.

Left wing radical Nancy Pelosi, who is an avid climate change pusher, was asked about the emails and if they changed her stance on man-made global warming. “You call it ‘Climate-gate,’ I call it ‘email-theft-gate,’” she answered, and was more concerned about the emails being stolen than their shocking content.

Former British Prime Minister Tony Blair commented on the climate-gate scandal and said the science may not be “as certain as its proponents allege” but he still believed the world should act to fight climate change, and said it would be “grossly irresponsible” not to.

The popular novelist Michael Crichton, author of Jurassic Park, wrote a book titled State of Fear (2004) which contains a plot centered around scientists and politicians who conspire to create public panic about global warming. Crichton is known for writing novels with an underlying factual basis, and in State of Fear he includes twenty pages of footnotes which he said provide facts found in the non-plotline elements of his story.

Arnold Schwarzenegger’s Damage Control

Shortly after the climate-gate scandal began and wouldn’t go away, California governor Arnold Schwarzenegger pulled a publicity stunt where he displayed a map of San Francisco and warned that in one hundred years, much of it would be underwater due to rising sea levels caused by climate change. His map was unveiled on Treasure Island alongside Eric Schmidt, the CEO of Google, where Arnold said, “Within a century, Treasure Island, this place where we are right now, could be totally under water…It is technology in the end that will save us.” He also warned that 2.5 trillion dollars in property and assets were at risk.

The map he showed along with a propaganda video was posted on a new website www.climatechange.ca.gov. The video was narrated by Schwarzenegger and warned of California’s temperatures rising 7 degrees in the next century, water shortages, and virtually all snow melting on the mountains in California, which he said would, “nearly eliminate skiing, snowboarding, and other recreational activities.”

It’s interesting that Schwarzenegger is on board with the climate change advocates because he is a Republican, when this issue is clearly divided between party lines with many Republicans not believing the hype, while most Democrats embrace the idea in order to justify bigger government and more taxes and regulations. Schwarzenegger is an elite insider who has visited the Bohemian Grove and is friends with Nazis and Illuminati members, so it is no surprise that he is on board with the climate change fear-mongering.

Fox Admits Inserting Global Warming Propaganda in TV Shows

A short four minute promotional video produced in 2006 by News Corporation openly admits that executives have been incorporating global warming propaganda into popular television shows produced by Fox which is owned by News Corp. The video starts with Fox Television Chairman Gary Newman who says, “we want to set an example in our industry and other industries that no matter what the size of your carbon footprint is, you can make a difference.” The video then cuts to a montage of television shows which aired on Fox, and the global warming propaganda that News Corp. (Fox’s parent company) incorporated into those shows. Clips from Prison Break, The Simpsons, King of the Hill, My Name is Earl, Family Guy, 24, and more were all shows containing these messages.

For example, a clip of Family Guy shows a character in a car dealership where he says, “Look at all those Hummers…what kind of jerk would drive one of those?”

Kiefer Sutherland even gives a heartfelt message to the camera about reducing global warming. Dana Walden, Fox Television Chairman says, “the most powerful way that we could communicate the commitment on behalf of our company was to change the practices within the production as well as work in a message about global warming, about environmental changes, and about empowering people to take responsibility.”

Chairman Gary Newman echoes this admitting, “The biggest thing we have done is inserting messages about the environment into some of our content.”

Cap and Trade

Certain researchers and alternative radio hosts had been warning for years that a new kind of tax would one day be forced on the American people, and on citizens of countries around the world. This so-called “carbon tax” seemed like the figment of people’s imagination since it appeared too outrageous for governments to implement a global warming tax, but as the years went by, such a plan began to peak its head out from the secretive Bilderberg group meetings and into the halls of Congress and global conferences.

Cap and Trade (also called emissions trading) is an approach allegedly using economic incentives to reduce greenhouse gasses and pollution. The term Cap and Trade comes from the idea that a government or a global committee will set a limit, or a cap, on the amount of “pollution” that a factory (and possibly a household) can emit in a given period of time. These companies or households will purchase permits which grant them the right to have allowances or credits that represent their authorized amount of greenhouse gasses they may emit. These companies then cannot emit more than they are allowed to, because of their cap, unless they purchase more “credits.” These purchased credits are called a “trade,” which is basically a fee for emissions.

Carbon Footprint on Food Labels

As everyone knows, nearly every food product you buy at a grocery store has a nutritional label on it listing the ingredients, calories, fat content, carbohydrates, etc. Such labels are very useful in helping determine how much of a particular item we should consume (or if we should eat it at all) depending on our health and nutritional goals or needs. But in 2007 an odd new kind of food label began surfacing in Britain, which listed the greenhouse gas emissions created by the foods production, transport and disposal.

“More and more, businesses are looking for ways to reduce their impact on the environment. To help them achieve that we need a reliable, consistent way to measure these impacts that businesses recognize, trust and understand,” said Ian Pearson, Britain’s environment minister. “This will be fundamental in our efforts to move Britain towards a low-carbon economy in the decades ahead.”[cci]

This bizarre fear-mongering continued in the coming years. In 2009, ABC’s Good Morning America interviewed Michael Pollan, author of The Omnivore’s Dilemma, who discussed the carbon footprint left behind by a McDonald’s quarter-pounder with cheese.

Pollan said, “You need oil to make the fertilizer to grow the corn. You need petroleum to make the pesticides to grow the corn. You need oil to move it all around the country…The result is a product that takes a huge environmental toll and obviously takes a health toll as well.” He then said that a quarter-pounder amounts to 26 ounces of oil.

It will be interesting to see if the practice of listing a product’s carbon footprint on its packaging will become a trend that companies are pressured or forced to follow in the future.

The Day After Tomorrow

Perhaps the first major film, in what will likely be a long and growing list in the coming years, involving climate change was The Day After Tomorrow (2004). The film stars Dennis Quaid who plays a scientist who tries to alert the United Nations about global warming, but after his attempts fall on deaf ears, global warming causes glaciers to melt which affect ocean currents and disrupts the entire earth’s climate causing an ice age. The film grossed over 540 million dollars and was the second highest grossing movie not to be number 1 at the box office.

An interesting side note besides the film serving as a massive propaganda piece for climate change pushers, is that the Vice President in the film was played by Kenneth Welsh, who looks strikingly similar to the then Vice President Dick Cheney. The film was written, directed, and produced by Roland Emmerich, who admitted that he intended the characters of the President and the Vice President to convey criticism of the environmental policies of then President George W. Bush.[ccii]

Fringe Topics

When looking into the New World Order, one will find countless verifiable pieces of evidence that elite politicians have been covertly working to erode the Constitution and America’s sovereignty and integrate the country into a global government system, much of which has been accomplished through secret societies or private organizations like the Council on Foreign Relations, the Bilderberg group, the Skull and Bones society, and other Illuminati groups.

When someone is new to this information, many people may find some of the claims they come across unbelievable and perhaps incorrect, or even a hoax. After more study and tracing sources and references, many things that people once found hard to believe can be proven beyond a doubt to be factual. Other information, however, is more difficult to verify, and some does fall into the realm of speculation or conjecture.

On the fringe, one will find a large amount of information about a variety of topics connected to the New World Order, some of which is even considered far-fetched and crazy to many who are fairly aware of how strange the New World Order can be. Stories of aliens from other planets said to work with elite government officials, the shape-shifting reptilians, Satanism, and even organized ritual child abuse are subjects that are all connected in some way to the New World Order. Since people will inevitably come across such subjects as they continue on their journey down the rabbit hole, some of these fringe topics will be addressed briefly here in order for you to have a solid foundation of understanding when confronted with such ideas.

Satanism

While the satanic and Luciferian philosophies of elite secret societies have been briefly touched upon in this book, the subject is still often considered to be on the fringe of the New World Order. Elite politicians have openly stated their desire for a “New World Order” and we can easily see the corrupt legislation that hopes to further erode the Constitution and various liberties Americans have enjoyed for hundreds of years. It’s easy to document and prove the moral decay of society and the influence of the mainstream media on our culture, but the personal and private philosophies or spiritual beliefs of New World Order kingpins are not as easily shown.

Often the satanic and occult aspects of the New World Order turn people off because on the surface they seem completely ridiculous and absurd. Others aren’t too concerned with them because there is an abundance of evidence of corruption and greed that can more easily be exposed. But it is important to be familiar with the irrefutable evidence that elite politicians, bankers, and businessmen are deeply involved in the occult, and the occult plays a huge role in the creation of the New World Order. Helena Blavatsky’s The Secret Doctrine, Alice Bailey’s writings, the rituals of the Skull and Bones society and the Bohemian Grove clearly illustrate a Luciferian doctrine that the elite adhere to. This is one of the most shocking aspects to the New World Order, but when one fully understands that is the mindset of elite individuals, things begin to make more sense.

With that said, if you are attempting to educate others about the New World Order, I strongly advise that you carefully address the issue of Satanism and do not make it the central issue when explaining what is happening in the world. Bluntly telling someone new to this material that a group of powerful Satanists run the world is going to make you look insane and cause them to not even want to listen to anything else you have to say. There is a time and a place for these discussions, but you must be careful not to begin your discussion by talking about the elite’s desire to reduce the world’s population and then immediately jump to calling them a bunch of Satanists who do rituals out in the forest of the Bohemian Grove. This would be like explaining basic math to a child in school, and then immediately telling them about calculus. You must build a foundation of understanding before you present such material.

Sexual Abuse

While much of the information surrounding the New World Order such as government corruption, out of control taxes, and elite secret societies running the show are disturbing, nothing is more painful to read about than the grotesque allegations of child abuse said to occur at the hands of elite Illuminati members. It is believed that some high powered politicians and businessmen participate in sexual abuse against children, particularly boys. The most well-known scandal of this type occurred in the late 1980s, in what was called the Franklin Cover-up.

A font page Washington Times article ran the headline, “Underage Prostitution Ring Ensnares VIPs with Reagan, Bush”[cciii]and described how underage boys were taken on a tour of the White House around midnight by one of their abusers. Allegations have been made that such abuse took place inside the Bohemian Grove by elite members and was even videotaped.

If one can come to grips that such abuse takes place, one can’t help but wonder why someone would be interested in doing such things, and how could such events not be rare, isolated incidences committed by some lone sicko, but instead are done by an organized group of wealthy politicians. Answers are not easy to find, but inevitably come down to the perpetrators finding enjoyment in having absolute power over another helpless human being. Other explanations involve what is called sex magic (sometimes spelled magick) where the practitioners enjoy an adrenaline rush from committing such atrocities, and believe it opens their mind up to be able to harness metaphysical powers.

Planet X

There are a small number of people who believe that a large planet not known or denied to exist by mainstream astronomers, will one day either collide with planet earth and destroy it, or that it will orbit near the earth and then the aliens claimed to live on this planet will then invade earth. This supposed planet is either called Planet X or Nibiru.

This idea is believed to have originated in 1995 by a woman named Nancy Lieder who runs the website ZetaTalk.com. Lieder describes herself as an emissary who receives messages from extra-terrestrials who live in the Zeta Reticuli star system and says that she was chosen by the aliens to warn people that Planet X would arrive in May 2003 (later revised to 2010) and that a pole shift would destroy the world.

Another individual associated with Planet X is Zacharia Sitchin, who has written numerous books about how he believes that aliens called the Anunnaki created the human race by using their own DNA and mixing it with monkeys, thus creating humans. Sitchin hypothesizes it is a planet in a highly elliptical orbit around the Sun which completes an orbit every 3,600 years.

David Morrison, a Senior Scientist at NASA’s Astrobiology Institute at Ames Research Center, says he receives 20–25 emails each week asking him about Nibiru. He said some of the people are worried about such an event, and others say that he is part of a conspiracy to keep the truth of this impending event from becoming public.[cciv]

Nephilim and Anunnaki

The Nephilim are beings mentioned in the Old Testament of the Bible which are sometimes described as supernatural beings or fallen angels who came to earth and had children with human woman. Many Christians are surprised that such references are made in the Bible, and in the Contemporary English translation it actually calls them “supernatural beings.” Those who believe that there were such beings that came to earth and had children with human woman believe that these creatures and their offspring were killed off during Noah’s flood.

Others say the term does not refer to fallen angels or supernatural beings, but instead is a title given to a hero or great men of size and strength. If you search the Internet for this kind of information you will come across various photographs of what look like archeological digs that have uncovered enormous skeletons that look human, or have strange looking skulls that are said to be from the ancient Nephilim, but all such photos are frauds and have been made with Photoshop.

There are a small fraction of people who believe that the Nephilim are in fact supernatural beings whose bloodline continues to exist today and makes up the inner circle of the Illuminati. These people also believe that royal families in the ancient past were descendents of the Nephilim and say that this is where the idea of the divine right of kings comes from. You may occasionally see family trees that trace many famous presidents and members of the British Royal Family to numerous other famous and powerful leaders back through history. In these people’s minds, the half demon, half humans maintained power for generation after generation and kept interbreeding with each other in order to centralize their power.

An idea similar to the Nephilim comes from the Anunnaki, which refers to Sumerian and Babylonian gods from ancient times. Zecharia Sitchin and others believe that these Anunnaki are actually some kind of aliens who came to earth in the ancient past and created people by tweaking the DNA of monkeys to make humans. According to this theory then, these ancient humans saw these aliens as gods. Some who believe this kind of theory say that the Anunnaki created humans as slaves in order to mine gold that they say was needed to repair the atmosphere at the home planet of the Anunnaki. This, they say, is the source of human’s obsession with gold and the reason it has been used as money for 5000 years.

Some believers in the Anunnaki think that they live on Planet X and will return to earth some day and rule over humans like they did in the ancient past. The writers of Transformers 2 the movie were clearly aware of these theories and in the film viewers found that ancient Transformers came to earth and were worshiped as gods in Egypt thousands of years ago. These Transformers even looked similar to the elaborate head dresses that the pharaohs used to wear. Zecharia Sitchin and others say that they get their ideas from interpreting ancient hieroglyphics that they say ancient man used to record these events. While most people see ancient Egyptian writings about gods living on the earth as mythology, some interpret them as being literal history and say that these “gods” were actually aliens.

Reptilians

You may occasionally hear people say that “Reptilians” (or Reptoids) run the New World Order or comprise the inner circle of the Illuminati. What these often mentally deranged people are referring to is the idea that the elite Illuminati rulers are actually some kind of aliens or beings from another dimension who pose as humans so they can rule over us like gods. The most well-known author and speaker in the genre of the Illuminati and the New World Order to profess such beliefs is Britain’s David Icke. Icke professes that these “reptilians” as he calls them, have to drink human blood in order to keep their human form or else they would “shape-shift” back into a reptile-looking creature, and be exposed. In recent times, Icke has minimized his focus on reptilians and instead talks about more tangible issues. David Icke and his claims are discussed further and debunked in The Illuminati: Facts & Fiction (2009).

It’s interesting to note that the premise for the 1983 science fiction series called V was based on a group of human-looking aliens who traveled to earth in need of natural resources. As the series progressed, the viewers learned that the Visitors, as they were called, were actually lizards who wore rubber suits to make themselves look human, and actually ate human beings for food. A remake of the series was released in 2009. While many see the 1980s version of V as being the inspiration for David Icke’s wild theories, supporters of the “reptilian agenda” insist that the producers of V are just trying to cover up for the reptilians that rule the world.

December 21st 2012

Depending on when you are reading this book, the infamous date of December 21, 2012 is either rapidly approaching, or is now history and a thing of the past along with the over-hyped and sensationalized Y2K event that many feared would shut down computers around the world and unleash the apocalypse. For those who remember the weeks building up to the year 2000, you can understand the hype around 2012. As you likely know, some believe (or are making claims they know to be false in order to sell books) that a cataclysmic or transformative event will occur on or around December 21, 2012 which is believed to be the end-date of a 5,125-year-long Mayan calendar.

Some say that earth’s magnetic field will reverse due to the earth being aligned with the sun and the center of the galaxy, and some people falsely believe that all nine planets will be aligned in a straight line, causing a tremendous gravitational pull on the oceans, making them shift and flood most of the planet. Some New Age proponents are looking forward to the date and think the planet will undergo some metaphysical shift or transformation marking the New Age. And of course, some people think that the December 21, 2012 date marks the beginning of the apocalypse or the return of Jesus.

As early as 2009 entire shelves in Barnes and Noble book stores were full of books about 2012 and these foolish claims. A movie with the title of 2012 was released in 2009 and had over the top special effects of the earth being nearly destroyed as a result of an enormous solar flare causing massive earthquakes and floods. 2012 the movie was directed by Roland Emmerich, who also wrote and directed the climate change propaganda film, The Day After Tomorrow (2004).

As the December 21, 2012 date passes and the world doesn’t end and the Anunnaki aliens don’t invade earth, many of the believers in the 2012 prophecy will grasp at straws and point to unrelated minor events as proof that the prophecies were correct, but the catastrophe wasn’t as bad as people thought. Others will simply go on with their life and forget they believed such foolishness, and some will even say that the calendar must have been misinterpreted and will move the date of earth’s destruction into the future, such as the year 2020 and will relive the hype all over again.

Black Helicopters

People who talk about conspiracies or the New World Order are often ridiculed by others and asked about “black helicopters,” so the subject will be briefly addressed here to clarify how this term came to be used as an insult. Its use began to be used by militia and patriot groups in the 1990s as a description of black unmarked helicopters used by the military for various exercises or domestic missions. The helicopters drew suspicion by some and were said to be from the United Nations or part of a military takeover of the United States. The concept stems from the fact that many government agencies use dark and unmarked helicopters such as the ones deployed during the Ruby Ridge standoff in 1992.

Some paranoid and delusional people think when a helicopter flies over their house that it is watching them or tracking them somehow. Law enforcement have been known to fly helicopters over residential areas at a low altitude and use an infrared sensor to identify grow houses used specifically for growing marijuana because the houses emit an abnormal amount of heat from all the indoor lighting, which can be detected by infrared scanners.

Today most mentions of black helicopters are by people using the term as an insult, such as asking people who talk about the Illuminati if they’ve “seen any black helicopters.” The people who use this term as an insult like this show their own ignorance of important issues about the New World Order.

Underground Bases and Tunnels

An entire chapter can be found in this author’s previous book, The Resistance Manifesto, detailing the existence of massive underground bases and tunnels that are engineering marvels and is a fascinating subject to explore. In brief, there are a series of underground tunnels in the United States and most likely the rest of the world, that connect to various underground bases, and have access points from government (and likely private) buildings. The tunnels are created by TBM’s (Tunnel Boring Machines) which are enormous structures that burrow through solid rock. The Robbins Company is the largest builder of TBM’s and their website www.TheRobbinsCompany.com contains photos of these massive machines and information about their capabilities.

The existence of tunnels and underground bases have been openly admitted in several instances, including specific locations, but the extent of the underground tunnel network remains something the government won’t discuss. It’s likely a network spans the country, as well as the globe. The tunnels exist as a passage way for politicians and elite government officials to use in the event of a massive nuclear attack on America, so they can travel to different parts of the country that haven’t been hit and then can safely return to the surface. They operate as a secret underground subway system.

A man named Phil Schneider would forever link these structures to the New World Order when he gave a series of lectures in the 1990s claiming to have worked on such structures, and during this work he says he got into a shootout with some aliens that were living in the tunnels. Schneider’s fascinating but fraudulent claims are detailed and debunked in The Illuminati: Facts & Fiction if you wish to read more about this subject.

But for the sake of this book, it should be known that such tunnels and bases do exist, and can be hidden in plain view. For example, the Greenbrier is a luxury resort in West Virginia that secretly had a bunker built inside during a fake renovation in the 1950s. The bunker had remained secret from the public for over 30 years until a 1992 article in the Washington Post. Immediately after the article was published the bunker was decommissioned and has been a tourist attraction for visitors of the resort ever since.

Manchurian Candidates

The subject of mind control appears on the surface to be nothing more than science fiction, but the ability to manipulate people’s behavior against their will has been thoroughly investigated by the CIA and other government agencies. The term “Manchurian Candidate” refers to someone who is a victim of mind control who is “programmed” to assassinate someone. Many people don’t believe such a thing is possible, but after looking into the declassified documents from MK-ULTRA and learning the power of hypnotism, the idea of a mind controlled assassin “programmed” to kill isn’t far-fetched at all, and instead can be seen as a very real scientific fact.

In 1979 a former State Department Officer named John D. Marks published a book titled The Search for the Manchurian Candidate which details the CIA’s efforts to create such assassins. Only a small amount of material was declassified regarding these programs but the available information clearly shows that as far back as the 1950s the US government was developing such methods.

Some suspected Manchurian Candidates are as follows: Sirhan Sirhan, who assassinated Senator Robert F. Kennedy in 1968. Mark David Chapman, who murdered John Lennon in 1980. Some believe the Columbine High School shooters, Eric Harris and Dylan Klebold, were programmed assassins, as well as Nidal Malik Hasan who killed 13 people and wounded 30 others in the Fort Hood shooting in Texas in November 2009.

Fake Suicides and “Accidents”

Aside from being able to mentally program people to become assassins or carry out tasks against their will, as if they were a robot, elements within the CIA have the ability (and have used this ability) to murder people and then make it look like they either committed suicide or died in an unfortunate accident. The term “suicided” refers to an incident where someone is murdered but their death was made to look like a suicide.

This is able to occur by various black operation groups that work for the CIA and have guns that use a C02 cartridge to shoot a tiny piece of a frozen tranquilizer into the subject, rendering them unable to move or knocking them unconscious. The agents then are able to stage a hanging, push the victim off a tall building, or even placing the victim’s own gun in their hand and point it at their head and pull the trigger.

Deborah Jeane Palfrey, the woman known as the DC madam who operated an elite prostitution service with powerful clients in Washington DC supposedly committed suicide in May 2008. She had previously stated publicly that she would never do such a thing, and even feared she would be killed in a staged accident or suicided.

[ccv]Gary Webb, a reporter for the San Francisco Chronicle largely responsible for uncovering the CIA’s involvement in cocaine trafficking in the 1980s allegedly committed suicide. Webb was found dead from two (that’s right, two) gunshot wounds to the head. Sacramento County coroner Robert Lyons determined that it was suicide.

Two teenage boys, Don Henry and Kevin Ives were murdered in 1987 and had their bodies placed on a railroad track in attempts to cover it up after they had curiously stumbled onto the CIA’s cocaine importing operation located in Mena, Arkansas. The boys murders were initially ruled suicides, but after their families pushed for an investigation, a grand jury ruled they were murdered but named no suspects. A total of six other people connected to this case were murdered in the coming months as well, as the perpetrators attempted to silence all witnesses.[ccvi]

On July 11, 1990, the lead investigator of the Franklin Cover-up, Gary Caradori, was killed when his small plane had a mid-air explosion. Prior to the flight Caradori had informed others working on the case that he had obtained critical evidence that would prove a group of perverted politicians and businessmen with connections to the Reagan administration were involved in sexually abusing children.

Many people in Britain and around the world think that Princess Dianna was murdered and a member or members of the paparazzi used some kind of laser pointer to blind the limo driver, or believe the car had been tampered with causing it to crash. The list of suspicious deaths and suicides of people who could implicate high level politicians in various crimes goes on and on.

The Svalbard Global Seed Vault

The Svalbard Global Seed Vault is an enormous seed bank located about 800 miles from the North Pole on the Norwegian island of Spitsbergen. The vault holds a wide variety of plant seeds from around the world and keeps them frozen in order to preserve them in case of a global catastrophe such as a nuclear war. Such an event could potentially destroy an entire region of the world, so seeds for food, vegetation, trees, and other plants are kept in the vault, in the event that the natural habitat containing such species would be destroyed.

The Svalbald Seed Vault seems like the result of someone’s paranoid delusion, but the project is very serious, as well as expensive. It’s interesting that some people ridicule others who have long-term storable food in case of an emergency such as a natural disaster, massive terrorist attack, sudden economic collapse leading to food shortages, or rioting preventing people from getting to a grocery store to buy food. Such a precaution is a good idea, and the fact that millions of dollars have gone into the Svalbard Seed Vault shows that even the elite are prepared for the worst.

Conclusion

You are now, undoubtedly, able to see the New World Order and what is likely in store for your future. You may still find some of the information in this book to be unbelievable, and if this is the case, feel free to check the numerous sources that have been cited, many of which are from congressional hearings, declassified documents, mainstream media, or sound bites you can find for yourself on YouTube. It is at the very least interesting that in the 1980s and 1990s, when patriots and concerned citizens would warn of a New World Order being planned and slowly implemented, that they were called crazy and conspiracy theorists, yet today, we have prominent politicians around the world publicly stating their desire for such a thing, even using the term “New World Order” to describe their utopian dream. Some still think it’s only a conspiracy theory, and some wrestling fans think it refers to Hulk Hogan and his gang of wrestlers who were attempting to “take over” World Wrestling Entertainment with their group who called themselves the “New World Order.”

The uninformed and apathetic public has only helped the elite Illuminati construct their global government and Big Brother surveillance society. New taxes have been implemented without much resistance, and more and higher taxes are only right around the corner. While most of the population is lost in a world of professional sports, sitcoms, and Facebook; others like you are aware, or are becoming aware that the American dream is being stolen, and are learning of the people and institutions which are to blame. Whether this book is a starting point on your journey to awakening, or whether it is just one more resource you have discovered to assemble the pieces of the puzzle, you should be grateful that your eyes are open. Where and how you channel your knowledge, energy and activism from this point forward is an important decision that you will have to make. Will you just keep this information to yourself, or will you tell others? Will you be an armchair quarterback, or will you attend public rallies and town hall meetings? Will you be afraid to speak up when faced with propaganda and lies, or will you say something?

It can be difficult to articulate and explain some of this information to others who are completely unaware of it. It can be hard to cite sources off the top of your head, or to answer all the questions they may have. It is for these reasons that I encourage you to pass this book on to them so they can have at their fingertips the exact quotes, sources of information, and the details necessary to show them what they are missing.

Even if you have been looking into the New World Order for many years, I can confidently say that this author has compiled the best, most accurate, and important information about the subject and if you spend any amount of time reading my other books, I can assure you that you will find pieces of the puzzle you did not even think existed.

People often ask me how I got involved in all of this, or how I was able to write several books on the subject at a fairly young age. The answer is that I studied mainstream media in college and saw from an early age how the media can influence culture, trends, attitudes, and actions. I had to write a lot of papers in college on a variety of subjects and found myself able to explain complicated concepts and issues in a way that could be easily understood by the reader. I enjoyed staying up late listening to music and working on my papers. I also excelled at public speaking. It is a gift, and I am a talkative person who is fascinated by the political process and the mysteries of life.

When I discovered the hidden realities of the September 11th 2001 terrorist attacks it led me on a journey down the rabbit hole and I began to see the big picture of the New World Order. I found a whole new world of information that was right in front of me the whole time, but I hadn’t stopped for a minute to even look. I began documenting the information I found so I could get it clear in my mind and share it with others. I sifted through the countless allegations and claims about a wide variety of issues all stemming from 9/11, the Illuminati, or the New World Order. I know after speaking with others and getting emails from people who also find themselves on a similar journey, that it is a life-changing one.

The fact that you are reading this shows that you are on a path similar to the one I was on when I first discovered this kind of material. It is my sincere hope that by reading my books, listening to my interviews, and watching my videos that you can learn to separate the facts from the fiction and not get distracted by useless controversies that arise in the context of this information.

I, like most of us, was once duped by the establishment, and out of my anger at them, and out of my love and respect for my fellow human beings, I feel it is my duty to do what I have done and inform others of the corrupt, power-hungry scum that are making life more difficult for others and who ruthlessly take advantage of others and couldn’t care less about their health, happiness, or well-being.

Their game is primarily that of occult knowledge, which means hidden knowledge, and selfishness and greed. Some people feel helpless and say that the elite are too strong or that the prophecies are going to get fulfilled no matter what we do, so they throw up their hands and surrender. If Martin Luther King Jr. had such an attitude that the system was too strong, then he wouldn’t have had the courage to stand up against it and peacefully fight the injustice that millions of African Americans faced.

There are countless of examples of public outrage that have led to new policies being abandoned or laws being changed. While we can also list examples that the establishment has won in the face of massive resistance, we must not overlook the times when they have lost. There is a famous quote that says, “all that is necessary for the triumph of evil is that good men do nothing.”

So now that this book is finished and you know what the New World Order is, and what its creators and supporters envision it to be in the future, my question to you is, will you do nothing and let them win without a fight?

Bibliography

Books

Note: News articles and websites are cited in the footnotes on the pages where they are referenced.

Bailey, Alice The Externalization of the Hierarchy Lucis Publishing Company 1957 ISBN: 0-85330-106-9

Bailey, Alice A Treatise on White Magic Lucis Publishing Company (June 1998) ISBN-10: 0853301239

Blavatsky, Helena .P. - The Secret Doctrine v. I & II The Theosophical Publishing Company 1888 ISBN: 1-55700-002-06

Christian, Robert Common Sense Renewed 1986 Stoyles Graphic Serves Lake Mills Iowa ISBN: 0-89279-078-4

Crème, Benjamin. The Reappearance of the Christ and the Masters of Wisdom. 2007 Share International Foundation ISBN: 90-71484-32-7

Crowley, Aleister. Magick: In Theory and Practice 1979 Smith Peter ISBN: 0844654760

Crowley, Aleister. Book of the Law 1938 Ordo Templi Orientis ISBN: 087728-334-6

DeCamp, John W. The Franklin Cover-up: Child Abuse, Satanism, and Murder in Nebraska ISBN: 0963215809 A W T, Incorporated 1992

Elberton Granite Museum. The Georgia Guidestones “Elberton’s Most Unusual Granite Monument” 1980 Elberton Granite Museum and Exhibit Pamphlet. Elberton, GA 30635

Estulin, Daniel The True Story of the Bilderberg Group 2007 TrineDay ISBN: 0-9777953-4-9

Griffin, G. Edward The Creature from Jekyll Island American Media; 4th edition (2002)

Hall, Manly P. The Lost Keys of Freemasonry: Or, the Secret of Hiram Abiff 1994 ISBN: 0880530448 Macoy Publishing & Masonic Supply Company

Hall, Manly P. The Secret Teachings of All Ages the Philosophical Research Society Press Philosophical Research Society 1999. ISBN: 0893145483

Hall, Manly P. Lectures on Ancient Philosophy Tarcher (2005) ISBN: 1585424323

Holdren, John; Ehrlich, Paul R.; Ehrlich, Anne H. – Ecoscience: Population, Resources, Environment W H Freeman & Co (1977)

LaVey, Anton The Satanic Bible Avon (December 1, 1976) ISBN-10: 0380015390

Leverett, Mara. The Boys on the Tracks: Death, Denial, and a Mother’s Crusade to Bring her Son’s Killers to Justice 1999 St. Martin’s Press ISBN: 0312198418

Marks, John. The Search for the “Manchurian Candidate”: The CIA and Mind Control, the Secret History of the Behavior Sciences 1979 Norton and Company, New York ISBN: 0393307948

Millegan, Kris. Fleshing our Skull and Bones: Investigations into Americas Most Powerful Secret Society. TrineDay, LLC Walterville, OR 2003 ISBN: 0-9752906-0-6

Orwell, George Nineteen Eighty Four (Centennial Edition) Plume Printing (1983) ISBN: 0-452-28423-6

Pastor, Robert - Toward a North American Community: Lessons from the Old World for the New

Pike, Albert. Morals and Dogma of the Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rite Freemasonry Reprinted by Kesslinger Publishing ISBN: 0-7661-2615-3

Quigley, Caroll Tragedy and Hope A History of the World in Our Time G. S. G. & Associates, Incorporated (June 1975) ISBN-10: 094500110X

Sauder, Richard Ph. D. Underground Bases and Tunnels: What is the government trying to hide? Adventures Unlimited Press. 1995 ISBN: 0-932813-37-2

Tucker, Jim Jim Tucker’s Bilderberg Diary American Free Press (2005) ISBN-10: 0974548421

Government Reports and Documents

Project For a New American Century

Chemical and Biological Defense, DOD and VA Need to Improve Efforts to Identify and Notify Individuals Potentially Exposed during Chemical and Biological Tests

Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change Report (IPCC)

The MIAC Report: The Modern Militia Movement page (2009)

Project Megiddo Report by the FBI (1999)

Right-wing Extremism: Current Economic and Political Climate Fueling Resurgence in Radicalization and Recruitment, (2009)

YouTube Videos

These videos are sourced in the footnotes on the pages that they are referenced. These videos come from a variety of sources including mainstream news broadcasts

Dick Morris: Conspiracy Theorists were Right.

Gold for Bread - Zimbabwe

MSNBC Host: Word "Socialist" Code For The "N-Word"

Chris Matthews Proclaims Criticizing Michelle Obama Having 26 Aides Is Racist Aired September 1, 2009

Jimmy Carter: Opposition to Obama is Racist

Tim Geithner Lies : Flip Flops On New World Currency Originally aired on CNN’s Lou Dobbs Tonight on March 25, 2009.

Violating Posse Comitatus: National Guard on the Streets of Kingman, Arizona

WeAreChange Ohio Investigates military check points

An Inconvenient Mormon, a speech by Glenn Beck

Glenn Beck Mentions FEMA Camps on Fox & Friends

Glenn Beck ties Holocaust Shooter to 9/11 Truthers

Mancow Waterboarded (2009)

Rahm Emanuel: If you are on no fly list, no gun!

Fox Hypes H1N1 Nasal Vaccine - Don't believe the "Conspiracy Theories"

MSNBC: Get the Damn Flu Vaccine

RFID Bracelet Once You Have Had Swine Flu Vaccination

Robert Kennedy on the Vaccine Autism Cover-up

Footnotes

[i] The Obama Deception (2009) produced by Alex Jones

[ii] Video clip available on YouTube. Dick Morris: Conspiracy Theorists were Right.

[iii] CNN Kissinger resigns as head of 9/11 commission December 13, 2002

[iv] Earth Times Merkel: No world peace without multilateral cooperation November 9,2009

[v] http://www.number10.gov.uk/Page1535

[vi] http://www.number10.gov.uk/Page1661

[vii] BBC Blair returns to New World Order January 4, 2002 by Nyta Mann

[viii] http://www.number10.gov.uk/Page1765

[ix] London Guardian Pope calls for a New World Order January 2, 2004 by John Hooper

[x] Matrix of Evil (2000) a film by Alex Jones

[xi] Hall, Manly P. – The Secret Teachings of All Ages page 6

[xii] Hall, Manly P. – The Secret Teaching of All Ages page 315

[xiii] Bailey, Alice – Externalization of the Hierarchy page 511

[xiv] Bailey, Alice – Externalization of the Hierarchy p. 519

[xv] Bailey, Alice – Externalization of the Hierarchy p. 519-520

[xvi] Pike, Albert – Morals and Dogma page 817

[xvii] Hall, Manly P. – Lectures on Ancient Philosophy page 433

[xviii] Pike, Albert – Morals and Dogma page 104-105

[xix] Pike, Albert – Morals and Dogma page 213

[xx] Quigley, Carroll – Tragedy and Hope pages 1247-1248

[xxi] Blavatsky, H.P. – The Secret Doctrine v. II p. 237

[xxii] MSNBC Reading Hillary Rodham’s hidden thesis By Bill Dedman May 9, 2007

[xxiii] Born June 12, 1915

[xxiv] YouTube.com/MarkDice

[xxv] The Hill.com GOP preps for talk radio confrontation June 27, 2007 by Alexander Bolton

[xxvi] Human Events Pelosi Supports ‘Fairness’ Doctrine by John Gizzi June 25, 2008

[xxvii] CNS News Democratic Senator Tells Conservative Radio Station He'd Re-impose Fairness Doctrine--on Them by Pete Winn October 22, 2008

[xxviii] San Francisco Peninsula Press Club Rep. Eshoo to push for Fairness Doctrine December 16, 2008

[xxix] World Net Daily #Another senator lines up behind 'Fairness Doctrine'February 5, 2009

[xxx] Politico.com Sen. Harkin: 'We need the Fairness Doctrine back' by Michael Calderon February 11, 2009

[xxxi] Washington Post TV Movie Led to Prostitute's Disclosures 'Mayflower Madam' Gave Gobie Idea By Bill Dedman August 27, 1989

[xxxii] Ibid

[xxxiii] FoxNews.com Barney Frank Present When Partner Arrested for Pot November 6, 2009

[xxxiv] http://www.politico.com/news/stories/1009/28549.html

[xxxv] The Los Angeles Times Senate approves bailout after revisions, 74-25October 2 2008

[xxxvi] 24 Hours with Steve-O broadcast on 2 July 2007 on ITV1 in the UK with host Jamie Campbell

[xxxvii] Baltimore Sun “Jackass” Star Steve-O Hospitalized March 13, 2008.

[xxxviii] Ibid

[xxxix] Reality TV World. Steve-O pleads guilty to felony cocaine charge but avoids jail time Jun 4, 2008

[xl] TMZ.com Britney – The Devil Made Me Do It! Posted Nov 12th 2009 12:50AM

[xli] BBC Rap fan guilty of suitcase murder December 1, 2005

[xlii] Salon.com Grand Death Auto by David Kushner February 22, 2005

[xliii] The Washington Post Boy, 6, Misses Bus, Takes Mom's Car Instead January 7, 200

[xliv] Guinness World Records 2009 Gamer's Edition. p. 108-109

[xlv] Associated Press Gay penguin book shakes up Illinois school By Jim Suhr Updated 11/17/2006 7:39 AM ET

[xlvi] Fox News: Do You Know What Text Books Your Children Are Reading?

[xlvii] CBS News Kevin Jennings Gets Boost from White House October 1, 2009

[xlviii] New York Post Trashy Halloween costumes for kids worry parents October 12, 2009 By Shari Logan and Adam Nichols

[xlix] Ibid

[l] http://www.baristanet.com/baristakids/blog/why-is-it-so-hard-to-find-a-girls-halloween-costume-that-wouldnt-get-her-on-the-slut-list/

[li] CNN.com Atheist ads to adorn New York subway stations October 21, 2009

[lii] People Magazine Coroner: Dr. Dre's Son Died From Overdose of Heroin and Morphine by Ken Lee January 2, 2009

[liii] YouTube: Gold for Bread - Zimbabwe

[liv] World Net Daily CNN gutter talk complaint awaits review at FCC April 24, 2009 Bob Unruh

[lv] MSNBC: The Rachel Maddow Show: Insani-Tea: Conservatives Rally Around "Teabagging"

[lvi] http://www.adl.org/special_reports/rage-grows-in-America/default.asp

[lvii] YouTube: MSNBC Host: Word "Socialist" Code For The "N-Word"

[lviii] YouTube: Chris Matthews Proclaims Criticizing Michelle Obama Having 26 Aides Is Racist Aired September 1, 2009

[lix] YouTube: Jimmy Carter: Opposition to Obama is Racist

[lx] Quigley, Carroll – Tragedy and Hope page 324

[lxi] The New York Times The amero conspiracy By Drake Bennett November 25, 2007

[lxii] Pastor, Robert - Toward a North American Community: Lessons from the Old World for the New page 115

[lxiii] Anderson, James E., Van Wincoop, Eric (September 8, 2001). "Borders, Trade and Welfare" (PDF). Brookings Trade Forum (Washington: Brookings Institution Press): 207–244

[lxiv] http://www.halturnershow.blogspot.com/2008/12/urgent-new-amero-paper-currency-exposed.html

[lxv] Ibid

[lxvi] Daily Freeman White supremacist Turner worked for FBI, lawyer saysAugust 19, 2009

[lxvii] Ibid

[lxviii] YouTube: Tim Geithner Lies : Flip Flops On New World Currency Originally aired on CNN’s Lou Dobbs Tonight on March 25, 2009.

[lxix] The Moscow Times At G20, Kremlin to Pitch New Currency March, 17 2009 By Ira Iosebashvili

[lxx] Bloomberg.com Medvedev Shows Off Sample Coin of New ‘World Currency’ at G-8 By Lyubov Pronina July 10 2009

[lxxi] Herald Sun Nobel-prize winner backs world currency March 11, 2009

[lxxii] http://www.census.gov/ipc/www/popclockworld.html

[lxxiii] The Citizen Scientist Meeting Doctor Doom by Forrest M. Mims III March 2006

[lxxiv] Austin American-Statesman Professor’s population speeches unnerve some April 5, 2006

[lxxv] http://uts.cc.utexas.edu/~varanus/Everybody.html

[lxxvi] http://uts.cc.utexas.edu/~varanus/obit.html

[lxxvii] The Age Burnet’s solution: The plan to poison S-E Asia By Brendan Nicholson March 10, 2002

[lxxviii] Deutsche Press Agentur (DPA) His Royal Virus August, 1988.

[lxxix] Holdren, John – Ecoscience page 787-788

[lxxx] Holdren, John – Ecoscience pages 786-787

[lxxxi] Holdren, John – Ecoscience pages 786-787

[lxxxii] Holdren, John – Ecoscience page 837

[lxxxiii] Holdren, John – Ecoscience page 838

[lxxxiv] Holdren, John – Ecoscience pages 942-943

[lxxxv] Christian, Robert – Common Sense Renewed p. 6

[lxxxvi] Wired Magazine American Stonehenge: Monumental Instructions for the Post–Apocalypse By Randall Sullivan 04.20.09

[lxxxvii] Hall, Manly P. – Lectures on Ancient Philosophy page 150

[lxxxviii] World Net Daily Bible verses regarded as hate literature by Art Moore February 18, 2003

[lxxxix] CBN News UK Christian Target of Hate Crimes Law by Gary Lane October 31, 2009

[xc] World Net Daily Christians arrested at homosexual event October 15, 2004

[xci] http://www.irs.gov/charities/charitable/article/0,,id=163395,00.html

[xcii] Ibid

[xciii] USA Today Church could lose tax-exempt status for anti-war sermon 11/08/2005

[xciv] The New York Times Group Loses Tax Break Over Gay Union Issue September 18, 2007 by Jill Capuzzo

[xcv] PrisonPlanet.com Secret FEMA Plan To Use Pastors as Pacifiers in Preparation For Martial Law May 24 2006

[xcvi] Bailey, Alice – Externalization of the Hierarchy p. 409

[xcvii] Bailey, Alice – Externalization of the Hierarchy page 416

[xcviii] Bailey, Alice – Externalization of the Hierarchy page 513

[xcix] Bailey, Alice – Externalization of the Hierarchy page 82

[c] Associated Press Pope affirms Catholicism as only way to salvation By Nicole Winfield July 11, 2007

[ci] The New York Times Vatican astronomer cites possibility of extraterrestrial 'brothers'

[cii] Hall, Manly P. – The Secret Teachings page 231

[ciii] Crème, Benjamin – The Reappearance of the Christ and the Masters of Wisdom p. 25

[civ] Washington Post When Seeing and Hearing Isn’t Believing By William M. ArkinFeb. 1, 1999

[cv] Police State 2000 by Alex Jones

[cvi] Holdren, John – Ecoscience page 917

[cvii] The Associated Press In shift, Blackwater dumps tarnished brand nameby Mike Baker February 13, 2009

[cviii] The Washington Post Iraq to Deny New License To Blackwater Security Firm: U.S. Embassy's Preferred Contractor Accused of Killings by Ernesto Londoño and Qais Mizher January 29, 2009

[cix] The Virginian-Pilot Blackwater: On the Front Lines by Bill Sizemore and Joanne Kimberlin 7-25-2007

[cx] The New York Times Blackwater Said to Pursue Bribes to Iraq After 17 DiedBy Mark Mazzetti and James Risen November 10, 2009

[cxi] Billings Gazette Montana Attorney general to investigate APF by Jennifer McKee October 1, 2009

[cxii] Billings Gazette APF Hilton has Criminal Past September 30, 2009 by Ruffin Prevost

[cxiii] AFP Nepalese man sues KBR on human trafficking charges August 27, 2008

[cxiv] The New York Times Limbo for U.S. Women Reporting Iraq AssaultsFebruary 13, 2008 by James Risen

[cxv] YouTube: Violating Posse Comitatus: National Guard on the Streets of Kingman, Arizona

[cxvi] CHP News Press Release December 10, 2008

[cxvii] http://www.kesq.com/Global/story.asp?S=9534627

[cxviii] YouTube: WeAreChange Ohio Investigates military check points

[cxix] Ibid

[cxx] The Jurist Challenging the Military Commissions Act October 4th 2006

[cxxi] CBS2 New York News Pier 57 Likened To Guantanamo

[cxxii] YouTube: An Inconvenient Mormon, a speech by Glenn Beck

[cxxiii] YouTube: Glenn Beck Mentions FEMA Camps on Fox & Friends

[cxxiv] YouTube: Glenn Beck ties Holocaust Shooter to 9/11 Truthers

[cxxv] The London Telegraph Abu Ghraib abuse photos 'show rape' By Duncan Gardham and Paul Cruickshank May 27, 2009

[cxxvi] Ibid

[cxxvii] YouTube: Mancow Waterboarded (2009)

[cxxviii] Columbia Day Tribune ‘Fusion center’ data draws fire over assertions by T.J. Greaney March 14, 2009

[cxxix] The MIAC Report: The Modern Militia Movement page 4

[cxxx] Ibid

[cxxxi] The MIAC Report: The Modern Militia Movement page 7

[cxxxii] The MIAC Report: The Modern Militia Movement page 7

[cxxxiii] World Net Daily Homeland Security on guard for 'right-wing extremists' April 12, 2009

[cxxxiv] Project Megiddo Report (1999) page 6

[cxxxv] Project Megiddo Report (1999) page 12

[cxxxvi] Project Megiddo Report (1999) page 13

[cxxxvii] CBS2 New York News Pier 57 Likened To Guantanamo

[cxxxviii] Project Megiddo Report (1999) page 21

[cxxxix] Project Megiddo Report (1999) page 29

[cxl] Project Megiddo Report (1999) page 32

[cxli] The Denver Post Terror watch uses local eyes 181 Trained in Colo. By Bruce Finley 6-29-2008

[cxlii] The Progressive Exclusive! The FBI Deputizes Business by Matthew Rothschild February 7, 2008

[cxliii] Ibid.

[cxliv] Associated Press Police chiefs endorse anti-terror community watch by Eileen Sullivan and P. Solomon Banda October 3, 2009

[cxlv] NBCChicago.com Rats! City to Pay for Informing on Tax Cheats By Andrew Greiner

[cxlvi] Ibid

[cxlvii] The New York Times Scouts Train to Fight Terrorists, and More by Jennifer Steinhauer May 13, 2009

[cxlviii] Ibid

[cxlix] http://www.adl.org/special_reports/rage-grows-in-America/default.asp

[cl] FoxNews.com Sotomayor's Gun Control Positions Could Prompt Conservative Backlash May 28, 2009

[cli] YouTube: Rahm Emanuel: If you are on no fly list, no gun!

[clii] http://www.aclu.org/privacy/spying/watchlistcounter.html

[cliii] http://www.msnbc.msn.com/id/10725741/

[cliv] http://www.cnn.com/2008/US/07/17/watchlist.chertoff/index.html

[clv] USA Today New California law tracks ammunition sales October 12, 2009

[clvi] Hall, Manly P. – The Secret Teachings of All Ages p. 282

[clvii] Hall, Manly P. – The Secret Teachings of All Ages p. 283

[clviii] UN Member States as of January 2010

[clix] World Net Daily Minutemen: Don't call us 'vigilantes' April 14, 2005 by Larry Elder

[clx] CNNMoney.com Banking on illegal immigrants August 8, 2005 by Shaheen Pasha

[clxi] The North County Times Credit cards for illegal immigrants cause controversy February 25, 2007 by Edward Sifuentes

[clxii] Associated Content Voting Without ID is the Real Scam January 14, 2008 by Barry Dennis

[clxiii] World Net Daily Where Illegals go for Driver’s License July 22, 2005

[clxiv] BBC News Barcelona clubbers get chipped September 29, 2004

[clxv] http://archive.newsmax.com/archives/ic/2006/8/21/232558.shtml

[clxvi] The Herald Sun Biometrics helps spot banned gamblers by Tom Wilemon 5-5-05

[clxvii] Associated Press / FoxNews.com FBI Ditches Carnivore Surveillance SystemJanuary 18, 2005

[clxviii] New York Daily News Model Liskula Cohen sues Google over blogger's 'skank' comment By Jose Martinez January 6th 2009

[clxix] http://volokh.com/posts/1241122059.shtml

[clxx] FoxNews.com Cyberbullying Bill Could Ensnare Free Speech Rights May 14, 2009 By Steven Kotler

[clxxi] USA Today Number of Americans taking antidepressants doubles 8-4-2009 by Liz Szabo

[clxxii] Hershel Jick; James A. Kaye; Susan S. Jick Antidepressants and the Risk of Suicidal BehaviorsJournal of the American Medical Association July 21, 2004; 292: 338 - 343.

[clxxiii] Scientific American February 2008 issue The Medicated Americans: Antidepressant Prescriptions on the Rise by Charles Barber

[clxxiv] Times Online Medical chief warns of extremists’ attacking flu vaccination campaign by David Rose

[clxxv] http://www.cnn.com/2009/HEALTH/10/23/new.york.flu.vaccine/index.html

[clxxvi] YouTube: Fox Hypes H1N1 Nasal Vaccine - Don't believe the "Conspiracy Theories"

[clxxvii] YouTube: MSNBC: Get the Damn Flu Vaccine

[clxxviii] http://www.newswithviews.com/Evensen/greg142.htm

[clxxix] YouTube: RFID Bracelet Once You Have Had Swine Flu Vaccination

[clxxx] YouTube: Robert Kennedy on the Vaccine Autism Cover-up

[clxxxi] News Bulletin (Moscow: Interfax) Russian parliament concerned about U.S. plans to create qualitatively new weapons August 8, 2002

[clxxxii] The Alex Jones Show 11-10-09

[clxxxiii] The Washington Post Mind Games By Sharon Weinberger January 14, 2007

[clxxxiv] http://www.ksla.com/Global/story.asp?s=7339345

[clxxxv] PBS Timeline: Biological Weapons: American Experience. December 15, 2006

[clxxxvi] http://www.globalsecurity.org/wmd/systems/bw.htm.

[clxxxvii] BBC Hidden history of US germ testing February 13, 2006

[clxxxviii] Salt Lake Tribune Report: Army still reluctant to find those affected by Utah weapons tests by Matthew .LaPlante February 28, 2008

[clxxxix] The Guardian RAF rainmakers 'caused 1952 flood' by John Vidal and Helen Weinstein August 30, 2001

[cxc] BBC News Rain-making link to killer floods August 30, 2001

[cxci] The Pentagon Papers, Gravel Edition, Volume 4, Chapter 2, US Ground Strategy and Force Deployments, 1965-1968, pp. 277-604, 3rd section Mtholyoke.edu.

[cxcii] The New York Times Rainmaking Is Used As Weapon by U.S.; Cloud-Seeding in Indochina

[cxciii] Reuters China weather "magic" conjures blue sky for parade October 1, 2009

[cxciv] AFP Beijing's first snow of season 'artificially induced' November 2, 2009

[cxcv] Time Magazine Moscow Mayor Promises a Winter Without Snow By Simon Shuster Oct. 16, 2009

[cxcvi] Daily Mail Human race will 'split into two different species' By Nail Firth October 26, 2007

[cxcvii] Sanger, Margaret – A Plan For Peace, Birth Control Review, April 1932, p. 106

[cxcviii] Ibid.

[cxcix] ABC This Week with George Stephanopoulos

[cc] The Washington Post In the trenches on climate change, hostility among foes By Juliet Eilperin November 22, 2009

[cci] The Guardian Carbon labels to help shoppers save planet By Tania Branigan and Helen Carter May 31, 2007

[ccii] USA Today 'The Day After Tomorrow' heats up a political debate by Scott Bowles May 26, 2004

[cciii] Washington Times June 29, 1989

[cciv] Discovery.com Armageddon from Planet Nibiru in 2012? Not so fastby David Morrison (2008)

[ccv] PrisonPlanet.com DC Madam Predicted She Would Be Suicided May 1, 2008 by Paul Joseph Watson

[ccvi] World Net Daily The boys on the tracks July 17, 2000 by Maralyn Lois Polak